WebFOCUS 8.1 Technical Library
  Contact Us!
  Contact Us!
WebFOCUS Release 8.1 Version 05M
  New Features and Release Notes
    WebFOCUS New Features
      Introduction to WebFOCUS Release 8.1 Version 05M
        New Feature Summary
        Our Promise to Customers and Partners
      Migrating WebFOCUS Environments
        Migration Process
      Reporting With WebFOCUS
        WebFOCUS InfoAssist Enhancements
        Active Technologies Enhancements
        App Studio Enhancements
        Reporting Language Enhancements
      Charting With WebFOCUS
        InfoDiscovery
        WebFOCUS Chart and Graph Enhancements
      Business Analytics
        Magnify Enhancements
      Developing Applications
        Business Intelligence Portal
      Scheduling and Distributing Information
        ReportCaster Enhancements
      Administering and Securing the Environment
        WebFOCUS Client Repository and Authorization Security Enhancements
      Server Enhancements
        Applications
        Configuration and Monitoring
        Core Server and Clients
        Diagnostics
        Metadata
        National Language Support
        Security
        Web Console
      Adapter Enhancements
        All Adapters
        SQL Adapters
        ERP Adapters
        OLAP Adapters
        DBMS Adapters
        Procedures Adapters
        Sequential and Indexed Adapters
        Social Media Adapters
        XML-Based Adapters
      DataMigrator Enhancements
        Check File
        Dependencies Analysis Report
        Updating Synonyms
        Quick ETL Copy
        Copying Selected Columns Using Quick ETL Copy
        Copy Server Node
        Noncontiguous Keys
        Global Variables Editor
        Updates for Type I Fields
        Annotations in Flows
        Finding Text in SQL Object
        Extended Load Bulk Enhancements
        Loading Images From Files
        JSON Document Target
        WHERE Calculator Support for ANY and ALL
        Impact Analysis Enhancements
        Slowly Changing Dimensions
        Extended Bulk Load Utility for MS SQL ODBC Adapter
        Transformation Calculator Enhancements
        New SQL Functions
        Data Profiling Drill-Down Reports for Patterns
        Managing Object Groups In A Flow
        Using Source Control on Multiple Files
        Find Available for Data and Process Flows
        Undo and Redo Capability
        Segment Qualifications in Synonym Editor
        Email File Types for a Process Flow
        Non-Zero Return Code Lines in DataMigrator Log
        ETLLOG Enhancements
        Using SFTP as a Data Source
        Option to Continue Processing on Partial Answer Set
        Allowing Iterator for Non-DataMigrator Jobs
        Support Change Data Capture for MS SQL 2012
        Reading a Field With Delimited Values as Individual Rows
        SCD Type I Flow Updates
        File Types on EDAMAIL or on a Flow
        Display of Long Procedure Names
        Calculate Format for Expression In Transformation Grid
        Specifying USAGE Attributes for Datetime Fields
        Balloon Tips to Show Error or Information Messages
        Batch Command for Data Profiling and Key Analysis
        Source Control File Types
      Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements
        New Errors and Messages Report
        Monitoring Commands Enhancements
        Sybase ASA Supported
        Maximum Memory Used for Log File Records
        Enhanced Administration for Thresholds and Business Rules
        Enhanced Governor Business Rules Menu
        Monitored Generated SQL Statements and Aggregation Messages
        New Report to Display All Governor Rule File Properties
      WebFOCUS RESTful Web Services
        ReportCaster RESTful Web Service Requests
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS New Feature Highlights
      Reporting With WebFOCUS
      Charting With WebFOCUS
      Business Analytics
      Developing Applications
      Scheduling and Distributing Information
      Administering and Securing the Environment
      Server Enhancements
      Adapter Enhancements
      WebFOCUS RESTful Web Services
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Release Notes
      WebFOCUS
      Installation and Configuration
      WebFOCUS Security
      InfoAssist
      ReportCaster
      Business Intelligence Dashboard
      Business Intelligence Portal
      Deferred Reporting
      Active Technologies
      WebFOCUS Language
      WebFOCUS Graphics
      HTML5 Charts
      Magnify
      WebFOCUS National Language Support
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Upgrade Considerations
      Tools Consolidation
      WebFOCUS
      Installation and Configuration
      App Studio
      InfoAssist
      Business Intelligence Portal
      ReportCaster
      WebFOCUS Infrastructure and Security
      Managed Reporting
      Business Intelligence Dashboard
      WebFOCUS Quick Data
      WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition
      Active Technologies
      WebFOCUS Charts and Graphs
      WebFOCUS Language
      Web Services
      Magnify
      National Language Support
      Launch PDF
  Installation and Configuration
    WebFOCUS Developer Studio Installation and Configuration Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS and WebFOCUS Developer Studio
        About WebFOCUS and Developer Studio
        WebFOCUS and Developer Studio Overview and Architecture
        Developer Studio Installation and Configuration Steps
      Installing Developer Studio
        Developer Studio System Requirements
        Installing Developer Studio
        Verifying Developer Studio
        Silent Developer Studio Installation
      Configuring the Web Server or Application Server
        Configuration Options
        Configuring Apache Tomcat
        Configuring Microsoft IIS
        Configuring Microsoft IIS to Use the Tomcat Connector (Plug-in)
        Configuring Additional Web and/or Application Servers
      Configuring a Network Installation
        Network Installation Steps
      Configuring the Local Reporting Server Security
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Security and User IDs
      Troubleshooting Developer Studio
        Troubleshooting Tips
        Troubleshooting Tools
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for Windows
      Introducing WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation
        About WebFOCUS and ReportCaster
        WebFOCUS Installation Overview
        ReportCaster Installation Overview
        WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration Steps
        Application Server and Web Application Overview
        Security and User IDs for WebFOCUS and ReportCaster
      WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation Requirements
        WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation Requirements
        WebFOCUS Repository Setup
        Installation Worksheet
      Installing the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Installing the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Verifying and Configuring the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Silent Installation of the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
      Installing the WebFOCUS Client
        Installing WebFOCUS Client
        WebFOCUS Client and ReportCaster Directory Structures
        Uninstalling the WebFOCUS Client
      Configuring Web and Application Servers
        Configuration Overview and Options
        Configuring Apache Tomcat
        Configuring Microsoft IIS 6.0
        Configuring IIS to Use the Tomcat Connector (Plug-In)
        Configuring Microsoft IIS Version 7.x on the Windows 2008 Server
        Configuring IBM WebSphere
        Configuring Oracle WebLogic
      Post-Installation Verifications and Configurations
        WebFOCUS Client Post-Installation Tasks
        WebFOCUS Repository Post-Installation Tasks
      WebFOCUS ReportCaster Post-Installation Tasks
        ReportCaster Verification
        Importing and Exporting the ReportCaster Configuration File
        ReportCaster Configuration
      Business Intelligence Portal and Dashboard Verification and Security
        Verifying and Configuring WebFOCUS Business Intelligence Portal and Dashboard
        Restricting File Permission Access to Managed Reporting
      Troubleshooting WebFOCUS and ReportCaster
        WebFOCUS Troubleshooting Tips
        ReportCaster Troubleshooting Tips
      Magnify Configuration
        Prerequisites
        Optimizing the Magnify Environment
        Security
      Additional Graph Configuration Options
        Graph Options
        Graph Invocation and Generation Options
        PCHOLD (Server Side) Graphics Overview
        Configurations for HOLD Graphics
      Additional WebFOCUS Repository Topics and Tasks
        Repository JDBC Concepts
        Repository Connection Information
        Sizing Guidelines
        Other WebFOCUS Repository Utilities and Tasks
        SQL Server Pre-Installation Steps
        MySQL Repository Set Up
      Additional WebFOCUS Configuration Options
        Installing Multiple WebFOCUS Instances on the Same Machine
        Tomcat Security Tips
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for UNIX
      Introducing WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation
        About WebFOCUS and ReportCaster
        WebFOCUS Installation Overview
        ReportCaster Installation Overview
        WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration Steps
        Application Server and Web Application Overview
        Security and User IDs for WebFOCUS and ReportCaster
      WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation Requirements
        WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation Requirements
        WebFOCUS Repository Setup
        Installation Worksheet
      Installing the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Installing the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Verification and Configuration
        Silent Installation of the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
      Installing the WebFOCUS Client
        Installing the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Installing the WebFOCUS Cluster Manager
        Installing the WebFOCUS Client
        Creating the WebFOCUS UOA Repository
        Configuring Web and Application Servers
        WebFOCUS Client and ReportCaster Directory Structures
        Uninstalling the WebFOCUS Client
      Configuring Web and Application Servers
        Configuration Overview
        Configuring IBM WebSphere 7.0
        Configuring Oracle WebLogic Server 11gR1 With or Without Apache HTTP Server
        Manually Configuring Apache Tomcat With or Without Apache HTTP Server
        Installing and Configuring JBoss EAP 6.0.x or 6.2.x
      Post-Installation Verification and Configuration
        WebFOCUS Post-Installation Tasks
        WebFOCUS Repository Post-Installation Tasks
      WebFOCUS ReportCaster Post-Installation Tasks
        ReportCaster Verification
        Importing and Exporting the ReportCaster Configuration File
        ReportCaster Configuration
      Business Intelligence Portal and Dashboard Verification and Security
        Verifying and Configuring WebFOCUS Business Intelligence Portal and Dashboard
      Troubleshooting WebFOCUS and ReportCaster
        WebFOCUS Troubleshooting Tips
        ReportCaster Troubleshooting Tips
      Magnify Configuration
        Installing Magnify on UNIX and z/OS
        Prerequisites
        Optimizing the Magnify Environment
        Security
      Additional Graph Configuration Options
        Graph Options
        Graph Invocation and Generation Options
        PCHOLD (Server Side) Graphics Overview
        Configurations for HOLD Graphics
      Additional WebFOCUS Repository Topics and Tasks
        Repository JDBC Concepts
        Repository Connection Information
        Sizing Guidelines
        MySQL Repository Set Up
      Launch PDF
  Technical Memos
    TM4690: Saving Report Output in Excel XLSX Format v.7.7.02 - 7.7.05 and 8.0
    TM4729: Tying PMF 5.3.1 Scheduling to a ReportCaster Derby Repository in WebFOCUS 8
    TM4730: ReportCaster Failover v.8.0.02
    TM4739: Combining an Active Technologies Dashboard With an HTML Page Using -HTMLFORM v.7.7.05
    TM4742: Configuring External Links in Visual Discovery AE v.8.0.08
    TM4750: WebFOCUS Reporting and Microsoft Office Support v.8.0.09 and Higher
    TM4751: Enabling Additional Territories in a Map v.8.1.05
    TM4753: Customizing the WebFOCUS Express Portal Banner v.8.0.09 and Higher
  Best Practices
    Best Practices for the WebFOCUS 8 Deployment Roadmap
      Understanding Business Requirements
        Business Requirements
        Business Objectives
        Business Methodologies
        Business Users
        Mapping Business Requirements to a WebFOCUS Solution
      Defining the Infrastructure to Support the WebFOCUS 8 Solution
        Staffing and Leadership
        Processes
        Technology
        Create a Competency Center
        Develop WebFOCUS Production Deployment Plan
        Implement the WebFOCUS Roadmap
      Sizing and Capacity Planning
        Introduction
        Terminology
        Staffing
        Elements of Resource Sizing and Capacity Planning
        Resource Sizing for New Workloads
        Capacity Planning for Existing Workloads
        Plan for the Future
        Benchmarking Methodologies
      Understanding the Data
        Data Sources
        Data Standards
        Data Structures
        Data Quality
        ETL Processes
        Data Performance
      Creating Standards for Application Development
        Center of Excellence or Competency Center
        Establishing Standards
        Working With WebFOCUS Metadata
        Setting the Application Path
        Using Profiles to Manage the WebFOCUS Development Environment
        Working With WebFOCUS Variables
        Integrating DBA Security Into an Application
        Working With Styling Resources and HTML Launch Pages
        Branding Applications
        Managing Application Performance
        Impact Analysis
        Source and Version Control
      Planning for Disaster Recovery
        Disaster Recovery
      Designing the WebFOCUS 8 Architecture
        Review the WebFOCUS Solution
        WebFOCUS Multi-Layered Design
        WebFOCUS Architecture Models
        Considerations for Clustered Architecture Models
        WebFOCUS Environments
      Implementing High Availability, Failover, and Load Management
        Defining High Availability
        Implementing High Availability, Failover, and Load Management
      Defining Security
        Authentication
        Authorization
        Data Integrity
        Confidentiality
      Administering WebFOCUS 8
        Installation of Unplanned Service Packs or Hotfixes
        WebFOCUS Administration
        Auditing Configuration Changes and Customizations
      Promoting Resources Across WebFOCUS 8 Environments
        Terminology
        Introduction
        Change Management Prerequisites
        Change Management Authorization Privileges
        Creating and Exporting Change Management Packages
        Copying Change Management Packages Between Environments
        Importing Change Management Packages
        Approaches to Using Change Management
      Monitoring and Managing Resources
        Resource Analyzer Workflows
        Configuring Monitoring Levels
        Determining Maintenance Schedule
        Integrating Event Routing With Resource Analyzer
        Reporting on Collected Resource Analyzer Data
        Keeping Archived Logs for Historical and Auditing Use
        Migrating Resource Analyzer Data
        Considerations for Clustered Architecture Models
      Conducting Performance Benchmarks, Analysis, and Tuning
        Introduction
        Conducting Performance Benchmarks
        Analyzing Performance Benchmark Results
        Tuning Components
      Deploying the WebFOCUS 8 Application to Production
        Production Checklist
        Training the Users
        Supporting the Application
        Maintaining the Application
      Implementing the WebFOCUS 8 Roadmap
        Introduction
        Processes and Procedures
        Prerequisites
      Launch PDF
  Security and Administration
    WebFOCUS Security and Administration
  Reporting Language
    Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
        Selecting a Report Output Destination
      Displaying Report Data
        Using Display Commands in a Request
        Displaying Individual Values
        Adding Values
        Counting Values
        Expanding Byte Precision for COUNT and LIST
        Maximum Number of Display Fields Supported in a Request
        Manipulating Display Fields With Prefix Operators
        Displaying Pop-up Field Descriptions for Column Titles
      Sorting Tabular Reports
        Sorting Tabular Reports Overview
        Sorting Rows
        Sorting Columns
        Controlling Display of Sort Field Values
        Reformatting Sort Fields
        Manipulating Display Field Values in a Sort Group
        Creating a Matrix Report
        Controlling Collation Sequence
        Specifying the Sort Order
        Ranking Sort Field Values
        Grouping Numeric Data Into Ranges
        Restricting Sort Field Values by Highest/Lowest Rank
        Sorting and Aggregating Report Columns
        Hiding Sort Values
        Sorting With Multiple Display Commands
        Improving Efficiency With External Sorts
        Hierarchical Reporting: BY HIERARCHY
      Selecting Records for Your Report
        Selecting Records Overview
        Choosing a Filtering Method
        Selections Based on Individual Values
        Selection Based on Aggregate Values
        Using Compound Expressions for Record Selection
        Using Operators in Record Selection Tests
        Types of Record Selection Tests
        Selections Based on Group Key Values
        Setting Limits on the Number of Records Read
        Selecting Records Using IF Phrases
        Reading Selection Values From a File
        Assigning Screening Conditions to a File
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Assigning Column Reference Numbers
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
        Using Text Fields in DEFINE and COMPUTE
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Including Totals and Subtotals
        Calculating Row and Column Totals
        Including Section Totals and a Grand Total
        Including Subtotals
        Recalculating Values for Subtotal Rows
        Summarizing Alphanumeric Columns
        Manipulating Summary Values With Prefix Operators
        Combinations of Summary Commands
        Producing Summary Columns for Horizontal Sort Fields
        Performing Calculations at Sort Field Breaks
        Suppressing Grand Totals
        Conditionally Displaying Summary Lines and Text
      Using Expressions
        Using Expressions in Commands and Phrases
        Types of Expressions
        Creating a Numeric Expression
        Creating a Date Expression
        Creating a Date-Time Expression
        Creating a Character Expression
        Creating a Variable Length Character Expression
        Creating a Logical Expression
        Creating a Conditional Expression
      Saving and Reusing Your Report Output
        Saving Your Report Output
        Creating a HOLD File
        Holding Report Output in FOCUS Format
        Controlling Attributes in HOLD Master Files
        Keyed Retrieval From HOLD Files
        Saving and Retrieving HOLD Files
        Using DBMS Temporary Tables as HOLD Files
        Creating SAVE and SAVB Files
        Creating a PCHOLD File
        Choosing Output File Formats
        Using Text Fields in Output Files
        Creating a Delimited Sequential File
        Saving Report Output in INTERNAL Format
        Creating A Subquery or Sequential File With HOLD FORMAT SQL_SCRIPT
        Creating a Structured HOLD File
        Specifying MIME Types for WebFOCUS Reports
      Choosing a Display Format
        Report Display Formats
        Preserving Leading and Internal Blanks in Report Output
        Using Web Display Format: HTML
        Using Print Display Formats: PDF, PS
        Using Word Processing Display Formats: DOC, WP
        Using Excel Display Formats: XLSX, EXL2K, EXL97, EXCEL
        Using PowerPoint PPT Display Format
        Using PowerPoint PPTX Display Format
      Linking a Report to Other Resources
        Linking Using StyleSheets
        Linking to Another Report
        Linking to a URL
        Linking to a JavaScript Function
        Linking to a WebFOCUS Maintain Procedure
        Creating Multiple Drill-Down Links
        Creating Parameters
        Linking With Conditions
        Linking From a Graphic Image
        Specifying a Base URL
        Specifying a Target Frame
        Creating a Compound Report
        Creating a PDF Compound Report With Drill Through Links
      Navigating Within an HTML Report
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Adding the HTML Table of Contents Tree Control to Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Navigating a Multi-Page Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Linking Report Pages
      Bursting Reports Into Multiple HTML Files
        Bursting Reports Overview
      Handling Records With Missing Field Values
        Irrelevant Report Data
        Missing Field Values
        Handling a Missing Segment Instance
        Setting the NODATA Character String
      Joining Data Sources
        Types of Joins
        How the JOIN Command Works
        Creating an Equijoin
        Using a Conditional Join
        Full Outer Joins for Relational Data Sources
        Adding a New Fact To Multi-Fact Synonyms: JOIN AS_ROOT
        Joining From a Multi-Fact Synonym
        Invoking Context Analysis for a Star Schema With a Fan Trap
        Adding DBA Restrictions to the Join Condition: SET DBAJOIN
        Preserving Virtual Fields During Join Parsing
        Displaying Joined Structures
        Clearing Joined Structures
      Merging Data Sources
        Merging Data
        Types of MATCH Processing
        MATCH Processing With Common High-Order Sort Fields
        Fine-Tuning MATCH Processing
        Universal Concatenation
        Merging Concatenated Data Sources
        Cartesian Product
      Formatting Reports: An Overview
        What Kinds of Formatting Can I Do?
        How to Specify Formatting in a Report
        Standard and Legacy Formatting
        Techniques for Quick and Easy Formatting
        Navigating From a Report to Other Resources
      Creating and Managing a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Creating a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        General WebFOCUS StyleSheet Syntax
        Reusing WebFOCUS StyleSheet Declarations With Macros
        WebFOCUS StyleSheet Attribute Inheritance
      Controlling Report Formatting
        Generating an Internal Cascading Style Sheet for HTML Reports
        Selecting a Unit of Measurement
        Conditionally Formatting, Displaying, and Linking in a StyleSheet
        Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Conditionally Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Controlling the Display of Empty Reports
        Formatting a Report Using Only StyleSheet Defaults
      Identifying a Report Component in a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Identifying an Entire Report, Column, or Row
        Identifying Tags for SUBTOTAL and GRANDTOTAL Lines
        Identifying Data
        Identifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or FML Free Text
        Identifying a Page Number, Underline, or Skipped Line
      Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        What Is a Cascading Style Sheet?
        Why Use an External Cascading Style Sheet?
        Formatting a Report With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Working With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Applying External Cascading Style Sheet Formatting
        Combining an External CSS With Other Formatting Methods
        Linking to an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Inheritance and External Cascading Style Sheets
        Using External Cascading Style Sheets With Non-HTML Reports
        Requirements for Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        FAQ About Using External Cascading Style Sheets
        Troubleshooting External Cascading Style Sheets
      Laying Out the Report Page
        Selecting Page Size, Orientation, and Color
        Setting Page Margins
        Positioning a Report Component
        Arranging Columns on a Page
        Suppressing Column Display
        Inserting a Page Break
        Inserting Page Numbers
        Adding Grids and Borders
        Defining Borders Around Boxes With PPTX and PDF Formats
        Displaying Superscripts On Data, Heading, and Footing Lines
        Adding Underlines and Skipped Lines
        Removing Blank Lines From a Report
        Adding an Image to a Report
        Associating Bar Graphs With Report Data
        Working With Mailing Labels and Multi-Pane Pages
      Using Headings, Footings, Titles, and Labels
        Creating Headings and Footings
        Including an Element in a Heading or Footing
        Repeating Headings and Footings on Panels in PDF Report Output
        Customizing a Column Title
        Controlling Column Title Underlining Using a SET Command
        Controlling Column Title Underlining Using a StyleSheet Attribute
        Creating Labels to Identify Data
        Formatting a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Applying Font Attributes to a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Adding Borders and Grid Lines
        Justifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Choosing an Alignment Method for Heading and Footing Elements
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element in an HTML, XLSX, EXL2K, or PDF Report
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element Across Columns in an HTML or PDF Report
        Aligning Content in a Multi-Line Heading or Footing
        Positioning Headings, Footings, or Items Within Them
        Controlling the Vertical Positioning of a Heading or Footing
        Placing a Report Heading or Footing on Its Own Page
      Formatting Report Data
        Specifying Font Format in a Report
        Specifying Background Color in a Report
        Specifying Data Format in a Report
        Positioning Data in a Report
      Creating a Graph
        Content Analysis: Determining Graphing Objectives
        The GRAPH Command
        Creating an HTML5 Graph
        Selecting a Graph Type
        Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Plotting Dates in Graphs
        Refining the Data Set For Your Graph
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding Labels to a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Saving a Graph as an Image File
        Printing a Graph
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Creating a Free-Form Report
        Creating a Free-Form Report
        Designing a Free-Form Report
      Using SQL to Create Reports
        Supported and Unsupported SQL Statements
        Using SQL Translator Commands
        SQL Translator Support for Date, Time, and Timestamp Fields
        Index Optimized Retrieval
        TABLEF Optimization
        SQL INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE Commands
      Improving Report Processing
        Rotating a Data Structure for Enhanced Retrieval
        Optimizing Retrieval Speed for FOCUS Data Sources
        Automatic Indexed Retrieval
        Data Retrieval Using TABLEF
        Preserving the Internal Matrix of Your Last Report
        Compiling Expressions
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Table Syntax Summary and Limits
        TABLE Syntax Summary
        TABLEF Syntax Summary
        MATCH Syntax Summary
        FOR Syntax Summary
        TABLE Limits
      Referring to Fields in a Report Request
        Referring to an Individual Field
        Referring to Fields Using Qualified Field Names
        Referring to All of the Fields in a Segment
        Displaying a List of Field Names
      Launch PDF
    Describing Data With WebFOCUS Language
      Understanding a Data Source Description
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        What Is a Data Source Description?
        How an Application Uses a Data Source Description
        What Does a Master File Describe?
        Creating a Data Source Description
        Naming a Master File
        What Is in a Master File?
      Identifying a Data Source
        ACCESSFILE
        FILENAME
        SUFFIX
        BYTEORDER
        IOTYPE
        REMARKS
        Specifying a Physical File Name: DATASET
        MFD_PROFILE
      Describing a Group of Fields
        Defining a Single Group of Fields
        Identifying a Logical View: Redefining a Segment
        Relating Multiple Groups of Fields
        Logical Dependence: The Parent-Child Relationship
        Logical Independence: Multiple Paths
        Cardinal Relationships Between Segments
        One-to-One Relationship
        One-to-Many Relationship
        Many-to-Many Relationship
        Recursive Relationships
        Relating Segments From Different Types of Data Sources
        Rotating a Data Source: An Alternate View
      Describing an Individual Field
        Field Characteristics
        FIELDNAME
        ALIAS
        The Displayed Data Type: USAGE
        The Stored Data Type: ACTUAL
        Adding a Geographic Role for a Field
        Null or MISSING Values: MISSING
        Describing an FML Hierarchy
        WITHIN Attribute
        ACCEPT
        Specifying Acceptable Values for a Dimension
        TITLE
        DESCRIPTION
        Multilingual Metadata
        DEFINE Attribute
        Describing a Calculated Value: COMPUTE
        Describing a Filter: FILTER
        SORTOBJ
        Calling a DEFINE FUNCTION in a Master File
        Date System Amper Variables
        Parameterizing Master and Access File Values Using Variables
        Converting Alphanumeric Dates to WebFOCUS Dates
      Describing a Sequential, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Sequential Data Source Formats
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Sequential Data Source
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM or ISAM Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Free-Format Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Fixed-Format, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a Non-FOCUS Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        Describing a Token-Delimited Data Source
      Describing a FOCUS Data Source
        Types of FOCUS Data Sources
        Designing a FOCUS Data Source
        Describing a Single Segment
        GROUP Attribute
        ACCEPT Attribute
        INDEX
        Describing a Partitioned FOCUS Data Source
        Multi-Dimensional Index (MDI)
      Defining a Join in a Master File
        Join Types
        Static Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = KU and KM
        Using Cross-Referenced Descendant Segments: SEGTYPE = KL and KLU
        Dynamic Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = DKU and DKM
        Conditional Joins in the Master File
        Comparing Static and Dynamic Joins
        Joining to One Cross-Referenced Segment From Several Host Segments
        Creating a Cluster Master File
      Creating a Business View of a Master File
        Grouping Business Logic In a Business View
      Checking and Changing a Master File: CHECK
        Checking a Data Source Description
        CHECK Command Display
        PICTURE Option
        HOLD Option
      Providing Data Source Security: DBA
        Introduction to Data Source Security
        Implementing Data Source Security
        ACCESS
        RESTRICT
        Controlling the Source of Access Restrictions in a Multi-file Structure
        Adding DBA Restrictions to the Join Condition
        DBAFILE
        Summary of Security Attributes
        ENCRYPT
        FOCEXEC Security
      Creating and Rebuilding a Data Source
        CREATE
        REBUILD
        Optimizing File Size: The REBUILD Subcommand
        REORG
        Indexing Fields: The INDEX Subcommand
        Creating an External Index: The EXTERNAL INDEX Subcommand
        Checking Data Source Integrity: The CHECK Subcommand
        Changing the Data Source Creation Date and Time: The TIMESTAMP Subcommand
        Converting Legacy Dates: The DATE NEW Subcommand
        Creating a Multi-Dimensional Index: The MDINDEX Subcommand
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Launch PDF
    Developing Reporting Applications
      WebFOCUS Application Logic
        Three-Tier Application Logic
        Deploying a Partitioned ProjectPublishing an Application
        WebFOCUS Components
        Storing and Searching for Application Files
        Section 508 Accessibility in WebFOCUS
      Managing Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Procedures and Metadata on the Application Tree
        Managing Applications and Paths
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Application Metadata Commands and Catalog Metadata
        APP HELP
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
        Accessing Metadata and Procedures
        Allocating Temporary Files
        Temporary Space Usage and Location
        Temporary Disk Space Usage for Non-PDS Deployment
        Application Tools
      Coding a User Interface
        Which Tools Can You Use?
        The WebFOCUS Client
        Using the Servlet
        Using a Dynamic Multiselect Drop-Down List
        Enabling Ad Hoc Reporting
        Validating a Form With JavaScript
         HTML Autoprompt
        Displaying a Report on the Default WebFOCUS Page
        Designing an HTML Page for Report Display
      Enhancing a User Interface
        Displaying a Report in a Helper Application
        Controlling Multiple Reports
        Adding JavaScript for Drill-Down Reporting
        Facilitating Report Manipulation
        Using a Cascading Style Sheet to Standardize Display
        Displaying a Previously Run Report
        Passing a User ID From HTML for a Custom Menu
      Managing Flow of Control in an Application
        Uses for Dialogue Manager
        Dialogue Manager Processing
        Creating a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Customizing a Procedure With Variables
        Creating a Standard Quote-Delimited String
        Creating and Working With Variables
        Using Numeric Amper Variables in Functions
        Controlling the Execution of a Procedure
        Navigating a Procedure
        Enhancing an HTML Webpage With a Procedure
        Issuing Operating System Commands
        Controlling Passwords With Dialogue Manager
        Sending a Message to the Application
        Testing and Debugging a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Dialogue Manager Process Flow in the Procedure Viewer
        Dialogue Manager Syntax Reference
      Testing and Debugging a Procedure
        Debugging Your Application With Query Commands
        Displaying Combined Structures
        Displaying Virtual Fields
        Displaying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Displaying Available Fields
        Displaying the File Directory Table
        Displaying Field Information for a Master File
        Displaying Data Source Statistics
        Displaying Current ddnames Assigned With FILEDEF
        Displaying Defined Functions
        Displaying HOLD Fields
        Displaying JOIN Structures
        Displaying National Language Support
        Displaying Explanations of Error Messages
        Displaying the Current Search Path
        Displaying the Release Number
        Displaying the Values of a Remote Server
        Displaying Parameter Settings
        Displaying Parameters That Cannot Be Set in an Area
        Displaying Graph Parameters
        Displaying the Site Code of the Connected Server
        Displaying Command Statistics
        Displaying StyleSheet Parameter Settings
        Displaying Information About the SU Machine
        Displaying Data Sources Specified With USE
        Displaying Global Variable Values
        Identifying the Files Being Used
        Reporting Dynamically From System Tables
      Managing the WebFOCUS Environment
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment
         Refreshing or Removing an Environment
      Accessing a FOCUS Data Source
        The USE Command
        Identifying a FOCUS Data Source
        The Developer Studio Use Tool
        Using Alternative File Specifications
        Identifying a New Data Source
        Protecting a Data Source
        Concatenating Data Sources
        Displaying the Current USE Options
        Clearing the USE Options
      Customizing Your Environment
        When Do You Use the SET Command?
        Ways to Issue a SET Command
        Issuing a SET Command With the Set Tool
        Coding a SET Command
        Types of SET Parameters
        SET Parameter Syntax
      Defining and Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Application Files Under Windows
        Extract Files Under Windows
        Work Files Under Windows
        Determining If A File Exists Under Windows
        WebFOCUS Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under MVS
        Extract Files Under MVS
        Work Files Under MVS
        Reviewing Attributes of Allocated Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under UNIX
        Extract Files Under UNIX
        Work Files Under UNIX
        Determining If A File Exists Under UNIX
      Using the Command Console
        Command Console Window
        Working in the Command Console
      Euro Currency Support
        Integrating the Euro Currency
        Converting Currencies
        Creating the Currency Data Source
        Identifying Fields That Contain Currency Data
        Activating the Currency Data Source
        Processing Currency Data
        Querying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Punctuating Numbers
        Selecting an Extended Currency Symbol
      Launch PDF
    Using Functions
      How to Use This Manual
        Available Languages
        Operating Systems
      Introducing Functions
        Using Functions
        Types of Functions
        Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
      Accessing and Calling a Function
        Calling a Function
        Supplying an Argument in a Function
        Calling a Function From a DEFINE, COMPUTE, or VALIDATE Command
        Calling a Function From a Dialogue Manager Command
        Calling a Function From Another Function
        Calling a Function in WHERE or IF Criteria
        Calling a Function in WHEN Criteria
        Calling a Function From a RECAP Command
        Storing and Accessing an External Function
      Character Functions
        Character Function Notes
        ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a String
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between Space and Zero
        BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
        BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as an Integer
        BYTVAL: Translating a Character to Decimal
        CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a String
        CHKNUM: Checking a String for Numeric Format
        CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
        CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
        EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
        LCWORD: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD2: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD3: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a String
        LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
        PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
        PATTERN: Generating a Pattern From a String
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
        REVERSE: Reversing the Characters in a String
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String
        SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
        SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
        SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
        STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
        STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
        XMLDECOD: Decoding XML-Encoded Characters
        XMLENCOD: XML-Encoding Characters
      Variable Length Character Functions
        Overview
        LENV: Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field
        LOCASV: Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String
        POSITV: Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring
        SUBSTV: Extracting a Variable Length Substring
        TRIMV: Removing Characters From a String
        UPCASV: Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String
      Simplified Character Functions
        CHAR_LENGTH: Returning the Length in Characters of a String
        DIGITS: Converting a Number to a Character String
        LOWER: Returning a String With All Letters Lowercase
        LPAD: Left-Padding a Character String
        LTRIM: Removing Blanks From the Left End of a String
        POSITION: Returning the First Position of a Substring in a Source String
        RPAD: Right-Padding a Character String
        RTRIM: Removing Blanks From the Right End of a String
        SUBSTRING: Extracting a Substring From a Source String
        TOKEN: Extracting a Token From a String
        TRIM_: Removing a Leading Character, Trailing Character, or Both From a String
        UPPER: Returning a String With All Letters Uppercase
      Character Functions for DBCS Code Pages
        DCTRAN: Translating A Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character to Another
        DEDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        DSTRIP: Removing a Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character From a String
        DSUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        JPTRANS: Converting Japanese Specific Characters
        KKFCUT: Truncating a String
        SFTDEL: Deleting the Shift Code From DBCS Data
        SFTINS: Inserting the Shift Code Into DBCS Data
      Maintain-specific Character Functions
        CHAR2INT: Translating a Character Into an Integer Value
        INT2CHAR: Translating an Integer Value Into a Character
        LCWORD and LCWORD2: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        LENGTH: Determining the Length of a Character String
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        LOWER: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
        MASK: Extracting or Adding Characters
        MNTGETTOK: Extracting Tokens From a String Function
        NLSCHR: Converting Characters From the Native English Code Page
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String (Maintain)
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring (Maintain)
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        SELECTS: Decoding a Value From a Stack
        STRAN: Substituting One Substring for Another
        STRCMP: Comparing Character Strings
        STRICMP: Comparing Character Strings and Ignoring Case
        STRNCMP: Comparing Character Substrings
        STRTOKEN: Extracting a Substring Based on Delimiters
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring (Maintain)
        TRIM: Removing Trailing Occurrences (Maintain)
        TRIMLEN: Determining the Length of a String Excluding Trailing Spaces
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase (Maintain)
      Data Source and Decoding Functions
        DB_EXPR: Inserting an SQL Expression Into a Request
        DB_INFILE: Testing Values Against a File or an SQL Subquery
        DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving Data Source Values
        DECODE: Decoding Values
        FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in a Data Source
        LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
        LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
      Date Functions
        Overview of Date Functions
        Using Standard Date Functions
        DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
        DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
        DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
        DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
        DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
        DPART: Extracting a Component From a Date
        FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
        FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
        FIYYQ: Converting a Calendar Date to a Financial Date
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
        Using Legacy Date Functions
        AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months
        AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days
        CHGDAT: Changing How a Date String Displays
        DA Functions: Converting a Legacy Date to an Integer
        DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
        DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
        DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
        GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
        JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
        YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
      Date-Time Functions
        Using Date-Time Functions
        CVTSTIME: Converting the System Date and Time (OpenVMS Only)
        GETSTIME: Extracting the System Date and Time (OpenVMS Only)
        HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
        HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
        HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Date Format
        HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
        HDTTM: Converting a Date Value to a Date-Time Value
        HEXTR: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Value and Setting Remaining Components to Zero
        HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time in a Date-Time Field
        HGETZ: Storing the Current Coordinated Universal Time in a Date-Time Field
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        HHMS: Converting a Date-Time Value to a Time Value
        HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Date-Time Value
        HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to Midnight
        HMASK: Extracting Date-Time Components and Preserving Remaining Components
        HNAME: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Alphanumeric Format
        HPART: Retrieving a Date-Time Component as a Numeric Value
        HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
        HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
        HTMTOTS or TIMETOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
        HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-Time Value
        WRTSTIME: Converting Dates to 64-Bit DEC Date/Time Format (OpenVMS Only)
      Simplified Date and Date-Time Functions
        DTADD: Incrementing a Date or Date-Time Component
        DTDIFF: Returning the Number of Component Boundaries Between Date or Date-Time Values
        DTPART: Returning a Date or Date-Time Component in Integer Format
        DTRUNC: Returning the Start of a Date Period for a Given Date
      Maintain-specific Date and Time Functions
        Maintain-specific Standard Date and Time Functions
      Format Conversion Functions
        ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
        EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
        FPRINT: Converting Fields to Alphanumeric Format
        FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Integer to a Character
        ITONUM: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Double-Precision Format
        ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
        ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
        PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
        PTOA: Converting a Packed-Decimal Number to Alphanumeric Format
        TSTOPACK: Converting an MSSQL or Sybase Timestamp Column to Packed Decimal
        UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
        XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
      Maintain-specific Light Update Support Functions
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Importing a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      Numeric Functions
        ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
        ASIS: Distinguishing Blank From Zero
        BAR: Producing a Bar Chart
        CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
        DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
        EXP: Raising e to the Nth Power
        EXPN: Evaluating a Number in Scientific Notation
        FMLINFO: Returning FOR Values
        FMLLIST: Returning an FML Tag List
        FMLFOR: Retrieving FML Tag Values
        FMLCAP: Retrieving FML Hierarchy Captions
        INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
        LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
        MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
        MIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate
        NORMSDST and NORMSINV: Calculating Normal Distributions
        PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
        RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
        SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
        XIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate (Periodic or Non-Periodic)
      Maintain-specific Script Functions
        IWCLink: Displaying a URL in a Browser or Frame
        IWCSwitchToSecure and IWCSwitchToUnsecure: Turning the Secure Sockets Layer On and Off
        IWCTrigger: Calling a Maintain Function From a Script Handler
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Finding a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      System Functions
        CHECKPRIVS: Retrieving the Privilege State for the Connected User
        CLSDDREC: Closing All Files Opened by the PUTDDREC Function
        FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
        FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
        FINDMEM: Finding a Member of a Partitioned Data Set
        FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
        GETCOOKI: Retrieving a Browser Cookie Value
        GETHEADR: Retrieving an HTTP Header Variable
        GETPDS: Determining If a Member of a Partitioned Data Set Exists
        GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
        GRPLIST: Retrieving the Group List of the Connected User
        JOBNAME: Retrieving the Current Process Identification String
        MVSDYNAM: Passing a DYNAM Command to the Command Processor
        PUTCOOKI: Submitting a Value to a Browser Cookie
        PUTDDREC: Writing a Character String as a Record in a Sequential File
        SLEEP: Suspending Execution for a Given Number of Seconds
        SPAWN: Creating a Subprocess From a Procedure
        SYSTEM: Calling a System Program
        SYSVAR: Retrieving the Value of a z/OS System Variable
      Creating a Subroutine
        Writing a Subroutine
        Compiling and Storing a Subroutine
        Testing the Subroutine
        Using a Custom Subroutine: The MTHNAM Subroutine
        Subroutines Written in REXX
      Launch PDF
  Reporting Tools
    Creating Compound Reports With Document Composer
      Document Composer Overview
        Uses for Document Composer
        Getting Started With Document Composer
      Creating Compound Reports
        Creating a Compound Layout Report
        Output Formats for Compound Reports
        Adding a Reporting Object to a Compound Report
      Viewing Pages in Document Composer
        On Demand Viewing in Document Composer
        Viewing Simulated or Live Data in Document Composer
        Moving Pages With the Thumbnails Tab
        Positioning Objects and Keyboard Shortcuts
      Using Page Masters in Document Composer
        Creating, Saving, and Editing Page Masters in Document Composer
        Using an Existing Page Master in Another Document
      Controlling the Overflow and Relative Positioning of Objects
        Setting Overflow Options in Document Composer
        Using Fixed Overflow in Document Composer
        Using Flowing Overflow in Document Composer
        Setting a Relative Position Between Objects in Document Composer
        Adding Different Headers and Footers on an Overflow Page
      Applying a Table of Contents and Bookmarks
        Adding a Table of Contents Page
        Using Bookmarks in Document Composer
      Using Drill Through in Document Composer
        Using Drill Through
      Using Page Layouts in Document Composer
        Using Page Layouts
      Formatting Text in Document Composer
        Formatting Text Elements
      Adding Page Numbers to Your Document
        Adding Page Numbers to Your Document
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards in Document Composer
        Using Active Technologies Reports to Create Active Dashboards
        Positioning Report Objects in the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Working With Active Technologies Form Controls
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the HTML Composer
      Using HTML Composer
        Uses for HTML Composer
        Getting Started With HTML Composer
        Creating a Report Page Layout
      Creating and Using Parameters in HTML Composer
        Creating Parameter Values
        Using Controls to Supply Incoming Parameter Values
        Using Input Controls to Supply Parameter Values
        Supplying Parameter Values to External Reports
        Styling Your Layout
        Specifying Browser Defaults With the Style Composer
        Laying Out Objects With HTML Composer
        Controlling the HTML Composer Environment
        Adding ReportCaster Schedule Capability to HTML Composer
        Running a Managed Reporting Report Deferred From HTML Composer
        Using JavaScript Code With HTML Composer Pages
        Specifying an HTML File as a Load Screen
      Using Templates in HTML Composer
        Understanding and Using Templates
        Manipulating the Objects of Templates
      Creating Guided Report Forms
        Getting Started With Guided Reports
      Chaining Controls for Dependencies in HTML Composer
        Automatically Chaining Parameters From the New Parameters Dialog Box
        Chaining Controls on the Parameters Tab
        Setting the Default Link
        Applying Conditions to a Chain
        Populating Controls One at a Time
        Using the Chain Separator and Line Separator
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards With HTML Composer
        Binding Objects to an Active Technologies Report
        Configuring Active Technologies Controls in HTML Composer
        Refreshing Active Technologies Reports
        Exporting the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Scheduling and Distributing Active Technologies Dashboards
        Usage Notes for Active Technologies Dashboards Created With HTML Composer
      Report Library Integration in HTML Composer
        Integrating the Report Library
      Creating a Rich Internet Application (RIA) With HTML Composer
        RIA Overview
        Creating an RIA With HTML Composer
        Usage Notes and RIA Example
      Using Maps in HTML Composer
        Configuring WebFOCUS for Maps
        Creating WebFOCUS Procedures for Maps
        Adding a Map
        Customizing the Map Properties
        Integrating WebFOCUS With Maps
        Using the Maps Functionality
        Chaining for Maps
        Using JavaScript Code With Maps
        ESRI Flex Viewer Integration
      Using Visual Discovery in HTML Composer
        Creating Visual Discovery Output Files
        Developing an Analytic Dashboard From Developer Studio
        Working With Visual Discovery Controls on the Web
        Accessing Visual Discovery Online Help
        Visual Discovery Tutorial
      Tutorial: Creating a Reporting Application Using HTML Composer
        HTML Composer Tutorial Overview
        Creating the Century Project
        Creating the Graph
        Creating the Layout and the Report
        Running the Reporting Application
      Accessing an HTML Composer Application on a Mobile Device
        Using an HTML Composer Application on an iPad or iPhone
        Using an HTML Application on an Android Device
      CSS Support Matrix for Browsers
        CSS Support Matrix for Internet Explorer
        CSS Support Matrix for Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera
      CSS Class Mapping
        CSS Class Mapping List
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Creating Reports with Report Painter
      Report Painter Basics
        Report Painter Layout and Toolbars
        Using the Object Inspector
        Viewing Options
        Business Intelligence Features
        Report Painter Limitations
        Field Properties and Report Options Dialog Boxes
      Creating Reports With Report Painter
        Adding a Field as a Report Column
        Displaying Data
        Sorting Data
        Selecting Data
        Universal Concatenation in Report Painter
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Including a Total or Subtotal
        Adding a Page Heading or Footing
        Formatting a Column
        Choosing an Output Format
        Creating a Drill Down Procedure
        Creating a Multiple Drill Down Procedure
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Running and Saving a Report
        Creating Precision Reports
        Using User Defined Functions
      Creating Guided Reports
        Creating a Guided Report
      Styling Reports With Report Painter
        Styling With Fonts, Colors, and Grids
        Styling or Aligning an Individual Item in a Text String
        Aligning Fields and Text in Headings and Footings
        Defining a Conditional Report Style
        Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Adding an Image
        Using the StyleSheet File Selector
        Generating Format-Specific Style Blocks
        Using Excel Templates
        Using Excel Named Ranges in WebFOCUS Applications
        Generating Overflow Sheets for an Excel 2000 Report
        Using PowerPoint Output Format and PowerPoint Templates
        Setting Up the Report Page
        Creating Mailing Labels
        Styling Different Elements of a Tabular Active Technologies Report
      Creating Temporary Fields With Report Painter
        Creating a Calculated Value With Report Painter
        Creating User Defined Functions
        Creating Expressions for Temporary Fields
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Forecast
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Active Technologies User's Guide
      Active Technologies
        Active Technologies Report Overview
        Available Output Formats for Using Active Technologies
        Product Requirements for Using Active Technologies
      Creating Active Technologies Components With InfoAssist
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Creating an Active Technologies Chart
        Creating an Active Technologies Dashboard
      Creating Active Technologies Reports With Report Painter
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Styling Different Elements of a Tabular Active Technologies Report
      Using an Active Technologies Report
        Navigating Between Pages
        Filtering and Highlighting Data
        Calculating Data
        Sorting Data
        Using Tab Window Navigation
        Controlling Report Display
        Using Data Visualization
        Viewing Data as a Chart
        Using the Grid Tool
        Using the Chart/Rollup Tool
        Using the Pivot Tool
        Saving, Exporting, and Sending Active Technologies Reports
      Active Technologies for Mobile Web Apps
        Requirements for Mobile Web Apps
        Mobile Web Apps Features
        Standard Gesture Support
        Running an Active Technologies Report on a Mobile Device
        Running an Active Technologies Dashboard on a Mobile Device
      Working With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Active Technologies Report Integration With Adobe Flash Player
        Using the Pivot Tool With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Using the Chart/Rollup Tool With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Formatting Legend Options for an Active Technologies Chart for Adobe Flash Player
        Using an Alternate Adobe Flex Compiler With the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Setting the Maximum Java Heap Size When Using an Alternate Adobe Flex Compiler
        Customizing Containers and the Dashboard Bar
        Using Active Technologies for PDF
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards in Document Composer
        Active Technologies Dashboard Overview
        Positioning Report Objects in the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Working With Active Technologies Form Controls
      Using Advanced Design Features for Active Technologies Dashboards
        Overview
        Changing the Background Color of an Individual Tab
        Controlling Active Technologies With Custom JavaScript Code
        Working With the Global Filter Feature
        Managing Active Technologies Form Controls
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards With HTML Composer
        Binding Objects to an Active Technologies Report
        Configuring Active Technologies Controls in HTML Composer
        Refreshing Active Technologies Reports
        Exporting the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Scheduling and Distributing Active Technologies Dashboards
        Usage Notes for Active Technologies Dashboards Created With HTML Composer
      Creating Active Technologies Components With WebFOCUS Syntax
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Creating an Active Technologies Chart
        Creating an Active Technologies Dashboard
      Chart Type Syntax
        Chart Type Syntax Introduction
        FLEX Default Flash Chart Type
        AHTML Default JavaScript Chart Type and FLEX and APDF Flash Chart Type for Disconnected Mode
        FLEX Flash Chart Type and AHTML JavaScript Chart Type
        Chart Types Mapped to Default Chart Types
        Additional Active Technologies Chart Types Available With CHART-TYPE Syntax
      Creating a Custom Icon Set for an Active Technologies Report or Dashboard
        Overview
        Understanding the Icon Section in the Configuration File
        Customizing the Combination of Icons in a Set
        Using Your Own Icon Image Files
        Icon Set Details
      Defining Custom Styles for an Active Technologies Report or Dashboard
        Overview
        Customizing the Style Section in the Configuration File
        Active Technologies Classes
      SET Commands for Active Technologies
        SET Commands
      Launch PDF
  InfoAssist
    Introducing InfoAssist
      InfoAssist
      Personal InfoAssist
      InfoAssist Basic
      InfoMini
      Accessibility Compliance With InfoAssist
    Getting Started With InfoAssist
      Accessing InfoAssist
      Accessing InfoAssist From a WebFOCUS Desktop Product
      Accessing Personal InfoAssist
      Accessing InfoAssist Basic
      Accessing InfoMini
      Accessing InfoAssist Options
      Changing User Preferences
    Navigating the InfoAssist Interface
      InfoAssist Application Window
      Application Main Menu
      Quick Access Toolbar
      Ribbon
      Home Tab
      Insert Tab
      Format Tab
      Data Tab
      Slicers Tab
      Layout Tab
      View Tab
      Field Tab
      Series Tab
      Understanding the Resources Panel
      Understanding the Results Panel
      Using the Navigation Taskbar
      Using the Status Bar
    Creating and Customizing Reports
      Creating a Basic Report
      Styling Reports
      Changing a Field Format
      Using Custom Reporting Features
      Creating Customized Report Outputs
    Creating and Customizing Charts
      Visualizing Your Data With Charts
      Selecting a Chart
      Creating a Chart
      Accessing Chart Formatting Tools
      Formatting a Series
      Formatting Data Labels
      Formatting a Legend
      Formatting Gridlines
      Formatting Axis Labels
      Formatting a Frame and a Background
      Formatting a Gauge Chart
      Formatting Page Headings and Page Footings
      Using Additional Formatting Features
    Creating and Customizing Documents
      Accessing Document View
      Building a Document
    Creating HOLD Files
      Valuable Applications of HOLD Files
      Storing HOLD Files
      Output Formats for Reports and Charts
      Creating Hold Files
      Creating a Subquery Filter Using a HOLD File
      Document Mode
    Creating Multi-page Documents and Dashboards
      Creating Multi-page Documents
      Creating a Multi-page Active Technologies Dashboard
      Navigating the Page Menu
      Using the Active Cache Option
      Enabling Active Cache Through InfoAssist
    Creating Active Technologies Components With InfoAssist
      Creating an Active Technologies Report
      Creating an Active Technologies Chart
      Creating an Active Technologies Dashboard
    Using Slicers
      Creating Slicers
      Filtering With Slicers
      Edit Slicers Dialog Box
    Building InfoMini Applications
      Understanding InfoMini Applications
      Creating an InfoMini Application
    InfoAssist Warning Messages
      InfoAssist Warning Messages
      Unsupported Syntax and Objects
    Glossary
    Launch PDF
  Managed Reporting
    Managed Reporting
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        Managed Reporting Overview
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Interfaces and Tools
      Launch PDF
    Deferred Report Administration
      Managing Deferred Tickets
        Managing Deferred Workload
        Managing the Deferred Ticket Cleanup Utility
      Customizing the Managed Reporting Deferred Status Interface
        Customizing the Deferred Report Status Screen
      Launch PDF
  Business Intelligence Portal
    Introducing the Business Intelligence Portal
      Introduction to WebFOCUS 8
      Business Intelligence Portal
      Ease of Use
      Accessibility Compliance With the Business Intelligence Portal
    Starting WebFOCUS
      Launching WebFOCUS
      Welcome Page
      Publishing Items
    Domain Content
      Selecting a Domain
      Types of Content in the Tree
      Filtering Content in the Tree
      Searching Content
    Business Intelligence Portal Architecture
      Portal Architecture
      Pages
      Containers
      Content
    Portal Designer Overview
      Launching the Portal Designer
      Portal Designer Interface
      Application Menu
      Quick Access Toolbar
      Ribbon
      Canvas
      Properties Panel
      Breadcrumb Trail
    Portal Components
      Portal
      Menu Bar
      Navigation
      Banners
      Pages
      Columns
      Logo
      Powered by Information Builders Logo
      Containers
      Panels
      Accordion Container
      Tabbed Container
      Responsive Container
      Content
      WebFOCUS Resources
    Customizing a Portal
      Running a Portal
      Adding Pages
      Managing Pages
      Removing Customization
      Using Easy Selector
      Building a Responsive Portal
    Using the Web-Based Tools
      What Are the Web-Based Tools?
      InfoDiscovery Workbench
      InfoAssist
      Working With Alerts
      Creating Reporting Objects
      URL Tool
      Visual Discovery AE
      Text Editor
      Scheduling Tools
      Using Deferred Reporting
    Advanced Coding Techniques and Coding Considerations
      Execution of a Report Procedure or Style Sheet File Using -INCLUDE
      Ignoring Code in a Procedure (FEX)
    Mobile Favorites
      Mobile Favorites Considerations
      The Mobile Favorites List
      Customizing a Mobile Favorites Page
      Adding a Corporate Branding
    Advanced Interactive Features
      Creating Global Filters
      Creating Page Drill-Down Links in BI Portal
    Creating a Custom Sign-in Page
      Creating and Customizing a Sign-in Page
    Glossary
    Launch PDF
  App Studio
    WebFOCUS App Studio Installation and Configuration Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS and WebFOCUS App Studio
        About WebFOCUS and App Studio
        WebFOCUS and App Studio Overview and Architecture
        App Studio Installation and Configuration Steps
      Installing App Studio
        App Studio Requirements
        Installing App Studio
        Verifying App Studio
        Silent App Studio Installation
      Configuring the Web Server or Application Server
        Configuration Options
        Configuring Apache Tomcat
        Configuring Microsoft IIS 6
        Configuring Microsoft IIS to Use the Tomcat Connector (Plug-in)
        Configuring Additional Web and/or Application Servers
      Configuring the Local Reporting Server Security
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Security and User IDs
      Configuring a Network Installation
        Network Installation Steps
      Troubleshooting App Studio
        Troubleshooting Tips
        Troubleshooting Tools
      Launch PDF
    Getting Started With WebFOCUS App Studio
      Introducing WebFOCUS App Studio
        What Is WebFOCUS App Studio?
        Launching App Studio
        WebFOCUS App Studio Documentation Overview
      Navigating the App Studio Interface
        The App Studio Interface
        Welcome Screen
        Application Menu
        Quick Access Toolbar
        Ribbon
        Panels
        Environments Detail Panel
        Canvas
      Customizing App Studio
        Customizing the Interface
        Setting User Preferences
      WebFOCUS Environments in App Studio
        Environment Structure
        WebFOCUS Environment Properties
      App Studio Data Access and Descriptions
        Accessing Data
      Tutorial: Creating an HTML Page in App Studio
        App Studio Tutorial Overview
        Connecting to the WebFOCUS Retail Data Source
        Creating the Project
        Creating the Multi-Component Procedure
        Creating the HTML Page
        Adding jQuery Animations to the HTML Page
        Running the HTML Page
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS App Studio Reference Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS App Studio
        What Is WebFOCUS App Studio?
        Launching App Studio
        WebFOCUS App Studio Documentation Overview
      Using the WebFOCUS App Studio Interface Components
        Application Button
        Quick Access Toolbar
        Canvas
        Ribbon
        Environments Tree Panel
        Environments Detail Panel
        File/Folder Properties Panel
        View Tabs
      Customizing WebFOCUS App Studio Panels
        Using the Panel Customization Options
        Using Handles
      Creating Reports in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Launching the Report Wizard
        Report Tab
        Format Tab
        Data Tab
        Layout Tab
        View Tab
        Images Tab
        Field Tab
        Appearance Tab
        Active Technologies Report Options Tab
        Matrix Tab
        Modeling Tab
        Creating Precision Reports
      Creating HTML Pages in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Launching the HTML/Document Wizard
        Components Tab
        Controls Tab
        Positioning Tab
        Utilities Tab
        Using Parameters
        Properties Panel
        Settings Panel
        Tasks & Animations Panel
        Requests & Data Sources Panel
        Specifying Browser Defaults With the Style Composer
        Chaining in the HTML Canvas
        Using the Toggle Move Via Drag and Drop Shortcut Option
        Using JavaScript Code With HTML Canvas Pages
        CSS Support Matrix for Internet Explorer
        CSS Class Mapping List
        Designing Content for Smartphones
      Creating Documents in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Launching the HTML/Document Wizard
        Insert Tab
        Positioning Tab
        Utilities Tab
        Thumbnails Panel
        Using the Properties Panel With the Document Canvas
      Creating Charts in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Launching the Chart Wizard
      Creating Visualizations in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Creating Visualizations
      Creating and Editing Metadata in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Launching the Data Source Definition Wizard
        Creating and Editing Synonyms
        Metadata Tab
        Metadata Canvas View Tabs
        Business View Panel
        Dimension Builder Panel
        Analyzing Procedures Using Impact Analysis
        Using the Metadata Shortcut Menu
        Troubleshooting Metadata Errors
      Using the Text Editor Tab in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Text Editor Tab
      Creating Procedures in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Procedure View Panel
        Joins
        Join Tab
        Using Dialogue Manager
        Use Qualified Path Command
      Troubleshooting App Studio
        Troubleshooting Tips
        Troubleshooting Tools
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    App Studio for the Developer Studio User
      Introduction to WebFOCUS App Studio
        The App Studio Paradigm and Terminology
        Installing App Studio and Developer Studio on the Same Machine
        WebFOCUS App Studio Documentation Overview
        Recommendations for Editing Developer Studio Files in App Studio
      Developer Studio and App Studio Interface Differences
        Comparing the Default Developer Studio and App Studio Interfaces
        Main Interface Commands
        WebFOCUS Administration
        Development Areas
        Creating Procedures
        Configuring Environments
        Managing Your WebFOCUS Environment
      Creating Procedures
        Accessing and Using the Procedure View Panel
      Creating Reports
        Creating Reports
        Creating SQL Reports
        Report Options Dialog Box
        Field Properties Dialog Box
        Adding Fields Using Smart Context
        Field Length Limit
        The Object Inspector Setup Tab
        &WFFMT Report Variable
      Creating HTML Pages
        Creating HTML Pages
        Using the Properties Panel
        Using the Settings Panel
        Requests & Data Sources Panel
        Using the Tasks & Animations Panel
        Generating a Chart From a Report
        Adding Additional Visual Discovery Controls
        Making an HTML Composer Page Mobile
      Creating, Editing, and Managing Synonyms and Adapters
        Creating and Editing Synonyms
        Configuring Adapters
        Rebuilding a Data Source
        Automatically Adding Synonyms to Projects
      Developer Studio Functionality Deprecated in App Studio
        Deprecated Functionality List
      Launch PDF
    Getting Started With the Responsive Design Framework Add-on for WebFOCUS App Studio
      Getting Started With the Responsive Design Framework
        Overview
        Contents of the RDF Add-on
        Importing and Configuring the RDF Add-on
        Introducing RDF Panels
        Introducing RDF Templates
        Creating Responsive Pages
        Using the RDF Grid
        Working With Filters
        Integrating Responsive Pages into the BI Portal
      Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Quick Data
    Introduction to the WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-In
      WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-In Overview
      WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-In Configuration and Installation
    Using the WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-in
      Accessing the WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-in in Excel
      WebFOCUS Quick Data Options
      Manually Defining Web Server Connection Settings
    Creating Reports and Using Ad Hoc Forms
      Selecting a Master File
      Creating Report Queries With InfoAssist
      Editing Report Queries in InfoAssist
      Creating Report Queries From Structured Ad Hoc Forms
    Creating Structured Ad Hoc Forms in a WebFOCUS Desktop Product
      Creating Structured Ad Hoc Forms
      Setting Query Properties
      Defining Data Formatting and Layout
    Launch PDF
  ReportCaster
    ReportCaster
      Introducing ReportCaster
        About ReportCaster
        ReportCaster Overview
        Creating a Schedule in a Self-Service Installation
        Section 508 Compliance
        ReportCaster Processing
        Distribution Server Features
      ReportCaster Console
        Using the ReportCaster Console
        ReportCaster Configuration Toolbar Icons
        Server Status
        Viewing the Distribution Server Status
        Stopping and Restarting the Distribution Server
        Failover Distribution Server Status and Tasks
        Job Status
        Job Logs
        ReportCaster Configuration
        Blackout Dates
        Execution Ids
        Global Updates
      Creating and Maintaining Distribution Lists
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing and Deleting a Distribution List
        Accessing Distribution Lists
        Bursting a Report
        Creating an External Distribution File
        Creating a Dynamic Distribution List
        Specifying Multiple Email Addresses
      Creating a ReportCaster Schedule in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        About the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        About Tasks in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Notification Options in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        About Properties in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        About Recurrence in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Advanced Settings
        Restricting Distribution of Reports to the Report Library
      Creating a ReportCaster Schedule in the Advanced Scheduling Tool
        Advanced Scheduling Tool
        Advanced Scheduling Tool Quick Access Toolbar
        Advanced Scheduling Ribbon
        Creating a Schedule in the Advanced Scheduling Tool
        About Tasks in the Advanced Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Advanced Scheduling Tool
        Notification Options
        About Properties in the Advanced Scheduling Tool
        About Recurrences in the Advanced Scheduling Tool
      Maintaining Schedules
        About Maintaining a Schedule in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Editing a Schedule in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Copying a Schedule in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Deleting a Schedule in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Sharing Schedules
        Publishing Schedules
        Changing Schedule Ownership
      Tracking Schedules
        Log Reports
      Using the Report Library
        About the Report Library
        Viewing Library Content
        Searching in an On-Demand Paging Report
        Creating and Maintaining Library Access Lists
        Accessing Library Access Lists
      ReportCaster Explorer
        Using the ReportCaster Explorer
        Explorer Schedule Toolbar
        Explorer Tree
        Explorer Item List Panel
        Explorer Schedule List Column Information
        Explorer Distribution List Column Information
        Explorer Access List Column Information
        Explorer Library and Watch List Report Column Information
        Explorer Item Options
        Searching Subfolders
      ReportCaster Tracing
        Enabling Tracing
        Servlet Tracing
        Distribution Server Startup Trace Files
        Schedule and Report Tracing
        Distribution Server Initialization Tracing
        Reporting Server Tracing
      Tips and Techniques for Coding a ReportCaster Report
        Editing WebFOCUS Procedures
        Using an Ampersand or a Single Quotation Mark
        HTML and Drill-Down Reports
        Using -HTMLFORM
        Distributing a Table of Contents Report Using ReportCaster
        Data Visualization
        Using the GRAPH FILE Command
        Distributing a Graph Image in a PDF Report
        Financial Modeling Language
        Using the &&KILL_RPC Flag
        Manually Coded Excel Compound Reports
        Compound Reports and Coordinated Compound Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Limitations for Using WebFOCUS Features
        Known Issues When Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Using WebFOCUS Commands With Burst Reports
        Specifying the Language for Scheduled Output
      ReportCaster Formats for Scheduled Output
        AHTML
        ALPHA
        APDF
        COM
        COMMA
        COMT
        DFIX
        DHTML
        DOC
        EXCEL
        EXL07
        EXL07 FORMULA
        EXL07 TEMPLATE
        EXL2K
        EXL2K FORMULA
        EXL2K PIVOT
        EXL2K TEMPLATE
        EXL97
        FLEX
        GIF
        HTML
        HTML5
        HTML ODP
        JPEG
        PDF
        PNG
        PPT
        PPT Template
        PPTX
        PPTX Template
        PS
        SVG
        TAB and TABT
        VISDIS
        VISDISAE
        WK1
        WP
        XML
      WebFOCUS Repository Tables for ReportCaster
        About Repository Reports
        WebFOCUS Repository Tables
      ReportCaster Variables
        ReportCaster Internal Variables
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    ReportCaster Legacy API Developer's Reference
      Introducing the ReportCaster Java API
        About the ReportCaster API
        How This Manual Works
        Installation Requirements
        ReportCaster Overview
        ReportCaster Components
        ReportCaster API Components
        ReportCaster API Functionality
        ReportCaster API Authentication and Ownership
        ReportCaster API Packages
        ReportCaster API Development at a Glance
        Customizing Error Messages
        Additional Information
      ReportCaster Java API Samples
        Introduction to API Samples
        Using Batch Files to Compile Samples
        Running the Samples
        Additional Files Packaged With the Samples Application
        Running the Legacy Java API on a Machine Without a WebFOCUS Installation
        Address Book Samples
        Library Access List Samples
        Schedule Samples
        Library Samples
        Console Samples
        Log Samples
        Credential Authentication Samples
        Password Samples
        Troubleshooting API Samples
      ReportCaster API Subroutines
        API Subroutines
        Subroutine Security
        Calling a Subroutine From a Procedure
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTBULK Subroutine
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTMEM Subroutine
        Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUN Subroutine
        Using Amper Variables Within a Subroutine
        ReportCaster API Subroutine Messages
      ReportCaster Servlet API
        Overview
        ReportCaster Servlet API Descriptions
        Servlet Security
        Calling a Servlet From an HTML Form
        Maintaining and Displaying a Distribution List With a Servlet
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTDLBULK Servlet
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTDLMEM Servlet
        Displaying a Distribution List Using the DSTDLLIST Servlet
        Scheduling a Job Using the DSTSCHED Servlet
        Setting the Status of a Job Using the DSTACTIVE Servlet
        Immediately Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUNNOW Servlet
        Displaying Log Information Using the DSTLOG Servlet
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
  Business Intelligence Dashboard
    Introducing Dashboard
      Using Dashboard
      Opening Dashboard
      Signing on to a Server
      Required Browsers and Setting
      Recommended Browser Settings
      Personalizing Your Dashboard
      Dashboard Layout
      Using Banner Hyperlinks
      Stopping Requests in Dashboard
      Viewing Reports in the Report Library
      Viewing Recently Run Reports
    Domain Content
      Selecting a Domain
      Types of Content in the Tree
      Filtering Content in the Tree
      Searching Content
    Managing Dashboard
      Managing Public Views
      Managing Group Views
      Managing Library Only Views
      Managing Private Views
      Accessing Dashboard and View Inheritance
      Managing Users
      Dashboard Change Management
      Handling Messages
    Creating Public and Group Views
      What Is a Public View?
      What Is a Group View?
      What Is a Library Only Group View?
      Adding a Group or Public View
      Directing Users to a Group View
      Adding a Library Only View
      Removing a Public or Group View
      Editing a Public or Group View
      Customizing Dashboard Pages for a Public or Group View
      Copying a Public or Group View
      Refreshing the Views List
      Exiting the Public Views or Group Views Window
    Customizing the Appearance of Dashboard
      Before You Begin Customizing the Appearance of Dashboard
      Opening the View Builder
      Selecting a Template
      Selecting Custom Colors
      Positioning the Tree and Banner
      Inserting a Logo
      Customizing the Banner
      Creating a Custom Toolbar
      Configuring the Filter in the Dashboard Tree
      Adding a Message of the Day
      Customizing the Sign Out Window
      Resetting the View Builder
      Saving Selections and Exiting a Customization
      Exiting the View Builder
    Creating Dashboard Content
      Creating Dashboard Content Overview
      Content Window
      Creating Content Pages
      Adding a Content Block
      Editing a Content Block
      Creating Filters For Published Content
      Selecting Content Layout
    Creating and Managing Reports in Dashboard
      Creating Reports in Dashboard
      Uploading Data Files
      Working With Shared Content
      Advanced Coding Techniques and Coding Considerations
    Running and Viewing Content in Dashboard
      Running Reports Interactively
      Amper Auto-Prompting
      Customizing the Amper Auto-Prompting Facility
      Saving Parameter Selections
      Using Reporting Object Filters to Limit Output Data
      Using Deferred Reporting
      Viewing Content Blocks
      Creating a Favorites List
      Mobile Favorites
      PowerPoint Integration With Dashboard
    Working With Alerts
      Alert Reporting
      Components of an Alert
      How to Create an Alert Test
      How to Create an Alert Result
      How to Schedule an Alert
      Checking Scheduled Alerts
      Creating and Scheduling an Alert
    Creating Reporting Objects
      Reporting Object Tool
    Launch PDF
  Mobile
    Mobile Faves for iOS User's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Mobile
        WebFOCUS Mobile Favorites
        Introducing the Mobile Faves App
        Getting the Mobile Faves App
        Quick Tour of Mobile Faves
      The Basics
        Understanding the Content List
        Navigating to Content
        Navigating Within Content
        Using the Tools Menu
        Content Watchlists
        Content List Icons
      The Fancy Stuff
        Adding a Server Connection
        Reordering a Server Connection
        Removing a Server Connection
        Opening an Email Attachment
        Adding a Passcode
        Mobile Faves Settings
        Configuring VPN on Your Device
        Updating the App
        Supporting Single Sign On Applications
      Additional Resources
        Subscribing to WebFOCUS Reports Using the Mobile Faves App Watch Feature
        Mobile Faves Customer-Branded Versions: An Offering From Information Builders
        Mobile Favorites
      Launch PDF
    Mobile Faves for Android User's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Mobile
        What is WebFOCUS Mobile Favorites?
        Introducing the Mobile Faves App
        Getting the Mobile Faves App
        Quick Tour of Mobile Faves
        Changing Layout
      The Basics
        Understanding the Content List
        Navigating to Content
        Navigating Within Content
        Using the Menu Option
      The Fancy Stuff
        Adding a Server Connection
        Removing a Server Connection
        Opening an Email Attachment
        Adding a Passcode
        Mobile Faves Settings
        Configuring VPN on Your Device
        Updating the App
        Supporting Single Sign on Applications
      Additional Resources
        Mobile Favorites
      Launch PDF
    Mobile Faves Branding Package Developer’s Guide
      Mobile Faves Customer-Branded Versions: An Offering From Information Builders
        Mobile Faves Customer-Branded Offering
        What the App Branding Service Package Includes
        How the Branding Service Works
        What Do You Need to Get Started?
        Build Components
        Graphical Components
        Textual Components
        Metadata
        Kicking Off a Build
        Notification of Builds
        Method of Support and Licensing
        Information Builders Licensing and Pricing Details
      Launch PDF
  Developer Studio
    Developer Studio Application Development Getting Started
      Introducing WebFOCUS and Developer Studio
        Additional WebFOCUS Products
        WebFOCUS Architecture
        Developer Studio Architecture
        Developer Studio Directory Structure
        Developer Studio Explorer Layout
        Development Modes with Developer Studio
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment in Developer Studio
        Logging Off Areas in WebFOCUS Environments
        Developer Studio Data Access and Descriptions
      Exploring Your WebFOCUS Development Environment
        Development Environment
        Development Tools
        Running an Application
      Setting Preferences
        Developer Studio Options
        General Tab
        Reporting Tab
        HTML Page Tab
        Document Tab
        Explorer Tab
        Source Control Tab
        External Tools Tab
        Title Format Tab
        Output Viewer Settings Tab
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Creating Reporting Applications With Developer Studio
      Creating a Reporting Application
        What Is a Reporting Application?
        Project-based and Remote Development Environments
        Creating a Project
        Organizing a Project
        Using Workspace Files
        Adding a Master File to a Project
        Uploading Data Files
        Viewing and Modifying Project Properties
        Managing a Project With Source Control
        Securing a Project
        Removing a Project
      Partitioning and Deploying Project Files
        Deployment Basics
        Summary of Steps
        Step 1: Identify the Target Servers
        Step 2: Create a Deployment Scenario
        Step 3: Partition the Project Files
        Step 4: Deploy the Project Files
        Configuring the Target Servers (Optional)
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
      Joining and Merging Data Sources
        What Is a Join?
        Types of Joins
        Joining Different Kinds of Data Sources
        Creating a Join With Graphical Tools
        Creating Multi-Field Joins
        Using Conditional Joins
        Creating Cluster Joins
        Customizing a Join
        Working With Joins
        Reporting With a Join
        Saving a Join
        Merging Data Sources Using the Match Wizard
      Hierarchical Reporting
        Reporting Against Hierarchies
        Creating a Report With a Multi-Dimensional Data Source
        Using Mandatory Variables (SAP BW)
        Sorting Hierarchical Data
        Selecting Records in a Hierarchy
        Manipulating Aggregated Data in an Essbase or SAP BW Hierarchy
        Summary of Reporting Rules For Multi-Dimensional Data Sources
        Showing Hierarchies in HTML Composer
        Using the Synonym Editor for Cube Data Sources
      Creating a Reporting Procedure
        Selecting a Creation Tool
        Incorporating a Procedure Into an Application
        Copying a Procedure
        Creating a Procedure Component
        Working With a Component
        Using the SQL Report Wizard
        Assigning a Logical Name With the Allocation Wizard
        Calling a Procedure From the Current One
        Using the Engine Tool
        Managing Flow of Control
        Working With a Full Procedure
        Running a Procedure
        Canceling a Running Procedure
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Viewing and Printing Reports and Graphs
        Viewing Reports in the Developer Studio Viewer
        Drilling Down for Details
        Navigating Through Multi-Page Web Reports
        Visualizing Trends in Reports
      Saving and Reusing Report Output
        Types of Output Files
        Creating Output Files
        Output File Formats
        Save Report Output as a Native Temporary Table In Report Painter
        Saving Reports as HTML Output
        Saving Reports as Print Display Output: PDF, PS
        Saving Reports Using Excel Formats
      Creating an Update Application With Update Assist
        Starting Update Assist
        Update Assist (Step 1 of 4): Selecting a Segment and Fields to Update
        Update Assist (Step 2 of 4): Selecting Navigation and Style Options
        Update Assist (Step 3 of 4): Selecting Output File Options
        Update Assist (Step 4 of 4): Confirming Selections
        About Your Update Assist Application
        Editing Your Update Assist Application
        Calling an Update Assist Procedure From a WebFOCUS Report
        Usage Notes
      Editing Application Components as Text in Developer Studio
        Text Editor
        The Other Component
        The Comment Component
        Creating a Text File or a Procedure Component as Text
        Opening Application Components as Text
        Finding and Replacing Text
        Changing Text Color and Case Size
        Adding Headings and Footings
        Using Bookmarks to Move Within a File
        Running a Procedure From the Editor
        Opening a Graphical Tool From the Text Editor
      Alert Procedures
        Alert Reporting Overview
        Components of an Alert
        Creating an Alert
        Checking Scheduled Alerts
      Reporting Objects in Developer Studio
        Reporting Objects
        Components of a Reporting Object
        Running a Reporting Object From Developer Studio
        Creating a Reporting Object Which Uses a HOLD File
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Describing Data With Graphical Tools
      Describing and Accessing Data Overview
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        How Applications Interpret Data
        Obtaining a Synonym
        What You Can Do With a Synonym
        Ways to Enhance a Synonym
        How an Application Uses a Synonym
        Alternative Tools on the Reporting Server Console
      Accessing Data and Creating Synonyms
        Configuring Adapters and Remote Servers in Developer Studio
        Creating Synonyms in Developer Studio
        Defining a Remote Server in the WebFOCUS Client Communication File
      Using the Synonym Editor
        Synonym Editor Layout
        Viewing and Editing Synonym Attributes
        Setting Up Multilingual Titles and Descriptions
        Enhancing Synonyms Using the Modeling View
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
        Creating Cluster Joins
        Defining Dimensions for OLAP Analysis
        Using the Synonym Editor for Cube Data Sources
        Creating Business Views
        Adding Virtual Columns (DEFINE) in a Synonym
        Creating Filters in a Synonym
        Adding Computed Fields (COMPUTE) in a Synonym
        Storing the Number of Repetitions of a Repeating Field in a Virtual Field
        Defining Attributes and Creating Expressions for Custom Fields
        Adding Group Fields in a Synonym
        Applying Database Administrator Security
      Analyzing Metadata and Procedures
        Analyzing Procedures With the Impact Analysis Tool
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
      Adding Data and Rebuilding FOCUS Data Sources
        Creating a FOCUS Data Source
        Rebuilding a Data Source
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Creating Financial Reports
      Financial Reporting and Analysis for the Enterprise
        WebFOCUS Financial Reporting Benefits
        Enterprise Financial Reporting: A Critical Cornerstone of Business
        Financial Reporting Within and Beyond an Organization
        Financial Reporting and Government Regulations
        The WebFOCUS Financial Reporting Platform
        WebFOCUS Financial Report Painter
        Learning More About the WebFOCUS Financial Report Painter
      Creating Reports With the Financial Report Painter
        Financial Report Painter Overview
        Starting a Financial Report
        Designing Your Financial Report
        Running a Financial Report
        Creating a Financial Report Using a Cube Data Source
        Retrieving FOR Field Values From a Data Source
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Supplying Data Directly
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Text
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Formatting Financial Reports
        Adding, Inserting, and Deleting Rows
        Editing Row Types and Properties
        Adding and Deleting Columns
      Tutorial: Creating a Financial Report Using the Financial Report Painter
        Create a Project
        Create a Procedure Within the Project
        Create the Base Report in Report Painter
        Create the Income Statement in the Financial Report Painter
      Tutorial: Creating an Income Statement Using Unconsolidated Data
        Tutorial Overview
        Create a Procedure Within the Project
        Join the Data Sources
        Create the Base Report in Report Painter
        Create the Income Statement in the Financial Report Painter
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Describing Data for an FML Hierarchy
        Data Requirements for FML Hierarchies
        Coding an FML Hierarchy in a Text Editor
        Defining an FML Hierarchy in the Synonym Editor
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
  Maintain
    Maintain Getting Started
      Introducing WebFOCUS Maintain
        Road Map: Where Should You Go?
        What Is WebFOCUS Maintain?
        Overview of Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
      WebFOCUS Maintain Basic Tutorial
        Before You Begin
        Creating a Project
        Familiarizing Yourself With the Explorer
        Adding a Data Source to Your Project
        Familiarizing Yourself With the Project Explorer
        Designing a Form
        Saving Your Work
        Selecting a Starting Object
        Running Your Project Locally
        Using Radio Buttons
        Giving Your Form a New Title
        Writing Data to the Data Source
        Adding a Form to Display Data From a Data Source
        Using the HTML Overflow Property
        Adding Form Navigation Buttons
        Deploying Your Project to a Different WebFOCUS Server
        Adding Images to Your Project
        What Is Next?
      WebFOCUS Maintain Advanced Tutorial
        Before You Begin
        Creating an Update Form
        Updating a Record in a Data Source
        Using Scripts for User Feedback
        Updating a Data Source Using a Read/Write Grid
        Creating a Welcome Screen Using the Menu Control
        Adding a WebFOCUS Report to Your Application
        Using a JavaScript Function to Define an Email Link
        Adding a Pop-up Calendar
        Getting Help in the Maintain Development Environment
      WebFOCUS Maintain Concepts
        Set-based Processing
        Controlling a the Flow of a Procedure
        Executing Other Maintain Procedures
        Forms and Event-driven Processing
        Reading From a Data Source
        Writing to a Data Source
        Transaction Processing
        Classes and Objects
      WebFOCUS Maintain Sample Data Sources
        Fannames Data Source
        Users Data Source
        Contact Data Source
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Developing Maintain Applications
      Setting Up Your WebFOCUS Maintain Project
        Opening WebFOCUS Maintain
        Applications and Projects
        What Are the Building Blocks of a WebFOCUS Maintain Project?
        Editing Projects in the Maintain Development Environment
        Viewing System Messages in the Output Window
        Searching for Text in Your Project
        Editing Project Components as Text
        Incorporating Data Sources Into Your Project
        Using the Resource Wizard
        Team Development
      Developing Procedures
        Overview
        Specifying Data Sources for Your Procedure
        Using Functions in Procedures
        Using Variables in Procedures
        Using Data Source Stacks in Procedures
        Using the Type Wizard
        Using Import Modules
        Testing Procedures With the Run Procedure Option
      Using the Form Editor
        Form Editor Overview
        Layout of the Form Editor
        Using the Controls Palette
        Using the Property Sheet
        Using Drawing Aids
        Selecting Multiple Controls
        Cutting, Copying, Pasting, and Duplicating Controls
        Resizing Controls
        Aligning Controls
        Spacing Controls
        Grouping Controls
        Changing the Order of Controls
        Undoing and Redoing Actions
        Layering Controls
      Developing and Using Forms
        Before You Begin Designing Forms
        Creating and Managing Forms
        Copying a Form Within a Procedure
        Changing Form Properties
        Using Cascading Style Sheets
        Dynamically Manipulating Forms at Run Time
        How WebFOCUS Maintain Saves Your Forms
        Using a Driver Procedure
      Defining Events and Event Handlers
        Using the Event Handler Editor
        Events
        Using a Maintain Function as an Event Handler
        Using Script Functions as Event Handlers
        Using Web Links as Event Handlers
      Developing and Using Controls
        Which Control Should You Use?
        Using Buttons
        Using Check Boxes
        Using Combo Boxes and List Boxes
        Using Edit Boxes and Multi-Edit Boxes
        Using Frames
        Using Grids and HTML Tables
        Using Group Boxes
        Using HTML Objects
        Using Images
        Using Java Applets
        Using Lines
        Using Menus
        Using Radio Buttons
        Using Text
        Using ActiveX Controls
        Dynamically Manipulating Controls at Run Time
        Defining Colors for Your Form and Controls
        Assigning Help to Your Forms and Controls
        Assigning Tab Order to Controls
      Form and Control Properties Reference
        (GroupCode) Property
        (Name) Property
        Alignment Property
        Alt Property
        AlternateRowColor Property
        BackColor Property
        BackColorOver Property
        BackgroundImage Property
        BodyRowHeight Property
        Border Property
        BorderColor Property
        BorderText Property
        BorderWidth Property
        Bottom Property
        Calendar Property
        CaseStyle Property
        Checked Property
        Columns Property
        Content Property
        CSSName Property
        CSSClass Property
        CursorPointer Property
        DefaultButton Property
        Enabled Property
        FixedColumns Property
        Font Property
        ForeColor Property
        ForeColorOver Property
        GridLines Property
        HeaderBackColor Property
        HeaderFont Property
        HeaderForeColor Property
        Headers Property
        Help Property
        Hyperlink Property
        IBIValidation Property
        Image Property
        ImageDown Property
        ImageOver Property
        ItemBorder Property
        Layer Property
        Left Property
        ListItems Property
        Map Property
        MultiSelection Property
        OnLoad Property
        Orientation Property
        Overflow Property
        Password Property
        PenWidth Property
        ReadOnly Property
        Right Property
        Rows Property
        Scrolling Property
        SelectedItem/SelectedItems Property
        Source Property
        Stretched Property
        Tabstop Property
        Text Property
        TextOnLeft Property
        Title Property
        ToolTipText Property
        Top Property
        Visible Property
        ZIndex Property
      Executing Other Procedures
        The Advantages of Modularizing Source Code
        Using the CALL and EXEC Commands
        Executing a Procedure on Another Server: AT Server
        Keeping or Terminating the Server Session: KEEP/DROP
        Passing Parameters Between Maintain Procedures: FROM...INTO
        Passing Parameters Between Maintain and WebFOCUS Procedures: FROM…INTO
        Optimizing Performance: Data Continuity and Memory Management
      Using WebFOCUS Procedures in Your Application
        What Can WebFOCUS Procedures Do?
        Incorporating WebFOCUS Procedures Into Your Project
        Executing WebFOCUS Procedures From Maintain Procedures
        Using WebFOCUS Report Output in Maintain
        Executing Maintain Procedures From WebFOCUS Report Procedures
        Using Variable Binding From WebFOCUS Reports
      Developing Classes and Objects
        What Are Classes and Objects?
        Defining Classes
        Reusing Classes: Class Libraries
        Declaring Objects
      Running WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Compiling WebFOCUS Maintain Procedures
        Executing Maintain Procedures From Outside the Maintain Development Environment
        Security and Running WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Customizing Key Functions and JavaScript for WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Closing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
      Designing Applications for Scalability and Performance
        Application Partitioning
        Presentation Logic
        Database Logic
        Miscellaneous Business Logic
        EXEC Command, CALL Command, and System Resources
        Use When Appropriate
        Using the Best Parts
        Persistence Management
        Development Standards
        Tips for Designing Applications
      Ensuring Transaction Integrity
        Transaction Integrity Overview
        Why Is Transaction Integrity Important?
        Defining a Transaction
        Evaluating Whether a Transaction Was Successful
        Concurrent Transaction Processing
        Ensuring Transaction Integrity for FOCUS Data Sources
        Ensuring Transaction Integrity for DB2 Data Sources
      Debugging WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        WebFOCUS Maintain Application Debugger
        Type on EDAPRINT
        Maintain Statement Trace
        MNTCON PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS
        Additional Trace Settings
      Deploying Legacy Applications to the Web
        What Are the Differences Between Windows-Deployed and Web-Deployed Applications?
        Legacy Form Properties and Behavior
        Upgrading Legacy Windows Applications
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Maintain Language Reference
      Language Rules Reference
        Case Sensitivity
        Specifying Names
        Reserved Words
        What Can You Include in a Procedure?
        Multi-Line Commands
        Terminating Command Syntax
        Adding Comments
      Expressions Reference
        Types of Expressions That You Can Write
        Writing Numeric Expressions
        Writing Date Expressions
        Writing Date-Time Expressions
        Writing Character Expressions
        Writing Logical Expressions
        Writing Conditional Expressions
        Handling Null Values in Expressions
      Command Reference
        Language Summary
        BEGIN
        CALL
        CASE
        COMMIT
        COMPUTE
        COPY
        DECLARE
        DECRYPT
        DELETE
        DESCRIBE
        ENCRYPT/DECRYPT
        END
        EXEC
        FocCount
        FocCurrent
        FocError
        FocErrorRow
        FocFetch
        FocIndex
        FocMsg
        GOTO
        IF
        INCLUDE
        INFER
        MAINTAIN
        MATCH
        MNTCON CDN_FEXINPUT
        MNTCON COMPILE
        MNTCON EX
        MNTCON EXIT_WARNING
        MNTCON MATCH_CASE
        MNTCON PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS
        MNTCON RADIO_BUTTON_EMIT_TEXT
        MNTCON REMOTESTYLE
        MNTCON RUN
        MODULE
        NEXT
        ON MATCH
        ON NEXT
        ON NOMATCH
        ON NONEXT
        PERFORM
        REPEAT
        REPOSITION
        REVISE
        ROLLBACK
        SAY
        SET
        SetLayer
        STACK CLEAR
        STACK SORT
        SYS_MGR
        SYS_MGR.DBMS_ERRORCODE
        SYS_MGR.ENGINE
        SYS_MGR.FOCSET
        SYS_MGR.GET_INPUTPARAMS_COUNT
        SYS_MGR.GET_NAMEPARM
        SYS_MGR.GET_POSITIONPARM
        SYS_MGR.PRE_MATCH
        TYPE
        UPDATE
        Winform
      WebFOCUS Maintain Error Messages
        Error Messages
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
  Charting
    WebFOCUS Graphics
      Graphing Basics
        What Is Scalable Vector Graphics?
        Viewing Scalable Vector Graphics
        Portable Network Graphics
        Virtual Coordinate System
        Implementing API Calls
      Using WebFOCUS Graphics
        How Properties and Methods Work
        The GraphType Property
        How Graphs Are Imaged
        Chart Layout Manager
        Setting the Color of the Page Surrounding the Graph
        Graph-Wide Parameters
        Graph Frame Attributes
        Axis Attributes
        Grid Lines
        Curve Fit Lines
        Java 2D Line Objects
        Risers and Markers
        Legends
        Labels and Titles
        Data Text
        Customizing Data Text
        Formatting Numbers and Numeric Labels
        Formatting Text Objects
        Java 2D Text Objects
        Autofitting
        Graph-Specific Properties and Methods
        Colors and Shading
        Textures and Gradients
        Panning, Rotating, and Scaling
        Graph Editing Characteristics
        Annotations
        Drill-Down and URLs
        Multiple Drill-Down From Graph
        Alternate Formatting
        Beveled Borders
        Reference Lines
      Using Data in a Graph
        Graph Titles and Labels
        Data Scrolling and Zooming
        How Missing Data Is Handled
        Data Requirements for Different Graph Types
      Properties
        Properties for Graphs
        AdjustAutoScaleForRefLines
        AlignMultiYBars
        AltFmtFrameSeparator
        AltFmtFrameNumColors
        AltFmtMatchAxisLabelColor
        AutoHideDataTextOnSmallRisers
        Autoshading
        AutoshadingWalls
        BiDirectional
        BoxPlotType
        Cascade
        ColorMode
        ConnectLineMarkers
        ConnectParetoBars
        ConnectScatterMarkers
        CubeFocusFactor
        CubeIsometricProjection
        CubeLightSourceX
        CubeLightSourceY
        CubeLightSourceZ
        CubePanX
        CubePanY
        CubeProportional
        CubeRiserInterpolation
        CubeSizeX
        CubeSizeY
        CubeSizeZ
        CubeSquareRisers
        CubeTranslationX
        CubeTranslationY
        CubeTranslationZ
        CubeViewerX
        CubeViewerY
        CubeViewerZ
        CubeWallThickX
        CubeWallThickY
        CubeWallThickZ
        CubeZoomFactor
        CurveFitEquationDisplay
        CurveFitHighOrderFirst
        CurveFitNumSegments
        DataItemsAlongSeries
        DataLineThickness
        DataScrollerPresenceGroups
        DataScrollerPresenceSeries
        DataSortType
        DataTextAngleDefault
        DataTextDisplay
        DataTextFormat
        DataTextFormatPattern
        DataTextPosition
        DataTextRadiusDefault
        DataTextStackedTotalOnTop()
        DataTextTemplateBubble
        DataTextTemplateHiLo
        DataTextTemplateScatter
        DepthAngle
        DepthRadius
        Display3DFloor
        Display3DLeftWall
        Display3DRightWall
        DisplayBarAsPictograph
        DisplayFunnelGroup
        DisplayParetoSeries
        DocumentHeightInTwips
        DocumentWidthInTwips
        DrawAreaMarkers
        DrawCompleteAreaRiser
        DualAxisLineDisplay
        DualAxisSplitPosition
        ExactColorByHeight
        ExtendToFrameEdge
        FillMissingData
        FootnoteDisplay
        FootnoteString
        ForceSeriesAbsolute
        FrameAutoShade
        FrameDisplay
        FunnelLabelValueLocation
        GaugeBackgroundStyle
        GaugeColorCenterByQuality
        GaugeDescending
        GaugeIgnoreBackgroundStyle
        GaugeMajorAutoStep
        GaugeMajorTickRelativeTickLength
        GaugeMinorAutoStep
        GaugeMinorTickRelativeTickLength
        GaugeNeedleStyle
        GaugeRelativeInnerRadius
        GaugeRelativeThickness
        GaugeSizeMode
        GaugeStartAngle
        GaugeStopAngle
        GraphType
        Grid3DFloorDisplayX
        Grid3DFloorDisplayZ
        Grid3DLeftWallDisplayY
        Grid3DLeftWallDisplayZ
        Grid3DRightWallDisplayX
        Grid3DRightWallDisplayY
        Grid3DRiserDisplayX
        Grid3DRiserDisplayY
        Grid3DRiserDisplayZ
        HiliteBarResize
        IgnoreTickSkip
        InterpretAsHLOC
        LegendAutomatic
        LegendDisplay
        LegendMarkerPosition
        LegendMarkersPerRow
        LegendOrient
        LegendReverse
        LegendScroll
        LegendSeriesCount
        LegendSeriesStart
        MajorGridDrawEveryCount
        MajorGridTickInterval
        MinorGridTickInterval
        MarkerDisplay
        MarkerSizeDefault
        MoveAxisTitles
        NestedLabels
        NullLegendMarkerShapesAsSquares
        NumMissingDataSegments
        NumPieArcSegmentsPerPixel
        OtherPercentage
        OtherSeries
        OutputSVG
        OverDrawSkip
        O1AxisLineDisplay
        O1AxisSide
        O1ExcludeMaxLabel
        O1ExcludeMinLabel
        O1LabelAutoAngle
        O1LabelAutoSkip
        O1LabelDisplay
        O1LabelMargin
        O1LabelRotate
        O1LabelSkipBegin
        O1LabelSkipCount
        O1LabelStagger
        O1LabelWrap
        O1MajorGridDisplay
        O1MajorGridStyle
        O1MajorTickDisplay
        O1MajorTickStyle
        O1MinorGridCount
        O1MinorGridDisplay
        O1MinorGridStyle
        O1MinorTickCount
        O1MinorTickDisplay
        O1MinorTickStyle
        O1TitleDisplay
        O1TitleString
        O2ExcludeMaxLabel
        O2ExcludeMinLabel
        O2LabelAutoSkip
        O2LabelDisplay
        O2LabelRotate
        O2LabelSkipBegin
        O2LabelSkipCount
        O2LabelWrap
        O2TitleDisplay
        O2TitleString
        ParetoDisplayThreshold
        ParetoY2MajorGridStep
        ParetoY2MajorTickStep
        PieBarLabelDisplay
        PieBarLabelString
        PieBarSeries
        PieDepth
        PieFeelerTextDisplay
        PieFeelerTextFormat
        PieFeelerTextFormatPattern
        PieLabelDisplay
        PieRingSize
        PieRingTotalDisplay
        PieRingTotalFormat
        PieRingTotalFormatPattern
        PieRotate
        PieSorting
        PiesPerRow
        PieTilt
        Place
        PrimitiveAntialiasing
        QuadrantLineCountX
        QuadrantLineCountY
        ReferencePercentageMode
        ReferenceTextPosition
        RemoveDuplicateDataText
        RepositionDataTextCollision
        RepositionStackedDataTextCollision
        ReshapeEnable
        ResizeBarMode
        ReverseGroups
        ReverseSeries
        Riser3DThicknessY
        RiserBarGroupSpacing
        RiserBorderMode
        RiserWidth
        ScaleFromZero
        ScrollOffsetGroup
        ScrollOffsetSeries
        SelectionEnable
        SelectionEnableMove
        SeriesAreRows
        SeriesDefaultBorderColor
        SeriesDefaultTransparentBorderColor
        SeriesLineWidthDefault
        SeriesLooping
        ShadowXOffsetDefault
        ShadowYOffsetDefault
        SmoothLines
        SquareMarkers
        StackedDataValueSum
        Stock52WeekHighDisplay
        Stock52WeekHighValue
        Stock52WeekLowDisplay
        Stock52WeekLowValue
        StockCandleForVolumeColor
        StockCloseSplitDisplay
        StockCloseTicksDisplay
        StockMovingAverageDisplay
        StockOpenTicksDisplay
        StockTickLength
        SubtitleDisplay
        SubtitleString
        TextAntialiasing
        TitleDisplay
        TitleString
        ToolTipDelay
        ToolTipDisplay
        ToolTipMode
        ToolTipTimeoutEnabled
        TransparentMarkers
        TransparentMarkerSize
        UseDefaultBubbleMarker
        UseOffScreen
        UseSeriesBorderDefaults
        UseSeriesShapes
        UseTimeScaleAxis
        ViewableGroups
        ViewableGroupsStock
        ViewableSeries
        ViewableSeriesStock
        Viewing3DAnglePreset
        WaterfallLastGroupTotal
        WaterfallStackColorMode
        X1AxisDescending
        X1AxisLineDisplay
        X1AxisSide
        X1ExcludeMaxLabel
        X1ExcludeMinLabel
        X1LabelDisplay
        X1LabelFormat
        X1LabelFormatPattern
        X1LabelRotate
        X1LabelStagger
        X1LogScale
        X1MajorGridDisplay
        X1MajorGridStep
        X1MajorGridStepAuto
        X1MajorGridStyle
        X1MajorTickDisplay
        X1MajorTickStyle
        X1MinorGridDisplay
        X1MinorGridStep
        X1MinorGridStepAuto
        X1MinorGridStyle
        X1MinorTickDisplay
        X1MinorTickStyle
        X1MustIncludeZero
        X1OffScaleDisplay
        X1ScaleMax
        X1ScaleMaxAuto
        X1ScaleMin
        X1ScaleMinAuto
        X1TitleDisplay
        X1TitleString
        X1ZeroLineDisplay
        Y1AxisDescending
        Y1AxisLineDisplay
        Y1AxisSide
        Y1ExcludeMaxLabel
        Y1ExcludeMinLabel
        Y1LabelDisplay
        Y1LabelFormat
        Y1LabelFormatPattern
        Y1LabelRotate
        Y1LabelStagger
        Y1LogScale
        Y1MajorGridDisplay
        Y1MajorGridStep
        Y1MajorGridStepAuto
        Y1MajorGridStyle
        Y1MajorTickDisplay
        Y1MajorTickStyle
        Y1MinorGridDisplay
        Y1MinorGridStepAuto
        Y1MinorGridStyle
        Y1MinorTickDisplay
        Y1MinorTickStepAuto
        Y1MinorTickStyle
        Y1MustIncludeZero
        Y1OffScaleDisplay
        Y1ScaleMax
        Y1ScaleMaxAuto
        Y1ScaleMin
        Y1ScaleMinAuto
        Y1TitleDisplay
        Y1TitleString
        Y1ZeroLineDisplay
        Y2AxisDescending
        Y2AxisLineDisplay
        Y2AxisSide
        Y2ExcludeMaxLabel
        Y2ExcludeMinLabel
        Y2LabelDisplay
        Y2LabelFormat
        Y2LabelFormatPattern
        Y2LabelRotate
        Y2LabelStagger
        Y2LogScale
        Y2MajorGridDisplay
        Y2MajorGridStep
        Y2MajorGridStepAuto
        Y2MajorGridStyle
        Y2MinorGridDisplay
        Y2MinorGridStep
        Y2MinorGridStepAuto
        Y2MinorGridStyle
        Y2MustIncludeZero
        Y2OffScaleDisplay
        Y2ScaleMax
        Y2ScaleMaxAuto
        Y2ScaleMin
        Y2ScaleMinAuto
        Y2TitleDisplay
        Y2TitleString
        Y2ZeroLineDisplay
        Y3AxisDescending
        Y3LogScale
        Y3ZeroLineDisplay
        Y4AxisDescending
        Y4LogScale
        Y4ZeroLineDisplay
        Y5AxisDescending
        Y5LogScale
        Y5ZeroLineDisplay
        ZeroValueDataTextDisplay
        ZeroValueDataTextStackedTotalOnTopDisplay
        ZoomDirection
        ZoomPercentage
      Methods
        get Methods
        restore Methods
        save()
        send Methods
        set Methods
      Methods That Return an Object ID
        Object ID Methods
        getAllSeries()
        getAnnotation()
        getAnnotationBox()
        getAnnotationLabel()
        getAnnotationLine()
        getAreaRiser()
        getAreaRiserBottom()
        getAreaRiserTop()
        getBarRiser()
        getBarRiserBottom()
        getBarRiserSide()
        getChartBackground()
        getColorByHeight()
        getCubeFloor()
        getCubeFloorGridX()
        getCubeFloorGridZ()
        getCubeLeftWall()
        getCubeLeftWallGridY()
        getCubeLeftWallGridZ()
        getCubeRightWall()
        getCubeRightWallGridX()
        getCubeRightWallGridZ()
        getCubeRiserFace()
        getCubeRiserGridX()
        getCubeRiserGridY()
        getCubeRiserGridZ()
        getCurveFitCorrelationText()
        getCurveFitCorrelationTextbox()
        getCurveFitEquationText()
        getCurveFitEquationTextbox()
        getCurveFitLineRiser()
        getDataText()
        getExceptionalRiser()
        getFootnote()
        getFootnoteBox()
        getFrame()
        getFrameBottom()
        getFrameSeparator()
        getFrameSide()
        getFunnelCrust()
        getFunnelFeeler()
        getFunnelLabel()
        getFunnelValueLabel()
        getGaugeArea()
        getGaugeBackground()
        getGaugeBand1...5()
        getGaugeBand1...5Label()
        getGaugeLabel()
        getGaugeMajorTick()
        getGaugeMinorTick()
        getGaugeNeedle()
        getGaugeScaleArea()
        getGaugeTitle()
        getGlobal()
        getGroup()
        getGroupScroller()
        getGroupScrollerEditBox()
        getGroupScrollerEditLeft()
        getGroupScrollerEditRight()
        getGroupScrollerEditThumb()
        getGroupScrollerThumb()
        getHistogramRiser()
        getLegendArea()
        getLegendMarker()
        getLegendScroller()
        getLegendScrollerThumb()
        getLegendText()
        getLegendTextBox()
        getLineMarker()
        getLineRiser()
        getLineRiserSide()
        getLineRiserTop()
        getNestedO1Label0...8()
        getNestedO1Label0...8Box()
        getNestedO1LabelLine()
        getNonZeroBaseLineZeroLine()
        getO1Axis()
        getO1AxisLine()
        getO1Label()
        getO1MajorGrid()
        getO1MajorTick()
        getO1MinorGrid()
        getO1MinorTick()
        getO1Title()
        getO1TitleBox()
        getO2Axis()
        getO2Label()
        getO2MajorGrid()
        getO2MinorGrid()
        getO2Title()
        getO2TitleBox()
        getParetoLineMarker()
        getParetoLineRiser()
        getParetoLineRiserSide()
        getParetoLineRiserSide1()
        getParetoLineRiserSide2()
        getParetoLineRiserTop()
        getParetoLineRiserTop1()
        getParetoLineRiserTop2()
        getPieBarConnectLineBottom()
        getPieBarConnectLines()
        getPieBarLabel()
        getPieBarRiserTop()
        getPieBarSlice()
        getPieBarSliceCrust()
        getPieFeelerLine()
        getPieFrame()
        getPieLabel()
        getPieRingLabel()
        getPieSliceFeelerPercent()
        getPieSliceFeelerValue()
        getPieSliceLabel()
        getPlaceHorzO1LabelsTitle()
        getPlaceVertO1LabelsTitle()
        getQuadrantLine()
        getReferenceLine()
        getReferenceLineLegendText()
        getReferenceLineO1()
        getReferenceLineO2()
        getReferenceLineX1()
        getReferenceLineY1()
        getReferenceLineY2()
        getReferenceLineTextO1()
        getReferenceLineTextO2()
        getReferenceLineTextX1()
        getReferenceLineTextY1()
        getReferenceLineTextY2()
        getScatterQuadrantLine()
        getSeries()
        getSeriesGroup()
        getSeriesScroller()
        getSeriesScrollerEditBox()
        getSeriesScrollerEditLeft()
        getSeriesScrollerEditRight()
        getSeriesScrollerEditThumb()
        getSeriesScrollerThumb()
        getSlice()
        getSliceCrust()
        getSliceRing()
        getSpectralLegendMarker()
        getSpectralMarker()
        getStackConnectLine()
        getStock52WeekHighLine()
        getStock52WeekLowLine()
        getStockCloseTick()
        getStockFallingRiser()
        getStockHighLine()
        getStockLowerRiser()
        getStockLowLine()
        getStockMALine()
        getStockOpenTick()
        getStockRiser()
        getStockRisingRiser()
        getStockVolumeRiser()
        getSubTitle()
        getSubTitleBox()
        getThermGaugeArea()
        getThermGaugeBackground()
        getThermGaugeNeedle()
        getTimeScaleLevel()
        getTitle()
        getTitleBox()
        getWaterFallLine()
        getX1Axis()
        getX1AxisLine()
        getX1Label()
        getX1MajorGrid()
        getX1MajorTick()
        getX1MinorGrid()
        getX1MinorTick()
        getX1Title()
        getX1TitleBox()
        getX1ZeroLine()
        getY1Axis()
        getY1AxisLine()
        getY1FrontZeroLine()
        getY1Label()
        getY1MajorGrid()
        getY1MajorTick()
        getY1MinorGrid()
        getY1MinorTick()
        getY1Title()
        getY1TitleBox()
        getY1ZeroLine()
        getY2Axis()
        getY2AxisLine()
        getY2FrontZeroLine()
        getY2Label()
        getY2MajorGrid()
        getY2MajorTick()
        getY2MinorGrid()
        getY2MinorTick()
        getY2Title()
        getY2TitleBox()
        getY2ZeroLine()
        getY3Axis()
        getY3AxisLine()
        getY3FrontZeroLine()
        getY3Label()
        getY3MajorGrid()
        getY3MajorTick()
        getY3MinorGrid()
        getY3MinorTick()
        getY3Title()
        getY3TitleBox()
        getY3ZeroLine()
        getY4Axis()
        getY4AxisLine()
        getY4Label()
        getY4MajorGrid()
        getY4MajorTick()
        getY4MinorGrid()
        getY4MinorTick()
        getY4Title()
        getY4TitleBox()
        getY4ZeroLine()
        getY5Axis()
        getY5AxisLine()
        getY5Label()
        getY5MajorGrid()
        getY5MajorTick()
        getY5MinorGrid()
        getY5MinorTick()
        getY5Title()
        getY5TitleBox()
        getY5ZeroLine()
      Graph Types and 3D Preset Viewing Angles
        Graph Types
        3D Preset Viewing Angles
      Graph Properties Index
        Current Graph Properties
        Graph Properties Reserved For Future Use
        Graph Properties Reserved for Internal Use
      Graph Methods Index
        Current Graph Methods
        Reserved for Future Use
        Reserved for Internal Use
      IdentObj Methods Index
        Current IndentObj Methods
        IndentObj Methods Reserved for Future Use
      Static Variables
        Current Static Variables
      Launch PDF
    Creating HTML5 Charts With WebFOCUS Language
      Introduction to WebFOCUS HTML5 Charts
        WebFOCUS Charting Overview
        Chart Types
        Creating an HTML5 Chart
        Introduction to the WebFOCUS GRAPH FILE Command
        Generating Sample Files for Running Sample Requests
      Understanding Chart Types
        Chart Components
        Controlling the Chart Type
        Chart Type Notes and Sample Charts
      Introduction to JSON Properties for HTML5 Charts
        WebFOCUS HTML5 JSON Syntax Basics
        Colors and Gradients
        Font Definitions
        Formatting Numbers
        HTML Codes in Strings
        Data Definitions
        Setting Chart Property Values
        Defining a Callback Function to Display Values in Labels
      Chart-Wide Properties
        Chart-Wide Properties Overview
        Controlling Automatic Layout of Ordinal Axis Labels
        Formatting the Chart Border
        Defining How to Handle JavaScript Errors
        Formatting the Chart Frame
        Controlling the Number of Charts in a Horizontal Row
        Showing and Formatting Data Text Labels for All Series
        Defining the Range of Data to Draw in the Chart
        Applying Depth to Charts
        Applying a Color or Gradient to the Draw Area
        Defining Group Labels
        Applying a Bevel to Risers, Markers, and Slices
        Applying a Lightening or Darkening Effect to Successive Risers
        Controlling Space Between Risers in 3D Charts
        Applying a Shadow to Risers and Markers
        Swapping Series and Group Orientation
        Swapping Series, Group, and Label Orientation
      Chart Title Properties
        Chart Title Properties Overview
        Formatting the Chart Footnote
        Formatting the Chart Subtitle
        Formatting the Chart Title
      Legend Properties
        Legend Properties Overview
        Defining the Background Color of the Legend Area
        Formatting the Legend Labels
        Generating a Line Around the Legend Area
        Controlling the Location of the Legend Markers
        Controlling the Size of Legend Markers
        Controlling the Position of the Legend
        Applying a Shadow to the Legend Area
        Formatting the Legend Title
        Controlling the Visibility of the Legend Area
        Controlling the Location of a Free Legend
      Axis Properties
        Axis Properties Overview
        Filling Alternate Segments of Axis Grid Lines With a Specified Color
        Controlling the Appearance of a Numeric Axis Base Line
        Enabling a Logarithmic Scale
        Formatting an Axis Body Line
        Defining Color Bands
        Controlling the Number of Major Grid Lines, Ticks, and Labels
        Synchronizing Y2-Axis Major Grid Lines With Y-Axis Major Grid Lines
        Controlling the Direction of a Numeric Axis
        Formatting the Axis Labels
        Formatting Major Grid Lines and Tick Marks
        Defining the Minimum and Maximum Values on a Numeric Axis
        Formatting Minor Grid Lines and Tick Marks
        Setting the Axis Mode
        Controlling the Format of Numeric Axis Labels
        Reversing the Default Axis Locations
        Formatting an Axis Title
      Series-Specific Properties
        Series-Specific Properties Overview
        Selecting Specific Series
        Selecting Specific Groups
        Defining a Border for Series Risers
        Defining Colors for Series Risers
        Deleting a Slice From a Pie Chart
        Pushing a Slice Away From a Pie Chart
        Assigning Labels to Individual Series
        Defining the Size, Border, Color, Shape, and Rotation of Series Markers
        Defining the Shapes of Risers for a Series in Bar, Line, and Area Charts
        Showing Data Text Labels for Series and Groups
        Defining a Tooltip for Risers
        Drawing a Series Trendline in Bubble and Scatter Charts
        Controlling the Visibility of Individual Series
        Assigning a Series to an Axis
      Chart-Specific Properties
        Bar, Line, and Area Chart Properties (blaProperties)
        Box Plot Properties (boxPlotProperties)
        Bullet Chart Properties (bulletProperties)
        Funnel Chart Properties (funnelProperties)
        Gauge Chart Properties (gaugeProperties)
        Histogram Chart Properties (histogramProperties)
        Parabox Chart Properties (paraboxProperties)
        Pie Chart Properties (pieProperties)
        Polar Charts (polarProperties)
        Tagcloud Chart Properties (tagcloudProperties)
        3D Chart Properties (threedProperties)
        Treemap Chart Properties (treemapProperties)
        Waterfall Chart Properties (waterfallProperties)
      Special Topics
        Animation (introAnimation)
        Annotations
        Color Modes (colorMode)
        Defining a Color Scale (colorScale)
        Drawing Error Bars (errorBars)
        Generating HTML Tooltips (htmlToolTip)
        Defining User Interaction With the Chart (interaction)
        Formatting the Mouse Over Indicator (mouseOverIndicator)
        Drawing Reference Lines (referenceLines)
        Drawing Trendlines in Bubble and Scatter Charts (trendline)
      Lightweight Map Support
        Overview of Lightweight Map Support
        Introduction to Map Properties
        Incorporating Additional Chart Properties in a Map Chart
      WebFOCUS Chart Parameters
        Controlling Chart Type Using the JSON chartType Property
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Customizing Graphs Using SET Parameters
      Launch PDF
  Open Portal Services (OPS)
    WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Administration Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
        WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
        Benefits of Using WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
      Using WebFOCUS Portal Components
        WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Components Overview
        Using WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Components
      Installing WebFOCUS Web Parts for Microsoft SharePoint 2010 and 2013
        Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2010
        Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2013
      Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Adapter for ESRI
    WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems Getting Started
      Introducing the WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems
        Understanding Key Features and Benefits
        Functional Overview
        Architecture of a Geographic Business Intelligence Solution
      Requirements and Prerequisites
        Compatibility Matrix
        Hardware Requirements
        Software Requirements
        Prerequisites for WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex
      Building a Sample Application
        Sample Application Overview
        Defining WebFOCUS Reporting Procedures
        Defining Synthetic Map Services
        Defining Map Services
        Defining Symbols
        Understanding Replaceable Parameters
        Defining Custom JavaScript
        Launching the WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex
        Flushing Tables
      Tips and Usage Considerations
        Creating Rollovers
      Additional Resources
        Reference Documentation
        ESRI Resources
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems: ESRI ArcGIS Server and ArcGIS Flex API
      Introducing Geographic Information Systems
        Understanding Geographic Information Systems
        Defining the Geographic Business Intelligence Solution
        GBIS Components
        New Features
      WebFOCUS GIS Adapter Architecture
        XML-based Configuration Blocks
        Orientation Modes
        Current Limitations
      Prerequisites for WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex
        Overview
        Creating a Map Service
        Configuring the Crossdomain.xml File
      Using the ESRI Configuration Utility
        Introduction
        Understanding the Layout and User Interface
        Configuring FOCEXECs
        Configuring Synthetic Map Services
        Configuring Map Services
        Configuring Symbols
        Adding Bookmarks
        Customizing JavaScript Syntax
        Configuring Settings
        Flushing Tables
        Verifying the XML Definition File
        Current Limitations
      Using the WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex
        Overview
        WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex Components
        WebFOCUS Map Component
        WebFOCUS Report Component
        Synthetic Layer Component
        WebFOCUS Data View Component
        JavaScript Functions Available From Flexmapviewer.jsp
      Creating WebFOCUS GIS Procedures
        Incorporating the GIS Filter
        Creating a Report Procedure
        Creating an Identify Procedure
        Creating a Map Procedure
      Useful Techniques and Examples
        Creating Drill-Downs From a Report to a Map
        Drawing Multiple Map Layers
        Including Custom Libraries
        Embedding Custom JavaScript Functions in the ESRIINFO.XML File
        Directing Alternate Report Output to Different Windows
        Specifying Custom Colors in Your FOCEXEC
        Automatically Zooming On Selected Portions of the Map
        Automatically Zooming On Drawn Map Features
        Controlling the Visible Map Viewing Area
        Increasing the Maximum Number of Selectable Map Features
        Improving Map and Report Response Time
        Defining a Tiled Map Service
        Loading the Flex Map Viewer
        Using Symbols Defined in Your Configuration File
        Controlling Layers That are Visible
        Enabling a Buffer Using Selected Features From the Layer
        Creating Rollovers
        Passing Parameters From an HTML Layout
        Navigating to a Geoprocessing REST Endpoint
        Creating a Report or Map Binding Using a Geoprocessing Service
        Controlling the Visibility of Dynamic Map Layers
      XML Schema Reference
        Root Element <mapfexs>
        Class Definitions
        Constants
      Symbol Class Settings and Parameters
        SimpleLineSymbol
        SimplePolygonSymbol
        SimpleMarkerSymbol
        RasterMarkerSymbol
        TrueTypeMarkerSymbol
        CallOutMarkerSymbol
        TextMarkerSymbol
      HTML Color Values
        Color Value Table
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
  Magnify
    Magnify End User Manual
      Introducing Magnify
        About Magnify
        Accessing Magnify
      Conducting a Search With Magnify
        Searching With Magnify
        Navigating Magnify Search Results
        Viewing Magnify Data
        Viewing Content With Drill-Down Links
        Accessing Magnify on Mobile Devices
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Magnify Developer's Guide
      Getting Started With Magnify
        About Magnify
        Magnify Architecture
      Overview of Implementing Magnify
        Planning for Enterprise Search
        About the Magnify Feed Process
      Magnify: Building Indexes With WebFOCUS Reports
        Introducing Magnify Indexing
        Indexing the Course File
        Prerequisites for Indexing With the Movie and Car Files
        Indexing the Movie File
        Indexing the Car File
        Post-Indexing Verification
        Force Closing an Index During a Feed Process
      Indexing Using the FORMAT MAGNIFY Command
        FORMAT MAGNIFY
      Magnify Meta Tags
        HTML Format for All Access Types
        HTML Format Required for an External URL
        File Indexing Specific Meta Tag Information
        Sentiment Analysis Indexing
        HTML Format for a Standalone Report Procedure
        HTML Format for a Managed Reporting Procedure
        HTML Format for a Business Intelligence Portal Item
      Magnify Protocols
        Magnify Protocols for Indexing Documents
      Configuring the Adapter for Flat File to Search File Repositories
        Overview
        Creating a New Application Mapping to the File Repository Directory
        Defining a New Application Directory
        Defining a File Monitor Synonym
        Configuring the File Monitor Master File
        Transforming Documents Into Searchable Content
        Configuring a FORMAT MAGNIFY Procedure
      Supporting Information for iWay
        Overview
        About the Magnify Feed Process
        Magnify Search Feed Example
        Configuring an iWay Channel
        Creating the Indexing Process Flow
        Reconfiguring and Deploying the iWay Channel
      Magnify Error Handling
        Magnify Error Handling
        License for Indexing
      Launch PDF
    Magnify Security and Administration
      Getting Started With Magnify
        About Magnify
        Magnify Architecture
      Configuring the Search Engine
        Configuring the Search Engine
        Integrating With Third-Party Search Engines
      Configuring Magnify Collections
        What is a Collection?
        Defining Collections
        Searching Across Partitioned Collections
        Searching Across Multiple Machines
        Using Dynamic Partitioning to Scale Magnify Index Libraries
      Using the Security Features
        About Magnify Security
        Authorization to Magnify Components
        Enabling Security in Magnify With Lucene
        Enabling Collection-Level Security
        Using the WebFOCUS Domain Security Model With Magnify
      Magnify Diagnostics
        Installation Considerations
        Archiving Magnify Data
        Magnify Console
        Setting the Number of Slices and Color in a Chart
        Indexing Large Files
        Magnify Request Parameters
        Verifying Documents in the Lucene Index
        Retrieving Index Library Properties
        Retrieving Field Values From the Lucene Index
        Online Lucene Resources
      Customizing the Magnify User Interface
        Customization Overview
        Adding Date Information to Magnify Search Results
      Magnify Demo Search Application
        Introducing Magnify Search: The Century Electronics Example
        Century Electronics Sample Search Application
        Developer Studio and WebFOCUS Installation
        Configuring a Port Number
        Feeding Content to Magnify
        Additional Features
        Collection Security
        Multiple Categorizations
        Process Flow
        Deleting Extraneous Files
        Previous Versions
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Magnify Quick Start Guide
      Getting Started With Magnify
        Overview of Magnify
        Configuring the Century Electronics Demo Before Use
        Introducing Magnify Search: Century Electronics Demo
      Indexing With Format Magnify
        Prerequisites for Indexing With the Movie and Car Files
        Record Level Indexing: The Movie File
        Aggregated Indexing: The Car File
        Writing Magnify Feed Documents to Disk
      Organizing Magnify Collections
        Mapping Index Libraries to Collection Indexes
        Adding Indexes to the Collections Drop-down Menu
        Viewing the Results in Real Time
      Verifying Magnify Indexes
        Post-Indexing Verification
      General Tips for Using Magnify
        Creating a Customized Magnify Configuration
        Basic Styling Options
        Configuring Word Lists
        Deleting Records From the Index
        File Indexing
        Other Considerations for Magnify Implementation
      Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Accessibility
    Introducing Accessibility Features
      Understanding Software Accessibility in WebFOCUS
      WebFOCUS Accessibility Prerequisites
      Additional Resources
    Getting Started With Accessibility
      Navigating the Logon Screen and Welcome Page
      Navigating the Tree
      Using Right-Click Options
      Using the Search Function
      Using the Upload Function
      Creating Content
      Using Different Types of Content
      Using the Text Editor
      Adding to Favorites
    Using Accessibility Features in Business Intelligence (BI) Portal
      Running a Portal
      Adding New Pages
      Deleting Pages
      Renaming Pages
      Renaming Files or Folders
      Navigating HTML Output
    Using Accessibility Features in InfoAssist
      Opening InfoAssist
      Navigating a Master File List
      Navigating Data, Filter, and Query Panes
      Navigating Menus and the Ribbon
      Creating a PDF Report
      Supported Outputs
      Using InfoMini in InfoAssist
      Using Slicers
    Using Accessibility Features in ReportCaster
      Scheduling Reports
      Distributing Reports
      Creating Notifications
      Viewing Logs
      Configuring Tasks
      Navigating ReportCaster Explorer
    Launch PDF
  Using WebFOCUS RStat for Predictive Analytics
    Introducing WebFOCUS RStat
      Highlights of WebFOCUS RStat
      Data Mining With WebFOCUS RStat
      RStat Architecture
    Installing RStat
      Installation Prerequisites
      RStat Installation
    Getting Started With RStat
      Starting RStat With Data Loaded
      Starting RStat Without Data Loaded in App Studio
      Starting RStat Without Data Loaded in Developer Studio
      Loading Data From Within RStat
      RScripts in RStat
    Data Exploration and Transformations in the WebFOCUS RStat Tool
      Variable Definitions and Sampling
      Data Exploration
      Hypothesis Testing
      Data Transformation
      Clustering
    Creating a Scoring Application
      Defining the Model Data
      Building a Model
      Evaluating the Model
      Exporting the Final Model to Build the Scoring Application
      Compiling and Deploying the Scoring Routine
      Displaying Model Information With the RStat Query Command
      Building a Scoring Application Using a Scoring Routine
      Missing Data in Scoring Routines
    Creating Statistically Valid Data Samples
      Sampling Functionality
      Basic Sampling Concepts and Terminology
      Sampling Steps
    Building a Linear Regression Model
      Explanation of the Regression Model
    Building a Logistic Model
      Explanation of Logistic Regression
    Building a Survival Model
      Explanation of Survival Analysis
    Building a Decision Tree Model
      Explanation of the Decision Tree Model
    Building a Market Basket Model
      Explanation of the Market Basket Model
    Deploying RStat Scoring Routines on WebFOCUS Reporting Servers
      Deploying RStat Scoring Routines Prior to Version 7.6.8
    Glossary
    Launch PDF
  Online Analytical Processing (OLAP)
    Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
      We Do It Every Day: A Typical Web Query
      OLAP Reporting Requirements
      Characteristics of an OLAP Report
      Three Ways of Working With OLAP Data
      Drilling Down On Dimensions and Measures
      Sorting Data
      Performing a Calculation on a Measure
      Limiting Data
      Visualizing Trends
      Displaying Graphs and Reports
      Controlling the Display of Measures in a Report
      Adding and Removing Dimensions
      Saving OLAP Reports
      Saving and Displaying OLAP Reports and Graphs in Other Formats
      Troubleshooting OLAP Reports
    Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Migration
    Migration Guide
      Migrating Content
        Export and Import Encoding
        Migration Functionality and User Default Roles (UDR)
        Domain and Managed Reporting Item Properties
        Migrating WebFOCUS Content
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS RESTful Web Services
    Introducing WebFOCUS RESTful Web Services
      What Is REST?
      What are RESTful Web Services?
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting RESTful Web Service Requests
      Authenticating WebFOCUS Sign-On Requests
      Cross-Site Request Forgery (CSRF)
      Configuring Single Sign On
      Signing Out of WebFOCUS
      WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
    WebFOCUS Reporting Server RESTful Web Service Requests
      Listing WebFOCUS Reporting Server Nodes
      Creating an Application
      Listing Applications
      Listing Files Within an Application
      Listing the Parameters for a Report Within an Application
      Running a Report Within an Application
      Deleting a File Within an Application
      Deleting an Application
      Change Management Export
      Change Management Import
    WebFOCUS Security Administration RESTful Web Service Requests
      Listing Users
      Listing Groups
      Listing Privileges
      Listing Roles
      Listing Users Within a Group
      Adding and Updating a User
      Deleting a User
      Adding and Updating a Group
      Deleting a Group
      Adding a User to a Group
      Removing a User From a Group
      Adding a Role
      Deleting a Role
      Adding a Rule
      Deleting a Rule
      Listing Rules for a Subject
      Listing Rules for a Resource
      Listing Rules for a Role
      Expanding a Policy String
      Creating a Policy String
      Running a Template
      Changing a Password for a User
    ReportCaster RESTful Web Service Requests
      Retrieving Reports From the ReportCaster Library
      Creating and Updating an Address Book
      Creating and Updating a Library Access List
      Deleting a Library Access List
      Creating and Updating a Schedule
      Running a Schedule
      Retrieving a Schedule
      Deleting a Schedule
      Deleting an Address Book
      Log Functionality
      Console Functionality
    Using the RESTful Web Services Test Page
      Accessing the Test Page
      Using the Test Page
    Alternative Method of Calling WebFOCUS RESTful Web Service Requests
      Calling WebFOCUS RESTful Web Service Requests
    Visual Basic .NET, Java, HTML and jQuery Code Examples
      Signing In to WebFOCUS
      Listing Folders From WebFOCUS
      Running a WebFOCUS Report
      Handling Drill-downs, Active Cache, and On-Demand Paging Reports
      Parsing the XML Response of a SignOn Request to Obtain the CSRF Name and Value
    Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Social Media Integration
    Introducing WebFOCUS Social Media Integration
      Integrating With Social Media
      WebFOCUS Social Media Integration at a Glance
      Understanding the Architecture of WebFOCUS Social Media Integration
    Facebook Adapter
      Overview
      Creating a Facebook Application
      Configuring the Facebook Adapter
      Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Facebook Adapter
      Examples
    Twitter Adapter
      Overview
      Creating a Twitter Application
      Configuring the Twitter Adapter
      Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Twitter Adapter
      Examples
    LinkedIn Adapter
      Overview
      Creating a LinkedIn Application
      Configuring the LinkedIn Adapter
      Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the LinkedIn Adapter
      Examples
    Using the Adapter for Google Analytics
      Overview
      Creating a Google Project
      Obtaining the Web Profile ID
      Configuring the Google Analytics Adapter
      Creating Metadata for the Google Analytics Adapter
    Words Analysis Adapter
      Overview
      Configuring the Words Analysis Adapter
      Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Words Analysis Adapter
      Examples
    WAND Sentiment Analysis Adapter
      Overview
      Installing, Configuring, and Updating the WAND Taxonomy Server
      Installing and Using the WAND Taxonomy Editor
      Configuring the WAND Sentiment Analysis Adapter
      Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the WAND Sentiment Analysis Adapter
      Examples
    Alchemy Sentiment Analysis Adapter
      Overview
      Configuring the Alchemy Sentiment Analysis Adapter
      Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Alchemy Adapter
      Examples
    Glossary of Related Terms
    Launch PDF
  Performance Management
    Performance Management Framework 8.2
      Performance Management Framework Overview
        Introduction to PMF
        Working With PMF
        WebFOCUS Components Used by PMF
        Finding It: Authors
        Finding It: Administrators
        Shared Roles for Authors and Administrators
        Finding It: Analysts
        Finding It: Consumers
        Finding It: Developers
        Finding It: Installers
        Milestones in the Performance Management Process
      Performance Management Framework User
        PMF Overview
        Working With PMF Views
        Today Page
        Working With Scorecards, Filters, and Content
        Strategy Map
        Previous vs. Current and Prior vs. Current
        Rolling 5 Periods
        Executive Booklet
        Correlation
        Scorecard Views
        Objective Views
        Understanding Compound Objectives and Consequences
        Understanding Risks
        Predictive Analysis Views
        Measure Views
        Project Views
        Process Views
        Performance Views
        Properties Views
        Using the Analysis Designer
        Feedback Blogging
        Scheduling Reports and Views
        Managing Project Tasks
        Managing Alerts
        Working With Measure Tasks
        Inputting User-Entered Sources
        Working with Dashboards
      Performance Management Framework Author
        Implementing PMF
        PMF Prerequisites
        Getting Started as a PMF Author
        Authoring in PMF
        Navigating PMF: Adding, Changing, and Deleting Items
        Scorecarding
        Navigating the Author Page
        Creating a New Scorecard
        Creating Strategy and Risk Objects
        Drawing a Strategy Map
        Adding Themes to a Strategy Map
        Linking Projects and Processes to Objectives in the Strategy Map
        Understanding Measures
        Indicator Concepts
        Weighting Measures Across Objectives
        Weighting Objectives Across a Strategy
        Automatic Equal Weighting
        Setting a Basis for Descending Measures
        Overriding Measures at the Measure Level
        Working with Projects
        Documenting Your Work
        Scorecard-Specific Data Access Security
        Author Scorecard Options
      Performance Management Framework Administrator
        Getting Started as a PMF Administrator
        Managing Metadata
        Thinking About Users and Security
        Adding, Changing, Deleting, and Importing Users (Owners)
        Understanding Functional and Access Roles
        Working With Scorecard Security
        Working With the New Data Model
        What Are Sources?
        What Are Datapoints?
        Scheduling Loads and Updates
        Setting Measure Access for Users (Owners)
        Specifying Dimensions and Measures
        Creating Units of Measure Conversion Profiles
        Planning Considerations for Loading Dimensions
        Working With a Dimension Load
        Setting Up a Distinct Count Dimension
        Inputting User-Entered Dimensions
        Editing Existing Loaded Dimension Values
        Planning Considerations For Loading Sources
        Working With Measures
        Specifying Alternate Targets
        Excluding a Measure Series From Access Security
        Previewing Loadable Sources and Load Measure Data
        Managing Content
        Working with Snapshots
        Administration Views
        Designing Gadgets
        Designing a Dashboard
        Manage Page - Quick Reference
        Viewing and Editing Default Settings
      Tips for Administrators and Authors
        Administrators: Hiding Content From Users
        Administrators: Automated Upgrades
        Administrators: Styling the Look and Feel of PMF
        Authors: Creating a Scorecard
        Troubleshooting Measure Data Issues
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
        Designing a PMF Quick Reporting Mart
      Catalog of Available Gadgets
        Gadget Catalog
      Launch PDF
    Performance Management Framework Installation and Configuration Guide 8.2
      Understanding PMF Installations
        Introducing PMF
        Locating Where PMF Components are Installed or Configured
        Understanding Security and PMF
        Understanding Single-Tier and Multi-Tier Installations
        Interoperation With WebFOCUS
        Understanding Multi-Tenancy
        PMF Language Display
      Planning Your PMF Installation
        Installation Requirements
        Considerations for Installing PMF
        Configuration Considerations for Multi-Tenancy
      Performing a New PMF Installation
        Installing PMF in WebFOCUS 8
        Setting Up Your Data Mart Connection
        Setting Up the PMF Data Mart in Your RDBMS
        Installing PMF for Multi-Tenancy
        Changing Language Display
        Using the Unattended Install
        MR External Security (Realm Security: Setting Up a Bootstrap User)
        Configuring PMF to Communicate With ReportCaster
      Upgrading a PMF Installation
        Upgrade the Application
        Upgrading PMF Data
      Confirming a PMF Installation or Upgrade
        Verifying an Installation or Upgrade
        Working with Snapshots
      Maintaining a PMF Installation
        Installing Hotfixes
        Upgrading WebFOCUS Server and Client on an Active PMF Environment
        Synchronizing IBFS Security Users With PMF
        Manually Creating Users
        PMF Font Format Issue
        Optimizing PMF Performance
        Accessibility Capabilities
      Reference
        Estimating PMF Database Size
        Pointing PMF to a Different Data Mart
      Troubleshooting Common Issues
        Common PMF Errors
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Getting SLP to Work With Your WebFOCUS Installation
        Using SLP With PMF
        Using SLP For Any IBFS Folder
      Launch PDF
    Performance Management Framework 8.1
      Performance Management Framework Overview
        Introduction to PMF
        Working With PMF
        WebFOCUS Components Used by PMF
        Finding It: Authors
        Finding It: Administrators
        Shared Roles for Authors and Administrators
        Finding It: Analysts
        Finding It: Consumers
        Finding It: Developers
        Finding It: Installers
        Milestones in the Performance Management Process
      Performance Management Framework User
        PMF Overview
        Working With PMF Views
        Today Page
        Working With Scorecards, Filters, and Content
        Strategy Map
        Previous vs. Current and Prior vs. Current
        Rolling 5 Periods
        Executive Booklet
        Correlation
        Scorecard Views
        Objective Views
        Understanding Compound Objectives and Consequences
        Understanding Risks
        Predictive Analysis Views
        Measure Views
        Project Views
        Process Views
        Performance Views
        Properties Views
        Using the Analysis Designer
        Feedback Blogging
        Scheduling Reports and Views
        Managing Project Tasks
        Managing Alerts
        Working With Measure Tasks
        Inputting User-Entered Measures
        Inputting User-Entered Sources
        Working with Dashboards
      Performance Management Framework Author
        Implementing PMF
        PMF Prerequisites
        Getting Started as a PMF Author
        Authoring in PMF
        Navigating PMF: Adding, Changing, and Deleting Items
        Scorecarding
        Navigating the Author Page
        Creating a New Scorecard
        Creating Strategy and Risk Objects
        Drawing a Strategy Map
        Adding Themes to a Strategy Map
        Linking Projects and Processes to Objectives in the Strategy Map
        Understanding Measures
        Indicator Concepts
        Weighting Measures Across Objectives
        Weighting Objectives Across a Strategy
        Automatic Equal Weighting
        Setting a Basis for Descending Measures
        Overriding Measures at the Measure Level
        Working with Projects
        Documenting Your Work
        Scorecard-Specific Data Access Security
        Author Scorecard Options
      Performance Management Framework Administrator
        Getting Started as a PMF Administrator
        Managing Metadata
        Thinking About Users and Security
        Adding, Changing, Deleting, and Importing Users (Owners)
        Understanding Functional and Access Roles
        Working With Scorecard Security
        Working With the New Data Model
        What Are Sources?
        What Are Datapoints?
        Scheduling Loads and Updates
        Setting Measure Access for Users (Owners)
        Specifying Dimensions and Measures
        Creating Units of Measure Conversion Profiles
        Planning Considerations for Loading Dimensions
        Working With a Dimension Load
        Setting Up a Distinct Count Dimension
        Inputting User-Entered Dimensions
        Editing Existing Loaded Dimension Values
        Planning Considerations For Loading Sources
        Working With Measures
        Where to Attach Your Measures
        Specifying Alternate Targets
        Excluding a Measure Series From Access Security
        Previewing Loadable Sources and Load Measure Data
        Managing Content
        Working with Snapshots
        Administration Views
        Designing Gadgets
        Designing a Dashboard
        Manage Page - Quick Reference
        Viewing and Editing Default Settings
      Tips for Administrators and Authors
        Administrators: Dashboard Design Tips
        Administrators: Hiding Content From Users
        Administrators: Automated Upgrades
        Administrators: Styling the Look and Feel of PMF
        Styling the Simple Lightweight Page (SLP) Manager
        Authors: Creating a Scorecard
        Troubleshooting Measure Data Issues
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
        Designing a PMF Quick Reporting Mart
      Catalog of Available Gadgets
        Gadget Catalog
      Working With Legacy Measures
      Launch PDF
    Performance Management Framework 8
      Performance Management Framework Overview
        Introduction to PMF
        Working With PMF
        WebFOCUS Components Used by PMF
        Finding It: Authors
        Finding It: Administrators
        Shared Roles for Authors and Administrators
        Finding It: Analysts
        Finding It: Consumers
        Finding It: Developers
        Finding It: Installers
        Milestones in the Performance Management Process
      Performance Management Framework User
        PMF Overview
        Accessing Views
        Working With PMF Views
        Working With the Analytics Tab
        Strategy Map
        Previous vs. Current and Prior vs. Current
        Rolling 5 Periods
        Executive Booklet
        Correlation
        Scorecard Views
        Objective Views
        Understanding Compound Objectives and Consequences
        Understanding Risks
        Predictive Analysis Views
        Measure Views
        Project Views
        Process Views
        Performance Views
        Properties Views
        Using the Analysis Designer
        Today Tab
        Feedback Blogging
        Scheduling Reports and Views
        Managing Project Tasks
        Managing Alerts
        Working With Measure Tasks
        Inputting User-Entered Measures
        Inputting User-Entered Sources
        Working with Dashboards
        Using PMF Content on your Mobile Device
      Performance Management Framework Author
        Implementing PMF
        PMF Prerequisites
        Getting Started as a PMF Author
        Authoring in PMF
        Navigating PMF: Adding, Changing, and Deleting Items
        Scorecarding
        Navigating the Author Tab
        Creating a New Scorecard
        Creating Strategy and Risk Objects
        Drawing a Strategy Map
        Adding Themes to a Strategy Map
        Linking Projects and Processes to Objectives in the Strategy Map
        Understanding Measures
        Indicator Concepts
        Weighting Measures Across Objectives
        Weighting Objectives Across a Strategy
        Automatic Equal Weighting
        Setting a Basis for Descending Measures
        Overriding Measures at the Measure Level
        Documenting Your Work
        Scorecard-Specific Data Access Security
        Author Scorecard Options
        PMF Tabs - Quick Reference for Authors
      Performance Management Framework Administrator
        Getting Started as a PMF Administrator
        Managing Metadata
        Thinking About Users and Security
        Adding, Changing, Deleting, and Importing Users (Owners)
        Understanding Functional and Access Roles
        Working With Scorecard Security
        Working With the New Data Model
        What Are Sources?
        What Are Datapoints?
        Scheduling Loads and Updates
        Setting Measure Access for Users (Owners)
        Specifying Dimensions and Measures
        Creating Units of Measure Conversion Profiles
        Planning Considerations for Loading Dimensions
        Working With a Dimension Load
        Setting Up a Distinct Count Dimension
        Inputting User-Entered Dimensions
        Editing Existing Loaded Dimension Values
        Planning Considerations For Loading Sources
        Working With Measures
        Where to Attach Your Measures
        Loading Legacy Measures
        Excluding a Measure Series From Access Security
        Interpreting the Measure Loader Report
        Scheduling Measure Loads
        Previewing Loadable Sources and Load Measure Data
        Managing Content
        Working with Snapshots
        Administration Views
        Designing Gadgets
        Designing a Dashboard
        Manage Tab - Quick Reference
        Viewing and Editing Default Settings
      Tips for Administrators and Authors
        Displaying Static Tabs With Dynamic Dashboards
        Administrators: Dashboard Design Tips
        Administrators: Hiding Content From Users
        Administrators: Automated Upgrades
        Administrators: Styling the Look and Feel of PMF
        Authors: Creating a Scorecard
        Troubleshooting Measure Data Issues
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Catalog of Available Gadgets
        Gadget Catalog
      Launch PDF
    Performance Management Framework Installation and Configuration 8.1
      Understanding PMF Installations
        Introducing PMF
        Locating Where PMF Components are Installed or Configured
        Understanding Security and PMF
        Understanding Single-Tier and Multi-Tier Installations
        Interoperation With WebFOCUS
        Understanding Multi-Tenancy
        PMF Language Display
      Planning Your PMF Installation
        Installation Requirements
        Considerations for Installing PMF
        Configuration Considerations for Multi-Tenancy
      Performing a New PMF Installation
        Installing PMF in WebFOCUS 8
        Setting Up Your Data Mart Connection
        Setting Up the PMF Data Mart in Your RDBMS
        Installing PMF for Multi-Tenancy
        Changing Language Display
        MR External Security (Realm Security: Setting Up a Bootstrap User)
        Configuring PMF to Communicate With ReportCaster
      Upgrading a PMF Installation
        Upgrade the Application
        Upgrading PMF Data
      Confirming a PMF Installation or Upgrade
        Verifying an Installation or Upgrade
        Working with Snapshots
      Maintaining a PMF Installation
        Installing Hotfixes
        Upgrading WebFOCUS Server and Client on an Active PMF Environment
        Synchronizing IBFS Security Users With PMF
        Manually Creating Users
        PMF Font Format Issue
        Optimizing PMF Performance
        Accessibility Capabilities
      Reference
        Estimating PMF Database Size
        Pointing PMF to a Different Data Mart
      Troubleshooting Common Issues
        Common PMF Errors
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Getting SLP to Work With Your WebFOCUS Installation
      Launch PDF
    Performance Management Framework Installation and Configuration 8
      Understanding PMF Installations
        Introducing PMF
        Locating Where PMF Components are Installed or Configured
        Understanding Security and PMF
        Understanding Single-Tier and Multi-Tier Installations
        Interoperation With WebFOCUS
        Understanding Multi-Tenancy
        PMF Language Display
      Planning Your PMF Installation
        Installation Requirements
        Considerations for Installing PMF
        Configuration Considerations for Multi-Tenancy
      Performing a New PMF Installation
        Installing PMF in WebFOCUS 7
        Installing PMF in WebFOCUS 8
        Setting Up Your Data Mart Connection
        Setting Up the PMF Data Mart in Your RDBMS
        Installing PMF for Multi-Tenancy
        Changing Language Display
        MR External Security (Realm Security: Setting Up a Bootstrap User)
        Configuring PMF to Communicate With ReportCaster
      Upgrading a PMF Installation
        Upgrade the Application
        Upgrading PMF Data
      Confirming a PMF Installation or Upgrade
        Verifying an Installation or Upgrade
        Working with Snapshots
        Manually Creating a BID Portal View for PMF
      Maintaining a PMF Installation
        Installing Hotfixes
        Upgrading WebFOCUS Server and Client on an Active PMF Environment
        Synchronizing Manage Reporting Users With PMF
        Manually Creating Users
        PMF Font Format Issue
        Optimizing PMF Performance
        Accessibility Capabilities
      Reference
        Estimating PMF Database Size
        Pointing PMF to a Different Data Mart
      Troubleshooting Common Issues
        Common PMF Errors
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Launch PDF
  Visual Discovery
    Using WebFOCUS Visual Discovery to Develop Analytic Dashboards
      Introducing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Key Features
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components
      Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components
        Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Development Components
        VZ Web Server (Thick Client) Deployment
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery VZ Web Server (Thick Client)
      Developing an Analytic Dashboard
        Creating Visual Discovery Output Files
        Developing an Analytic Dashboard From Developer Studio
        Working With Visual Discovery Controls on the Web
        Accessing Visual Discovery Online Help
      Tutorial: Building a Visual Discovery Analytic Dashboard with Advanced Chart Controls
        Before You Begin
        Building an Analytic Dashboard With Visual Discovery Components
        Building an Application With Advanced Chart Controls
      Deploying Visual Discovery Applications
        Deploying WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Applications for VZ Web Server (Thick Client)
      Visualization Components: Descriptions and Usage
        What Is a Glyph?
        Bar Charts
        Line Charts
        Pie Charts
        Histograms
        Counts
        Data Constellations
        Data Constellation Maps
        Data Sheets
        Multiscapes
        Paraboxes
        Scatter Plots
        Summary Sheets
        Time Tables
        Perspectives
      Using the Visual Discovery JavaScript API
        About JavaScript API
        Customizing Visual Discovery Applications With JavaScript
        Using the VzScript Library
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition (AE)
    WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition Dashboard User's Guide
      Using Visual Discovery Analyst Edition Dashboards
        Overview
        Selecting Data
        Excluding Data
        Filtering Data
        Using Color
        Returning to a Previous Data State
        Sharing Results
        Using Navigation Panes
        Using Chart Tools
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition Getting Started Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition
        Overview
        Prerequisites
      Creating and Distributing Data
        Creating Data for Visual Discovery AE
        Distributing Data for Visual Discovery AE
      Designing Projects
        Overview
        Designing a Project Using WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE
        Available Menus and Toolbars
        Available Charts
      Publishing Projects
        Publishing Visual Discovery AE Projects to a Larger (Web-Based) Audience
        Presenting Published Visual Discovery AE Projects in WebFOCUS
        Using Parameterized Data Paths to Load Different Data Sets in a Published Project
      Quick Start Guide Using WebFOCUS Procedure Data
        Step 1. Creating Data Using WebFOCUS InfoAssist
        Step 2. Designing a Project in WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE
        Step 3. Publishing a Project to the WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server AE
        Step 4. Presenting a Project as a WebFOCUS Business Intelligence Portal Item
      Lab using the MutualFunds example
        Building Visual Analytics Projects
        Visually Analyzing Data Using the Web
      Configuring ReportCaster to Distribute and Schedule WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition Reports
        Configuring ReportCaster Settings
      Maintenance and Troubleshooting
        Managing Project Definition Changes
        Excluding Data Sources
        Flight Recorder Bookmarks
        Troubleshooting
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition Implementation Guide
      Understanding Key Concepts
        Introducing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition
        Defining the Architecture Model
        Defining the Deployment Model
        Visual Discovery Server AE Access
        Localized Data Configuration
        Upgrading WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition
      Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition Components
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench Analyst Edition
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server Analyst Edition
        Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) on a Windows 2012 R2 Server
        Visual Discovery Server AE Token Requirement
        Setting the Token Key
        Assigning Privileges
        Validating Your Installations
        Scalability Considerations
        Supported Databases
      Configuring WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition
        Scheduling Data Updates
        Configuring Secure Access for WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server AE
        Controlling Access to Projects
        Publishing Projects
        Registering Libraries for the Adv2Advm Utility
        Visual Discovery AE URL Redirection Validation
        Configuring Credential-Based Filters
        Restricting Publishing Permissions
        Preparing Localized Data
      Maintenance and Troubleshooting
        Managing Project Definition Changes
        Excluding Data Sources
        Flight Recorder Bookmarks
        Troubleshooting
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench Analyst Edition (AE) User's Guide
      Introduction to WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE
        Welcome to WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE
        What Should I Do Next?
      Overview of WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE
        Overview of WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE
        What Is Next?
      What Is New
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE 6.1 Release Notes
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE 5.9 Release Notes
      Getting Started
        Getting Started
      Charts and Visual Discovery AE
        Getting Started with Charts
      Charts, Pages, Dashboards
        Charts, Pages, Dashboards
      Deployment and the WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server AE
        Deployment and the WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server AE
      Toolbars
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE Toolbars
      Main Menu
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE Main Menu
      Using Views
        Using Views
      How Do I...
        Step 4: Analyze Data
        Change Chart Fonts
        Configure WebFOCUS Visual Discovery
        Configure Data Hierarchies
        Configure Mouse Gestures
        Copy Charts
        Create Navigation Pane Content
        Data Pool Visualization
        Delete a Link
        Design Pages
        Explore Data Usage
        Export Data
        Export Tables
        Export Pages
        Fix Graphics Problems
        Link Unmatched Rows
        Load Data
        Load Data Using the Data Wizard
        Manage Data Sources
        Open an Existing Project
        Publish a Dashboard
        Rearrange Charts
        Restore a Backup Project Version
        Save a Project
        Select or Exit Full Screen Mode
        Select and Exclude Data
        Set Coloring
        Share Results
        Use the Link Wizard and Modify Links Dialogs
        Use Color By
        Use Color Scale
        Use Color Models
        Use the Date Parser
        Use the Expression Builder
      Tips and Tricks
        Tips and Tricks
      Salesforce
        Salesforce Login Help
      If You Need Additional Help
        If You Need Additional Help
      Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Reporting Server
    Server Release Notes
      Disabling the CSRF Token When Connecting From a Release 8.0.x Client
      General Information
      Adapter for ESSBASE
      Adapter for Netezza
      Adapter for MQSeries
      Adapter for Red Brick
      Adapter for JBoss
      Adapter for Oracle
      Adapter for Informix
      Adapter for DB2 on IBM i
      Adapter for JDBC
      Adapter for PeopleSoft
      Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS)
      Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MSOLAP)
      JVM Requirements for Java Services
      Connector for OLE DB
      Resource Analyzer
      Run With Options Changed to Submit With E-Mail
      Running or Sharing 7.7.x and 7.6.x on the Same Machine
      New CMRUN Executable
      Platform Support
      Active Technologies
      Reporting Language
      Server Security
      Launch PDF
    Adapter Administration
      Introduction to Adapters
        Processing Requests
        Functions of an Adapter
        Data Management
        Metadata Services With SQLENGINE SET
        Additional Master File Attributes
      Using the Adapter for 1010data
        Configuring the Adapter for 1010data
        Managing 1010data Metadata
        Customizing the 1010data Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Adabas
        Preparing the Adabas Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Adabas
        Adabas Overview
        Managing Adabas Metadata
        Overview of Master and Access Files
        Master Files for Adabas
        Access Files for Adabas
        Mapping Adabas Descriptors
        Mapping Adabas Files With Variable-Length Records and Repeating Fields
        Using the GROUP Attribute to Cross-Reference Files
        Platform-Specific Functionality
        Customizing the Adabas Environment
        Adabas Reporting Considerations
        Adabas Writing Considerations
        Adapter Navigation
        Entry Segment Retrieval of Adabas Records
        Descendant Periodic Groups and Multi-Value Fields
        Descendant Adabas Records
      Using the Adapter for Adabas Stored Procedures
        Preparing the Adabas Stored Procedures Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Adabas Stored Procedures
        Managing Adabas Stored Procedure Metadata
        Invoking an Adabas Stored Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Alchemy Sentiment Analysis
        Overview
        Configuring the Alchemy Sentiment Analysis Adapter
        Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Alchemy Adapter
        Examples
      Using the Adapter for Axiom EPM
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Axiom EPM
        Managing Axiom EPM Metadata
        Managing Connections to Axiom EPM
        Using Administrative Utilities
      Using the Adapter for C9 INC
        Preparing the C9 INC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for C9 INC
        Managing C9 INC Metadata
        Customizing the C9 INC Environment
      Using the Adapter for Caché
        Preparing the Caché Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Caché
        Managing Caché Metadata
        Customizing the Caché Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for CICS Transactions
        Preparing the CICS Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        CICS and VTAM Configuration
        Configuring the Adapter for CICS Transactions
        Managing CICS Transaction Metadata
        Invoking a CICS Transaction
        Running a TPG/SPG/AAS Transaction
      Using the Adapters for C-ISAM and ISAM
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter
        Managing C-ISAM Metadata
        Maintaining C-ISAM Data Sources Using SQL Commands
        Using a Secondary Index in C-ISAM and ISAM Files
      Using the Adapter for DATACOM
        Preparing the DATACOM Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DATACOM
        DATACOM Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing DATACOM Metadata
        Master Files for DATACOM
        Access Files for DATACOM
        Describing Multi-File Structures for DATACOM
        Data Retrieval Logic for DATACOM
      Using the Adapter for DB2
        Preparing the DB2 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DB2
        Managing DB2 Metadata
        Reporting Against a DB2 Stored Procedure
        Customizing the DB2 Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Using DB2 Cube Views
        Calling a DB2 Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for DB Heritage Files
        Preparing the DB Heritage Files Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DB Heritage Files
        Managing DB Heritage Files Metadata
        Standard Master File Attributes for a DB Heritage Files Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a DB Heritage Files Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply-Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Multi-Format Logical Files
        DB Heritage Files Record Selection Efficiencies
      Using the Adapter for Essbase
        Preparing the Essbase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Essbase
        Managing Essbase Metadata
        Customizing the Essbase Environment
        Essbase Reporting With WebFOCUS
      Using the Adapter for Excel
        Configuring the Adapter for Excel
        Managing Excel Metadata
        Customizing the Excel Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Excel (via Direct Retrieval)
        Configuring the Adapter for Excel (via Direct Retrieval)
        Managing Metadata for Excel (via Direct Retrieval)
        Changing Adapter Settings
      Using the Adapter for Facebook
        Overview
        Creating a Facebook Application
        Configuring the Facebook Adapter
        Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Facebook Adapter
        Examples
      Using the Adapters for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapters for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
        Managing Metadata for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
      Using the Adapter for Google Analytics
        Overview
        Creating a Google Project
        Obtaining the Web Profile ID
        Configuring the Google Analytics Adapter
        Creating Metadata for the Google Analytics Adapter
      Using the Adapter for Greenplum
        Configuring the Adapter for Greenplum
        Managing Greenplum Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Hadoop with Apache Hive and Cloudera Impala
        Introducing the Adapter for Apache Hive and Cloudera Impala
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Hadoop/Hive/Impala
        Creating Synonyms
        Using Direct Pass-through
        Loading Data Using DataMigrator
      Using the Adapter for HP Vertica
        Preparing the HP Vertica Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for HP Vertica
        Managing HP Vertica Metadata
        Customizing the HP Vertica Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Hyperstage
        Preparing the Hyperstage Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Hyperstage
        Managing Hyperstage Metadata
        Customizing the Adapter for the Hyperstage Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for i Access
        Preparing the i Access Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for i Access
        Managing i Access Metadata
        Customizing the i Access Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for CA-IDMS/DB
        Preparing the IDMS/DB Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IDMS/DB
        IDMS/DB Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing IDMS/DB Metadata
        Master Files for IDMS/DB
        Access Files for IDMS/DB
        IDMS/DB Sample File Descriptions
        File Retrieval
        Record Retrieval
        Customizing the IDMS/DB Environment
        Tracing the Adapter for IDMS/DB
      Using the Adapter for CA-IDMS/SQL
        Preparing the IDMS/SQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IDMS/SQL
        Managing IDMS/SQL Metadata
        Customizing the IDMS/SQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for IMS
        IMS Environments: Overview
        Preparing the IMS Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IMS
        Managing IMS Metadata
        Master File Attributes
        Access File Attributes (DBCTL)
        Migrating From an Existing MVS Server (DBCTL)
        WebFOCUS Reporting With IMS
        Maintaining IMS Data Sources (DBCTL)
      Using the Adapter for IMS Transactions
        Preparing the IMS Transactions Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        Configuring the Adapter for IMS Transactions
        Managing IMS Transactions Metadata
        Invoking an IMS Transaction
        Invoking an IMS Stored Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Informix
        Preparing the Informix Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Informix
        Managing Informix Metadata
        Customizing the Informix Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling an Informix Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Ingres
        Preparing the Ingres Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Ingres
        Managing Ingres Metadata
        Customizing the Ingres Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Interplex
        Preparing the Interplex Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Interplex
        Managing Interplex Metadata
        Customizing the Interplex Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for iWay Adapter Framework (IWAF)
        Preparing the IWAF Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IWAF
        Creating Synonyms
      Using the Adapter for JBoss Application Server
        Preparing the JBoss Application Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for JBoss Application Server
        Managing JBoss Application Server Metadata
        Customizing the JBoss Application Server Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for JDBC
        Preparing the JDBC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for JDBC
        Managing JDBC Metadata
        Customizing the JDBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Preparing the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Environment
        Overview of the Setup Process
        Configuring the Adapter for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Creating Synonyms for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Refreshing the Metadata Repository
        Refresh Security Extracts
        Converting Synonyms for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne (Non IBM i Platforms Only)
        Setting the UDCDIC Environment Variable (Windows only)
      Using the Adapter for JD Edwards World
        Installation Prerequisites
        Configuring the Adapter for JD Edwards World
        Managing JD Edwards World Metadata
        Enabling JD Edwards World Security
        Enabling Tracing
        Frequently Asked Questions
      Using the Adapter for JSON
        Preparing the JSON Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for JSON
        Managing JSON Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Lawson
        Adapter for Lawson: Overview
        Configuring the Adapter for Lawson
        Preparing the Lawson Environment
        Managing Lawson Metadata
        Updating Lawson Security Information
      Using the Adapter for LinkedIn
        Overview
        Creating a LinkedIn Application
        Configuring the LinkedIn Adapter
        Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the LinkedIn Adapter
        Examples
      Using the Adapter for Lotus Notes
        Preparing the Lotus Notes Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Lotus Notes
        Managing Lotus Notes Metadata
      Using the Adapter for LDAP
        Preparing the LDAP Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for LDAP
        Managing LDAP Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft Access
        Preparing the Microsoft Access Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft Access
        Managing Microsoft Access Metadata
        Customizing the Microsoft Access Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server
        Preparing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server
        Managing Microsoft SQL Server Metadata
        Reporting Against a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
        Microsoft SQL Server Compatibility With ODBC
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server ODBC
        Preparing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server ODBC
        Managing Microsoft SQL Server ODBC Metadata
        Reporting Against a Microsoft SQL Server ODBC Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Microsoft SQL Server ODBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Millennium
        Preparing the Server Environment for Millennium
        Configuring the Adapter for Millennium
        Preparing the Millennium Environment
        Managing Millennium Metadata
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Millennium Data Source
      Using the Adapter for Model 204
        Preparing the Model 204 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Model 204
        Model 204 Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing Model 204 Metadata
        Master Files for Model 204
        Access Files for Model 204
        Customizing the Model 204 Environment
        Using Customized Security Exits
        Adapter Tracing for Model 204
      Using the Adapter for MongoDB
        Introducing the Adapter for MongoDB
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MongoDB
        Creating Synonyms
        Limitations
      Using the Adapter for MySQL
        Preparing the MySQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MySQL
        Managing MySQL Metadata
        Customizing the Adapter for the MySQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for NATURAL
        Preparing the NATURAL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for NATURAL
        Managing Metadata for NATURAL
        Invoking a NATURAL Program
      Using the Adapter for NATURAL CICS Transactions
        Preparing the CICS Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        CICS and VTAM Configuration
        Installing NATURAL Support Programs
        Configuring the Adapter for NATURAL CICS Transactions
        Managing NATURAL CICS Transactions Metadata
        NATURAL Data Buffer Processing API
        Invoking a NATURAL CICS Transaction
      Using the Adapter for Netezza
        Preparing the Netezza Environment
        Unicode Support
        Configuring the Adapter for Netezza
        Managing Netezza Metadata
        Customizing the Netezza Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Nucleus
        Preparing the Nucleus Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Nucleus
        Managing Nucleus Metadata
        Customizing the Nucleus Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for ODBC
        Preparing the ODBC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for ODBC
        Managing ODBC Metadata
        Customizing the ODBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Oracle
        Preparing the Oracle Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle
        Managing Oracle Metadata
        Reporting Against an Oracle Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Oracle Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling an Oracle Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Oracle E-Business Suite
        Preparing the Oracle E-Business Suite Environment
        Data Access and Security
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle E-Business Suite
        Maintaining Security Rules
      Using the Adapter for Oracle TimesTen
        Preparing the Oracle TimesTen Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle TimesTen
        Managing Oracle TimesTen Metadata
        Customizing the Oracle TimesTen Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for parAccel
        Configuring the Adapter for parAccel
        Managing parAccel Metadata
      Using the Adapter for PeopleSoft
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PeopleSoft
        Managing PeopleSoft Metadata
        Managing PeopleSoft Secured Data Access
        Managing Connections to PeopleSoft
        Using Administrative Utilities
        Migrating from 7.1x and 7.6.x to 7.7
        Advanced Administrative Topics
      Using the Adapter for PostgreSQL
        Preparing the PostgreSQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PostgreSQL
        Managing PostgreSQL Metadata
        Customizing the PostgreSQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Progress
        Preparing the Progress Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Progress
        Managing Progress Metadata
        Customizing the Progress Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for PSQL
        Preparing the PSQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PSQL
        Managing PSQL Metadata
        Customizing the PSQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Query/400
        Preparing the Adapter for Query/400 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Query/400
        Managing Query/400 Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Rdb
        Preparing the Rdb Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Rdb
        Managing Rdb Metadata
        Using Multiple Rdb DBMS Files
        Using Multischema Rdb DBMS Files
        Rdb Database Driver Performance
      Using the Adapter for Red Brick
        Preparing the Red Brick Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Red Brick
        Managing Red Brick Metadata
        Customizing the Red Brick Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for REST
        Configuring the Adapter for REST
        Managing RESTful Web Services Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Remote Servers
        Configuring Remote Servers
        Managing Metadata for Remote Servers
        Executing Stored Procedures
      Using the Adapter for RMS
        Preparing the RMS Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for RMS
        Managing RMS Metadata
        Manually Describing RMS Files
        Describing Complex RMS Keyed
        Associating an RMS Data Source to a Master File
        Retrieving Data From RMS Files
        Syntax for RMS Master File Attributes
        RMS Attribute Summary
        Read/Write Usage Limitations of the Adapter for RMS
      Using the Adapter for Salesforce.com
        Configuring the Adapter for Salesforce.com
        Creating Synonyms
      Using the Adapter for SAP Business Intelligence Warehouse (BW)
        Preparing the SAP BW Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP BW
        Supporting Mixed Code Page Environments
        Creating BEx Queries
        SAP BW Reporting With WebFOCUS
        Managing SAP BW Metadata
        Customization Settings
        Support for BEx Structures
        Producing SAP BW Requests Using SQL
      Using the Adapter for SAP
        Preparing the SAP Environment
        Accessing Multiple SAP Systems
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP
        Post-Configuration Tasks in an SAP Environment
        Managing SAP Metadata
        SAP Table Class Support for an Individual Table
        SAP Support for a Function Module
        SAP Data Type Support
        SAP Open/SQL Support
        Advanced SAP Features
        Setting Up the Report Processing Mode
        Supporting Mixed Code Page Environments
        Producing SAP Requests
      Using the Adapter for SAP Hana
        Preparing the SAP Hana Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP Hana
        Managing SAP Hana Metadata
        Customizing the SAP Hana Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Siebel
        Software Requirements for the Adapter for Siebel
        Preparing the Siebel Environment
        Preparing the Server Environment for Adapter Configuration
        Configuring the Adapter for Siebel
        Managing Siebel Metadata
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for SQLBase
        Preparing the SQLBase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SQLBase
        Managing SQLBase Metadata
        Customizing the SQLBase Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS)
        Preparing the SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS) Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services
        Managing SQL Server Analysis Services Metadata
        Customizing the SQL Server Analysis Services Environment
        SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS) Reporting With WebFOCUS
      Using the Adapter for Sybase
        Preparing the Sybase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Sybase
        Managing Sybase Metadata
        Reporting Against a Sybase Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Sybase Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Sybase Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Teradata
        Preparing the Teradata Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Teradata
        Managing Teradata Metadata
        Reporting Against a Teradata Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Teradata Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Teradata Macro or Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Transoft
        Preparing the Transoft Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Transoft
        Managing Transoft Metadata
        Customizing the Transoft Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Twitter
        Overview
        Creating a Twitter Application
        Configuring the Twitter Adapter
        Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Twitter Adapter
        Examples
      Using the Adapter for UniData
        Preparing the UniData Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for UniData
        Managing UniData Metadata
        Customizing the UniData Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for UniVerse
        Preparing the UniVerse Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for UniVerse
        Managing UniVerse Metadata
        Customizing the UniVerse Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for VSAM
        Preparing the Environment for VSAM
        Configuring the Adapter for VSAM
        Managing VSAM Metadata
        Associating a VSAM Data Source With a Master File
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a VSAM Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply-Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
        Maintaining VSAM KSDS Data Sources
        Using VSAM Relative Record Data Set (RRDS) Files
        Reviewing SQL Updates to VSAM Data Sources
      Using the Adapter for WAND Sentiment Analysis
        Overview
        Installing, Configuring, and Updating the WAND Taxonomy Server
        Installing and Using the WAND Taxonomy Editor
        Configuring the WAND Sentiment Analysis Adapter
        Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the WAND Sentiment Analysis Adapter
        Examples
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Words Analysis
        Overview
        Configuring the Words Analysis Adapter
        Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Words Analysis Adapter
        Examples
      Using the Adapter for XML
        Preparing the XML Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for XML
        Managing XML Metadata
      XA Support
        XA Transaction Management
        Supported Interfaces
        Implementation
        Vendor Specifics
      Aggregate Awareness Support
        Relational Adapters and Aggregated SQL Queries
        Aggregate Awareness in an RDBMS
      Cluster Join
        Embedded Joins
        Embedded Join Master Files
      Translating COBOL File Descriptions
        Creating Synonyms From COBOL File Descriptions
        Controlling the Translation of a COBOL File Description
      Data Set Compression Exit: ZCOMP
        Invoking the ZCOMP Exit
        What Happens When ZCOMP is LOADED?
      Dynamic Private User Exit
        FOCSAM and the GETPRV User Exit
        Physical Implementation of the GETPRV Exit
        Master File for Data Access With GETPRV
        Access File for Data Access With GETPRV
        Calling Parameters and Work Areas
      Validation for Special Characters and Reserved Words
        Validation for Special Characters
        Validation for Reserved Words
      Launch PDF
    Server Administration
      Server Introduction
        Using the Web Console
        Console Options
        Other Icon Options
        Configuration Overview
        Running and Configuring the FOCUS Database and FOCUS Database Server
        Server Profiles
        Profile Commands
      Server Security
        Server Security Overview
        Configuring Authentication
        Configuring Privileges and Other Authorizations
        Configuring Server Encryption
        Access to Connection Information in WebFOCUS Procedures
        Configuring the Server for Multi-Tenant Deployment
      Managing Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Procedures and Metadata on the Application Tree
        Managing Applications and Paths
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Application Metadata Commands and Catalog Metadata
        Help Information: APP HELP
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
        Accessing Metadata and Procedures
        Allocating Temporary Files
        Temporary Space Usage and Location
        Temporary Disk Space Usage for Non-PDS Deployment
        Application Tools
      Data Adapters
        Changing Common Adapter Settings
        Configuring an Adapter
        Changing the Adapter Configuration
        Configuring a Remote Server
        SQL Automatic Passthru Status
        Determining SQL Optimization
        Determining Function Parameters
        Data Type Support Report
        Social Media Adapters
      Metadata
        Creating Synonyms
        Testing Synonyms
        Managing Synonyms
        Using the Wizards
      Stored Procedures
        Working With Stored Procedures
        Creating a Stored Procedure
        Sending Stored Procedure Report Output to Server-Side Printers
        Editing a Stored Procedure
        Running a Stored Procedure
        Scheduling a Procedure
        Sending an E-mail Notification for a Procedure
        Procedure Run-Time Processing Essentials
        Platform-Specific Commands and Features
        Stress Testing a Procedure
        Running Impact Analysis Reports
      Server Workspace Manager
        Configuring Workspace Manager
        Workspace Configuration Settings
        Editing Configuration Files
        Configuring Java Services
        Cluster Manager
        Monitoring Server Activity
      Listeners and Special Services
        Using the Listeners and Special Services Configuration Panes
        Special Services
        Listeners
      Troubleshooting
        Viewing Version Information
        Analyzing Server Activity
        Analyzing FOCUS Database Server Activity
        Tracing Server Activity
        z/OS-Specific Troubleshooting for the Unified Server
        z/OS-Specific Troubleshooting for z/OS HFS Deployment
        Recording and Reproducing User Actions
        Troubleshooting the Console
        Server Processes
        Gathering Diagnostic Information for Customer Support Services
      Unicode Support
        Unicode and the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Accessing Unicode Data
        Selecting, Reformatting, and Manipulating Characters
        Sort Order Under Unicode
        Added Unicode Support for Master Files, Data Files, and Application Directory Names
        Unicode PDF Output
      Platform-Specific Methods for Specifying EDAEXTSEC
        Platform-Specific Methods for Setting EDAEXTSEC
      Launch PDF
    Server Installation
      Introduction to Installation
        Versions
        What to Read After You Install
      Installation for Windows
        Installation Requirements
        Accessing the Software
        Installing
        Installation and Configuration Directories
        Verifying Installation
        Starting and Using a Server or Data Management Console
        Security Providers
        Additional Installation Options
        Generating a Trace
        Third-Party Software and Licenses
        General Information for a Windows Installation
        Troubleshooting for Windows
      Installation for UNIX
        Installation Requirements
        Installation and Configuration Directories
        Installing
        Verifying Installation
        Security Providers
        Starting and Using a Server
        Generating a Trace
        Third-Party Software and Licenses
        General Information for a UNIX Installation
        Troubleshooting for UNIX
      Installation for z/OS
        Installation for HFS and PDS
        HFS Deployment
        PDS Deployment
      Installation for IBM i
        Step 1. Reviewing System Requirements
        Step 2. Creating User IDs
        Step 3. Accessing the Installation Software
        Step 4. Running the Installation Program
        Step 5. Verifying the Server Installation
        Step 6. Security Providers
        Starting and Using the Server
        CL and CMD Programs
        General Information for an IBM i Installation
        Generating a Trace
        Third-Party Software and Licenses
        Troubleshooting for IBM i
      Installation for OpenVMS
        Step 1. Reviewing System Requirements
        Step 2. Creating User IDs
        Step 3. Accessing the Installation Software
        Step 4. Running the Setup Procedure
        Step 5. Verifying the Installation
        Step 6. Security Providers
        Starting and Using the Server
        Generating a Trace
        Third-Party Software and Licenses
        General Information for an OpenVMS Installation
        Troubleshooting for OpenVMS
      Information Builders and Third-Party Licenses
        Information Builders License
        OpenFlex SDK License
        Zip Archiver License
      Launch PDF
    Stored Procedure Reference for 3GL Procedures
      Introducing Stored Procedures
        Using a Stored Procedure
        Calling a Stored Procedure
        Stored Procedure Libraries
        Setting the Execution Order
      Calling a Program as a Stored Procedure
        Calling a Compiled Program
        Calling a Program With CALLPGM or EXEC
        Calling a Program With SQL EX
        Passing Parameters
        Program Communication
      Calling a JAVA Class as a Stored Procedure
        Execute Using CALLJAVA
        Execute Using EX
        Execute Using SQL EX and SQL CPJAVA EX
        Passing Parameters
        Writing a JAVA Class
        JAVA Class Communication
        Compiling and Running a JAVA Program
      Writing a 3GL Compiled Stored Procedure Program
        Program Requirements
        Setting Up the Control Block
        Storing Program Values
        Error Handling
        Issuing the CREATE TABLE Command
      User Written Routines
        Calling a User Written Routine
      Using the GENCPGM Build Tool
        Using GENCPGM
      Additional 3GL Reference Examples
        Subroutine Source Examples and Runtime Testing
        MTHNAME C Implementation
        MTHNAME C++ Implementation
        MTHNAME Fortran Implementation
        MTHNAME COBOL Implementation
        MTHNAME z/OS BAL Assembler Implementation
        MTHNAME Basic Implementation (Based on HP OpenVMS Basic 1.4)
        MTHNAME RPG IBM i ILE Implementation
        MTHNAME PL/1 Implementation
        MTHNAME Pascal Implementation (Based on HP OpenVMS Pascal 5.8)
        UREVERSE C Implementation
      Launch PDF
  DataMigrator Functions
    Functions Overview
      Function Arguments
      Function Categories
      Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
    Character Functions
      ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a String
      ASIS: Distinguishing Between Space and Zero
      BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
      BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as an Integer
      BYTVAL: Translating a Character to Decimal
      CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a String
      CHKNUM: Checking a String for Numeric Format
      CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
      CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
      EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
      GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
      LCWORD: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
      LCWORD2: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
      LCWORD3: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
      LJUST: Left-Justifying a String
      LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
      OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
      PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
      PATTERN: Generating a Pattern From a String
      POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
      REVERSE: Reversing the Characters in a String
      RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String
      SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
      SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
      SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
      STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
      STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
      SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
      TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
      UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
      XMLDECOD: Decoding XML-Encoded Characters
      XMLENCOD: XML-Encoding Characters
    Variable Length Character Functions
      Overview
      LENV: Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field
      LOCASV: Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String
      POSITV: Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring
      SUBSTV: Extracting a Variable Length Substring
      TRIMV: Removing Characters From a String
      UPCASV: Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String
    Simplified Character Functions
      CHAR_LENGTH: Returning the Length in Characters of a String
      DIGITS: Converting a Number to a Character String
      LOWER: Returning a String With All Letters Lowercase
      LPAD: Left-Padding a Character String
      LTRIM: Removing Blanks From the Left End of a String
      POSITION: Returning the First Position of a Substring in a Source String
      RPAD: Right-Padding a Character String
      RTRIM: Removing Blanks From the Right End of a String
      SUBSTRING: Extracting a Substring From a Source String
      TOKEN: Extracting a Token From a String
      TRIM_: Removing a Leading Character, Trailing Character, or Both From a String
      UPPER: Returning a String With All Letters Uppercase
    Character Functions for DBCS Code Pages
      DCTRAN: Translating A Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character to Another
      DEDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
      DSTRIP: Removing a Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character From a String
      DSUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
      JPTRANS: Converting Japanese Specific Characters
      KKFCUT: Truncating a String
      SFTDEL: Deleting the Shift Code From DBCS Data
      SFTINS: Inserting the Shift Code Into DBCS Data
    Data Source and Decoding Functions
      DB_EXPR: Inserting an SQL Expression Into a Request
      DB_INFILE: Testing Values Against a File or an SQL Subquery
      DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving Data Source Values
      DECODE: Decoding Values
      FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in a Data Source
      LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
      LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
    Date Functions
      Overview of Date Functions
      Using Standard Date Functions
      DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
      DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
      DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
      DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
      DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
      FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
      FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
      FIYYQ: Converting a Calendar Date to a Financial Date
      TODAY: Returning the Current Date
      Using Legacy Date Functions
      AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months
      AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days
      CHGDAT: Changing How a Date String Displays
      DA Functions: Converting a Legacy Date to an Integer
      DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
      DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
      DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
      GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
      JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
      YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
    Date-Time Functions
      Using Date-Time Functions
      HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
      HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
      HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Date Format
      HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
      HDTTM: Converting a Date Value to a Date-Time Value
      HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time in a Date-Time Field
      HGETZ: Storing the Current Coordinated Universal Time in a Date-Time Field
      HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
      HHMS: Converting a Date-Time Value to a Time Value
      HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Date-Time Value
      HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to Midnight
      HNAME: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Alphanumeric Format
      HPART: Retrieving a Date-Time Component as a Numeric Value
      HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
      HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
      HTMTOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
      HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-Time Value
    Simplified Date and Date-Time Functions
      DTADD: Incrementing a Date or Date-Time Component
      DTDIFF: Returning the Number of Component Boundaries Between Date or Date-Time Values
      DTPART: Returning a Date or Date-Time Component in Integer Format
      DTRUNC: Returning the Start of a Date Period for a Given Date
    Format Conversion Functions
      ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
      EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
      FPRINT: Converting Fields to Alphanumeric Format
      FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
      HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Integer to a Character
      ITONUM: Converting a Large Number to Double-Precision Format
      ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
      ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
      PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
      PTOA: Converting a Packed-Decimal Number to Alphanumeric Format
      TSTOPACK: Converting an MSSQL or Sybase Timestamp Column to Packed Decimal
      UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
      XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
    Numeric Functions
      ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
      CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
      DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
      EXP: Raising e to the Nth Power
      EXPN: Evaluating a Number in Scientific Notation
      INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
      LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
      MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
      NORMSDST and NORMSINV: Calculating Normal Distributions
      PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
      RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
      SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
    System Functions
      CLSDDREC: Closing All Files Opened by the PUTDDREC Function
      FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
      FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
      FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
      GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
      JOBNAME: Retrieving the Current Process Identification String
      PUTDDREC: Writing a Character String as a Record in a Sequential File
      SLEEP: Suspending Execution for a Given Number of Seconds
      SYSVAR: Retrieving the Value of a z/OS System Variable
    SQL Character Functions
      CHAR_LENGTH: Finding the Length of a Character String
      CONCAT: Concatenating Two Character Strings
      DIGITS: Converting a Numeric Value to a Character String
      EDIT: Editing a Value According to a Format (SQL)
      LCASE: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
      LTRIM: Removing Leading Spaces
      POSITION: Finding the Position of a Substring
      RTRIM: Removing Trailing Spaces
      SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring From a String Value (SQL)
      TRIM: Removing Leading or Trailing Characters (SQL)
      UCASE: Converting a Character String to Uppercase
      VARGRAPHIC: Converting to Double-byte Character Data
    SQL Date and Time Functions
      CURRENT_DATE: Obtaining the Date
      CURRENT_TIME: Obtaining the Time
      CURRENT_TIMESTAMP: Obtaining the Timestamp (Date/Time)
      DAY: Obtaining the Day of the Month From a Date/Timestamp
      DAYS: Obtaining the Number of Days Since January 1, 0001
      EXTRACT: Obtaining a Datetime Field From Date/Time/Timestamp
      HOUR: Obtaining the Hour From Time/Timestamp
      MICROSECOND: Obtaining Microseconds From Time/Timestamp
      MILLISECOND: Obtaining Milliseconds From Time/Timestamp
      MINUTE: Obtaining the Minute From Time/Timestamp
      MONTH: Obtaining the Month From Date/Timestamp
      SECOND: Obtaining the Second Field From Time/Timestamp
      QUARTER: Returning the Quarter of the Year
      WEEKDAY: Returning the Day of the Week
      YEAR: Obtaining the Year From a Date or Timestamp
    SQL Data Type Conversion Functions
      CAST: Converting to a Specific Data Type
      CHAR: Converting to a Character String
      CHAR: Converting to a Standard Date-Time Format
      DATE: Converting to a Date
      DECIMAL: Converting to Decimal Format
      FLOAT: Converting to Floating Point Format
      INT: Converting to an Integer
      SMALLINT: Converting to a Small Integer
      TIME: Converting to a Time
      TIMESTAMP: Converting to a Timestamp
    SQL Numeric Functions
      ABS: Returning an Absolute Value (SQL)
      LOG: Returning a Logarithm (SQL)
      EXP: Returning e Raised to a Power
      POWER: Raising a Value to a Power
      SQRT: Returning a Square Root (SQL)
    SQL Miscellaneous Functions
      COUNTBY: Incrementing Column Values Row by Row
      HEX: Converting to Hexadecimal
      IF: Testing a Condition
      LENGTH: Obtaining the Physical Length of a Data Item
      VALUE: Coalescing Data Values
    SQL Operators
      CASE: SQL Case Operator
      COALESCE: Coalescing Data Values
      NULLIF: NULLIF Operator
    Launch PDF
  DataMigrator User's Guide
    Introduction to DataMigrator
      Data Management and Migration Overview
      What Is DataMigrator?
      DataMigrator Architecture
      DataMigrator Server
      DataMigrator Data Management Console
      Server Web Console
      Designing Data Flows and Process Flows
      Revised Functionality
      Getting Help
      Information Builders and iWay Software on the Web
    Setting Up DataMigrator
      DataMigrator Setup At a Glance
      Remote Server Setup At a Glance
      DataMigrator Setup
      Initiating Server Administration Tasks
      Authorizing DataMigrator Server Usage and Administration
      Managing Application Directories and Configuring the Application Path
      Configuring Data Adapters
      Creating Metadata
      Testing Sample Data and a Process Flow
      Performing Server Administration Tasks
      Using Secure Shell FTP (SFTP)
      Upgrading DataMigrator From Release 4.3 or 5.1
      Upgrading DataMigrator from Release 5.2, 5.3, 7.1, or 7.6
    Planning a DataMigrator Application
      Designing Your Application
      Using Synonyms for Data Sources and Data Targets
      Reviewing Your Data Sources
      Reviewing Your Data Targets
      Establishing Security for DataMigrator
    Working in the Data Management Console
      Data Management Console Interface
      Navigation Pane
      DataMigrator Workspace
      Text Editor
      Aerial View
      Ribbon Tabs
      Metadata Tab
      Text Editor Tab
      Console Log
      Setting Flow Properties
      Viewing Properties
      Setting User Preferences
      User Privileges
      License Code
      Configuring National Language Support
      Ending a Data Management Console Session
    Designing a Data Flow
      The Data Flow Interface
      Simple Data Flow at a Glance
      Complex Data Flow at a Glance
      Creating a Data Flow
      Specifying Data Sources
      Creating a Source Transformation in a Data Source Object
      Joining Data Sources
      Adding a SELECT to a Data Flow
      Adding a UNION to a Data Flow
      Selecting Columns
      Testing the SQL Statement
      Specifying Filters in a Data Flow
      Specifying Sorts
      Selecting a Data Target
      Specifying Data Target Options
      Mapping Transformations
      Using Variables in a Flow
      Using Functions
      Column Formats and Mapping
      Setting Properties of a Flow
      Running a Data Flow
      Creating a Direct Load Flow
      Creating a DBMS SQL Flow
      Creating a Quick ETL Copy
    Designing a Process Flow
      Process Flow Methodology
      Process Flow Interface
      Simple Process Flow At a Glance
      Complex Process Flow at a Glance
      Creating a Process Flow
      Adding a Saved Procedure to a Process Flow
      Assigning and Using Variables in a Process Flow
      Maintaining Continuous Processing in a Single Agent
      Executing a Process Flow That Contains Only Procedures
      Adding Email Messages to a Process Flow
      Setting Connection Logic
      Grouping and Controlling Simultaneous Execution of Flows
      Running a Process Flow
      Scheduling a Process Flow
    Tutorial: Creating Data and Process Flows With DataMigrator
      What You Are Going To Do
      Startup and Setup Tasks
      Exercise 1: Creating the Data Flow
      Selecting and Joining Data Sources
      Selecting and Managing Columns
      Adding Data Targets
      Submitting the Data Flow
      Data Flow Review
      Exercise 2: Creating the Process Flow
      Starting the Process Flow
      Adding a Data Flow Object to the Process Flow
      Branching in the Process Flow
      Submitting the Process Flow
    Generating Reports, Viewing the Log File, and Printing Flows
      DataMigrator Log, Statistics, and Summary Flow Reports
      Scheduler Reports
      Impact Analysis Reports on Synonyms, Procedures and Columns
      Working With a Report
      Viewing a Detailed Flow Report and Log File
      Printing a Graphical Representation of a Data or Process Flow
    Optimizing Performance
      Improving Data Extraction Performance
      Using Automatic Passthru
      Improving Data Loading Performance
      Improving Lookup Performance
    Working With Synonyms
      Synonym Editor Layout
      Viewing and Editing Synonym Attributes
      Using Variables in a Synonym
      Variables Attribute Summary
      How to Use a Variable in a Synonym
      Creating, Enhancing, and Editing Synonyms Using Modeling View
      Adding Indexes to a Synonym
      Adding Virtual Columns (DEFINE) in a Synonym
      Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
      Viewing Data Lineage for a Column
    Advanced DataMigrator Tips and Techniques
      Overview of Examples
      Creating Sample Data and Metadata
      Horizontal Partitioning with Multi-Table Load
      Using the Decode Function
      Generating a Surrogate Key
      Generating a Surrogate Key Using Slowly Changing Dimensions
      Mapping to a Sequential File of a Specific Format
      Creating and Using Reusable Transformations
      Using Multiple Targets to Create a Single File With Multiple Records Types
      Creating a Target File With Multiple RECTYPEs
      Combining Multiple Sources Rows in a Single Target Row
      Using Lookups to Create Multi-Table Flows Without Joins
      Record Logging
      Using Variables in Data Flows
      Creating a Data Flow Using a Target Based on a Predefined XML Schema
      Loading a Target Table Using the File Listener
      Sending a Target File to an FTP or SFTP Server
      Loading a Star Schema
      Iterating Through Multiple Tables
      Using Subqueries
      Loading Images Into a Database Table
    Change Data Capture
      Enabling the Database for Logging in Relational Databases
      Enabling the Database for Logging in VSAM
      Properties of a Table Log Record Synonym
      Tutorial: Using Change Data Capture with Relational Databases
      Tutorial: Using Change Data Capture With VSAM
    DataMigrator Log Statistics and Tables
      Log and Statistics Tables
    Event-Based Scheduling
      Starting Flows With CMRUN
      Starting Flows With CMASAP
      Starting Flows From FOCUS
      Determining the Status of an Event-Based Flow
    Problems, Errors, and Troubleshooting
      DataMigrator Status Codes and Server Messages
      Server Run-Time Error Codes
      DataMigrator Management Problem Resolution
      Including Run-Time Messages in the ETL Log
      Performing a Trace to Diagnose Server Problems
    Customizing Your Environment
      DataMigrator Parameters
    Source Management
      Overview of Source Management
      Source Control Security Server and Client Setup
      Configuring Source Management and Setting Up Source Control
      Using a Source Control System to Manage Procedures and Synonyms
    Launch PDF
  Resource Analyzer Administrator's and User's Manual
    What Is Resource Analyzer?
      Resource Analyzer Overview
      Resource Analyzer for Decision Support Analysis
      Uses for Resource Analyzer: Performance Analysis
      Introduction to Data Access and Performance Analysis With Resource Analyzer
      Sample Data Access Questions
      How Resource Analyzer Works
      Software Prerequisites
      Overview of the Web Console
      Overview of Reporting With Resource Analyzer
      Integrating Resource Analyzer With WebFOCUS, Managed Reporting, and ReportCaster
    Configuring and Administering Resource Management
      Resource Management Interface
      Configuring Resource Management
      Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
      Migrating the Resource Management Repository
      Event Routing
    Resource Analyzer Report Options
      Reports Overview
      Resource Analyzer Reporting
      Resource Analyzer Report Options
      General Reports
      Resource Analyzer Reports
    Getting Help
      Resource Management Administration Help
      Reporting Application Context-Sensitive Help From Reports
    Administrative Usage Monitoring Tables Column Descriptions
      Administrative Tables (RMLSYS.MAS)
      Usage Monitoring Table (RMLDB.MAS)
      Usage Monitoring RDBMS Table Sizing
      Renamed or Moved Columns
    Using DDL Statements to Create the Internal Tables
      Overview of Creating the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Internal Tables
    Launch PDF
  Resource Governor Administrator's and User's Manual
     What Is Resource Governor?
      Resource Governor Overview
      Resource Governor Features
      Resource Governor Operations
      How Resource Governor Works
      Resource Governor Usage Monitoring
    Configuring and Administering Resource Management
      Resource Management Interface
      Configuring Resource Management
      Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
      Migrating the Resource Management Repository
      Event Routing
    Rules Files and Knowledge Bases
      Overview
      Working With Business Rules
      Working with Resource Thresholds
      Working with Knowledge Bases
      Maintaining Knowledge Bases
    Resource Governor Report Options
      Reports Overview
      Resource Governor Reporting
      Resource Governor Report Options
      General Reports
      Resource Governor Reports
    Getting Help
      Resource Management Administration Help
      Reporting Application Context-Sensitive Help From Reports
    Administrative Usage Monitoring Tables Column Descriptions
      Administrative Tables (RMLSYS.MAS)
      Usage Monitoring Table (RMLDB.MAS)
      Usage Monitoring RDBMS Table Sizing
      Renamed or Moved Columns
    Using DDL Statements to Create the Internal Tables
      Overview of Creating the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Internal Tables
    Business Rule Language (BRL)
      Using Business Rule Language (BRL)
      BRL Factual Information
      BRL Keywords
      Pre-defined Variables
      Internal Functions
      Customized Rule Examples
    Launch PDF
  IWAF Adapter for Salesforce
    Introducing the IWAF Adapter for Salesforce
      Features of the IWAF Adapter for Salesforce
      Component Information for the IWAF Adapter for Salesforce
    Getting Started With Salesforce
      Prerequisites
    Creating Metadata for Salesforce
      Configuring the Salesforce Service Adapter
      Adding an Adapter and Connection to a Salesforce Service
      Adding an Adapter and Connection to a Salesforce Event
      Creating a Synonym for a Salesforce Service
      Sample Data From a Salesforce Service
      Creating a Synonym for a Salesforce Event
    Joining Salesforce Business Objects
      Joining Salesforce Business Objects
    Using DataMigrator to Copy Data from Salesforce
      Retrieving Data From Salesforce
      Capturing a Salesforce Event
    Using WebFOCUS to Report on Data From Salesforce
      Using InfoAssist to Report From Salesforce
      Reporting from Salesforce
    Using DataMigrator to Load Data to Salesforce
      Creating Procedures to Set All On
      Load Data Using a Filter
      Load Data Using a JOIN
      Viewing What was Loaded
      Using Upsert
    Using the Salesforce Bulk API
      Using the Salesforce Bulk API
      Creating a Source Data File
      Creating a Job and Adding a Batch
      Creating a Flow to Close a Job
      Creating a Flow to Check Job Status
      Running a Flow to Load Data
      Running a Flow to Check Results
      Getting Results for a Batch
      Creating a Process Flow
      Using Upsert
      Adding Additional Batches to a Job
      Parameters for Creating a Job
    Certificate Management
      Prerequisites
      Key Store Management
      Generating the Certificate Signing Request
      Purchasing the Commercial Certificate From Symantec or a Similar Certificate Authority
      Importing the Root Certificate and Intermediate Certificate
      Importing the Signed Certificate
      Trust Store Management
    Creating Workflow Rules and Outbound Messages in Salesforce
      Real Time Event Capture
      Creating a Workflow Rule
      Creating Outbound Messages
      Activate the Rule for the Outbound Message
    Launch PDF
  Hyperstage
    Hyperstage for PostgreSQL Reference Guide
      About WebFOCUS Hyperstage
        Hyperstage Overview
        Hyperstage and PostgreSQL
      Installing and Configuring the Hyperstage Database
        Technical Requirements
        Installing Hyperstage
        Configuring the Hyperstage (PG) Adapter
        Configuring Hyperstage
        Configuration Tips and Examples
      Using the Hyperstage Database Beyond WebFOCUS
        Starting and Stopping the Hyperstage Server Under Windows
        Working With the Hyperstage Server
        Checking the Hyperstage Version
        Quick ETL Copy For Hyperstage Using Extended Bulk Load Utility
        About Log Files
        About Errors
        About SQL Command Syntax
        About SQL ISO Standards
      Managing Hyperstage Tables
        About the Hyperstage Database Files
        About Supported Data Types
        Creating and Dropping Tables
        Modifying Table Structures
        About Column Options
        Converting Oracle DDL to Hyperstage
        Converting SQL Server to Hyperstage
        Converting PostgreSQL to Hyperstage
        Viewing Compression Ratio Statistics
      Data Manipulation Statements
        Design of DML in Hyperstage
        INSERT
        UPDATE
        DELETE
      Character Set Support
        Supported Character Sets
        Collations and Comparisons
        Padding
      Importing and Exporting Data in Hyperstage
        About Importing and Exporting Data
        Hyperstage COPY FROM Syntax
        Hyperstage Loader Reject File
        Importing Files With Invalid Values
        Hyperstage COPY TO Syntax
        Single-character Delimiter
        About Transactions
        About Export Differences in Hyperstage
        Hyperstage Binary Format
        Exporting and Importing Query Results
      Running Queries in Hyperstage
        About the Knowledge Grid
        Running Queries
        Creating VIEWs in Hyperstage
        SELECT Syntax Supported in Hyperstage
        Query Performance
      Hyperstage Backup and Recovery
        Backup Procedure
        Restore Procedure
      Functions and Operators
        Hyperstage Optimizer Supported Functions and Operators
      Hyperstage Data Tools
        Hyperstage Consistency Manager
        Hyperstage MySQL to PostgreSQL Migrator (“External Migrator”)
        MySQL to PostgreSQL Data Type Mappings
        Limitations and Notes
        Using the External Migrator
      Launch PDF
    Hyperstage MySQL-based to PostgreSQL-based Migration
      Introduction
        Hyperstage Technical Requirements
      Installing and Configuring Hyperstage
        Installing Hyperstage
        Configuring the Hyperstage (PG) Adapter
        Configuring Hyperstage
      Hyperstage MySQL to PostgreSQL Migration Using the External Migrator
        Hyperstage MySQL to PostgreSQL Migrator (“External Migrator”)
        Limitations and Notes
        Using the External Migrator
        MySQL to PostgreSQL Data Type Mappings
      Hyperstage MySQL to PostgreSQL Migration Using Quick ETL Copy
        Migration Using Quick ETL Copy With the MySQL ODBC Driver
        Migration Using Quick ETL Copy With the MySQL JDBC Driver
      Launch PDF
  New Features and Release Notes
    WebFOCUS New Features
      Introduction to WebFOCUS Release 8.1 Version 05M
        New Feature Summary
        Our Promise to Customers and Partners
      Migrating WebFOCUS Environments
        Migration Process
      Reporting With WebFOCUS
        WebFOCUS InfoAssist Enhancements
        Active Technologies Enhancements
        App Studio Enhancements
        Reporting Language Enhancements
      Charting With WebFOCUS
        InfoDiscovery
        WebFOCUS Chart and Graph Enhancements
      Business Analytics
        Magnify Enhancements
      Developing Applications
        Business Intelligence Portal
      Scheduling and Distributing Information
        ReportCaster Enhancements
      Administering and Securing the Environment
        WebFOCUS Client Repository and Authorization Security Enhancements
      Server Enhancements
        Applications
        Configuration and Monitoring
        Core Server and Clients
        Diagnostics
        Metadata
        National Language Support
        Security
        Web Console
      Adapter Enhancements
        All Adapters
        SQL Adapters
        ERP Adapters
        OLAP Adapters
        DBMS Adapters
        Procedures Adapters
        Sequential and Indexed Adapters
        Social Media Adapters
        XML-Based Adapters
      DataMigrator Enhancements
        Check File
        Dependencies Analysis Report
        Updating Synonyms
        Quick ETL Copy
        Copying Selected Columns Using Quick ETL Copy
        Copy Server Node
        Noncontiguous Keys
        Global Variables Editor
        Updates for Type I Fields
        Annotations in Flows
        Finding Text in SQL Object
        Extended Load Bulk Enhancements
        Loading Images From Files
        JSON Document Target
        WHERE Calculator Support for ANY and ALL
        Impact Analysis Enhancements
        Slowly Changing Dimensions
        Extended Bulk Load Utility for MS SQL ODBC Adapter
        Transformation Calculator Enhancements
        New SQL Functions
        Data Profiling Drill-Down Reports for Patterns
        Managing Object Groups In A Flow
        Using Source Control on Multiple Files
        Find Available for Data and Process Flows
        Undo and Redo Capability
        Segment Qualifications in Synonym Editor
        Email File Types for a Process Flow
        Non-Zero Return Code Lines in DataMigrator Log
        ETLLOG Enhancements
        Using SFTP as a Data Source
        Option to Continue Processing on Partial Answer Set
        Allowing Iterator for Non-DataMigrator Jobs
        Support Change Data Capture for MS SQL 2012
        Reading a Field With Delimited Values as Individual Rows
        SCD Type I Flow Updates
        File Types on EDAMAIL or on a Flow
        Display of Long Procedure Names
        Calculate Format for Expression In Transformation Grid
        Specifying USAGE Attributes for Datetime Fields
        Balloon Tips to Show Error or Information Messages
        Batch Command for Data Profiling and Key Analysis
        Source Control File Types
      Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Enhancements
        New Errors and Messages Report
        Monitoring Commands Enhancements
        Sybase ASA Supported
        Maximum Memory Used for Log File Records
        Enhanced Administration for Thresholds and Business Rules
        Enhanced Governor Business Rules Menu
        Monitored Generated SQL Statements and Aggregation Messages
        New Report to Display All Governor Rule File Properties
      WebFOCUS RESTful Web Services
        ReportCaster RESTful Web Service Requests
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS New Feature Highlights
      Reporting With WebFOCUS
      Charting With WebFOCUS
      Business Analytics
      Developing Applications
      Scheduling and Distributing Information
      Administering and Securing the Environment
      Server Enhancements
      Adapter Enhancements
      WebFOCUS RESTful Web Services
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Release Notes
      WebFOCUS
      Installation and Configuration
      WebFOCUS Security
      InfoAssist
      ReportCaster
      Business Intelligence Dashboard
      Business Intelligence Portal
      Deferred Reporting
      Active Technologies
      WebFOCUS Language
      WebFOCUS Graphics
      HTML5 Charts
      Magnify
      WebFOCUS National Language Support
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Upgrade Considerations
      Tools Consolidation
      WebFOCUS
      Installation and Configuration
      App Studio
      InfoAssist
      Business Intelligence Portal
      ReportCaster
      WebFOCUS Infrastructure and Security
      Managed Reporting
      Business Intelligence Dashboard
      WebFOCUS Quick Data
      WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition
      Active Technologies
      WebFOCUS Charts and Graphs
      WebFOCUS Language
      Web Services
      Magnify
      National Language Support
      Launch PDF
  Installation and Configuration
    WebFOCUS Developer Studio Installation and Configuration Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS and WebFOCUS Developer Studio
        About WebFOCUS and Developer Studio
        WebFOCUS and Developer Studio Overview and Architecture
        Developer Studio Installation and Configuration Steps
      Installing Developer Studio
        Developer Studio System Requirements
        Installing Developer Studio
        Verifying Developer Studio
        Silent Developer Studio Installation
      Configuring the Web Server or Application Server
        Configuration Options
        Configuring Apache Tomcat
        Configuring Microsoft IIS
        Configuring Microsoft IIS to Use the Tomcat Connector (Plug-in)
        Configuring Additional Web and/or Application Servers
      Configuring a Network Installation
        Network Installation Steps
      Configuring the Local Reporting Server Security
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Security and User IDs
      Troubleshooting Developer Studio
        Troubleshooting Tips
        Troubleshooting Tools
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for Windows
      Introducing WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation
        About WebFOCUS and ReportCaster
        WebFOCUS Installation Overview
        ReportCaster Installation Overview
        WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration Steps
        Application Server and Web Application Overview
        Security and User IDs for WebFOCUS and ReportCaster
      WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation Requirements
        WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation Requirements
        WebFOCUS Repository Setup
        Installation Worksheet
      Installing the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Installing the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Verifying and Configuring the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Silent Installation of the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
      Installing the WebFOCUS Client
        Installing WebFOCUS Client
        WebFOCUS Client and ReportCaster Directory Structures
        Uninstalling the WebFOCUS Client
      Configuring Web and Application Servers
        Configuration Overview and Options
        Configuring Apache Tomcat
        Configuring Microsoft IIS 6.0
        Configuring IIS to Use the Tomcat Connector (Plug-In)
        Configuring Microsoft IIS Version 7.x on the Windows 2008 Server
        Configuring IBM WebSphere
        Configuring Oracle WebLogic
      Post-Installation Verifications and Configurations
        WebFOCUS Client Post-Installation Tasks
        WebFOCUS Repository Post-Installation Tasks
      WebFOCUS ReportCaster Post-Installation Tasks
        ReportCaster Verification
        Importing and Exporting the ReportCaster Configuration File
        ReportCaster Configuration
      Business Intelligence Portal and Dashboard Verification and Security
        Verifying and Configuring WebFOCUS Business Intelligence Portal and Dashboard
        Restricting File Permission Access to Managed Reporting
      Troubleshooting WebFOCUS and ReportCaster
        WebFOCUS Troubleshooting Tips
        ReportCaster Troubleshooting Tips
      Magnify Configuration
        Prerequisites
        Optimizing the Magnify Environment
        Security
      Additional Graph Configuration Options
        Graph Options
        Graph Invocation and Generation Options
        PCHOLD (Server Side) Graphics Overview
        Configurations for HOLD Graphics
      Additional WebFOCUS Repository Topics and Tasks
        Repository JDBC Concepts
        Repository Connection Information
        Sizing Guidelines
        Other WebFOCUS Repository Utilities and Tasks
        SQL Server Pre-Installation Steps
        MySQL Repository Set Up
      Additional WebFOCUS Configuration Options
        Installing Multiple WebFOCUS Instances on the Same Machine
        Tomcat Security Tips
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration for UNIX
      Introducing WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation
        About WebFOCUS and ReportCaster
        WebFOCUS Installation Overview
        ReportCaster Installation Overview
        WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation and Configuration Steps
        Application Server and Web Application Overview
        Security and User IDs for WebFOCUS and ReportCaster
      WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation Requirements
        WebFOCUS and ReportCaster Installation Requirements
        WebFOCUS Repository Setup
        Installation Worksheet
      Installing the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Installing the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Verification and Configuration
        Silent Installation of the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
      Installing the WebFOCUS Client
        Installing the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Installing the WebFOCUS Cluster Manager
        Installing the WebFOCUS Client
        Creating the WebFOCUS UOA Repository
        Configuring Web and Application Servers
        WebFOCUS Client and ReportCaster Directory Structures
        Uninstalling the WebFOCUS Client
      Configuring Web and Application Servers
        Configuration Overview
        Configuring IBM WebSphere 7.0
        Configuring Oracle WebLogic Server 11gR1 With or Without Apache HTTP Server
        Manually Configuring Apache Tomcat With or Without Apache HTTP Server
        Installing and Configuring JBoss EAP 6.0.x or 6.2.x
      Post-Installation Verification and Configuration
        WebFOCUS Post-Installation Tasks
        WebFOCUS Repository Post-Installation Tasks
      WebFOCUS ReportCaster Post-Installation Tasks
        ReportCaster Verification
        Importing and Exporting the ReportCaster Configuration File
        ReportCaster Configuration
      Business Intelligence Portal and Dashboard Verification and Security
        Verifying and Configuring WebFOCUS Business Intelligence Portal and Dashboard
      Troubleshooting WebFOCUS and ReportCaster
        WebFOCUS Troubleshooting Tips
        ReportCaster Troubleshooting Tips
      Magnify Configuration
        Installing Magnify on UNIX and z/OS
        Prerequisites
        Optimizing the Magnify Environment
        Security
      Additional Graph Configuration Options
        Graph Options
        Graph Invocation and Generation Options
        PCHOLD (Server Side) Graphics Overview
        Configurations for HOLD Graphics
      Additional WebFOCUS Repository Topics and Tasks
        Repository JDBC Concepts
        Repository Connection Information
        Sizing Guidelines
        MySQL Repository Set Up
      Launch PDF
  Technical Memos
    TM4690: Saving Report Output in Excel XLSX Format v.7.7.02 - 7.7.05 and 8.0
    TM4729: Tying PMF 5.3.1 Scheduling to a ReportCaster Derby Repository in WebFOCUS 8
    TM4730: ReportCaster Failover v.8.0.02
    TM4739: Combining an Active Technologies Dashboard With an HTML Page Using -HTMLFORM v.7.7.05
    TM4742: Configuring External Links in Visual Discovery AE v.8.0.08
    TM4750: WebFOCUS Reporting and Microsoft Office Support v.8.0.09 and Higher
    TM4751: Enabling Additional Territories in a Map v.8.1.05
    TM4753: Customizing the WebFOCUS Express Portal Banner v.8.0.09 and Higher
  Best Practices
    Best Practices for the WebFOCUS 8 Deployment Roadmap
      Understanding Business Requirements
        Business Requirements
        Business Objectives
        Business Methodologies
        Business Users
        Mapping Business Requirements to a WebFOCUS Solution
      Defining the Infrastructure to Support the WebFOCUS 8 Solution
        Staffing and Leadership
        Processes
        Technology
        Create a Competency Center
        Develop WebFOCUS Production Deployment Plan
        Implement the WebFOCUS Roadmap
      Sizing and Capacity Planning
        Introduction
        Terminology
        Staffing
        Elements of Resource Sizing and Capacity Planning
        Resource Sizing for New Workloads
        Capacity Planning for Existing Workloads
        Plan for the Future
        Benchmarking Methodologies
      Understanding the Data
        Data Sources
        Data Standards
        Data Structures
        Data Quality
        ETL Processes
        Data Performance
      Creating Standards for Application Development
        Center of Excellence or Competency Center
        Establishing Standards
        Working With WebFOCUS Metadata
        Setting the Application Path
        Using Profiles to Manage the WebFOCUS Development Environment
        Working With WebFOCUS Variables
        Integrating DBA Security Into an Application
        Working With Styling Resources and HTML Launch Pages
        Branding Applications
        Managing Application Performance
        Impact Analysis
        Source and Version Control
      Planning for Disaster Recovery
        Disaster Recovery
      Designing the WebFOCUS 8 Architecture
        Review the WebFOCUS Solution
        WebFOCUS Multi-Layered Design
        WebFOCUS Architecture Models
        Considerations for Clustered Architecture Models
        WebFOCUS Environments
      Implementing High Availability, Failover, and Load Management
        Defining High Availability
        Implementing High Availability, Failover, and Load Management
      Defining Security
        Authentication
        Authorization
        Data Integrity
        Confidentiality
      Administering WebFOCUS 8
        Installation of Unplanned Service Packs or Hotfixes
        WebFOCUS Administration
        Auditing Configuration Changes and Customizations
      Promoting Resources Across WebFOCUS 8 Environments
        Terminology
        Introduction
        Change Management Prerequisites
        Change Management Authorization Privileges
        Creating and Exporting Change Management Packages
        Copying Change Management Packages Between Environments
        Importing Change Management Packages
        Approaches to Using Change Management
      Monitoring and Managing Resources
        Resource Analyzer Workflows
        Configuring Monitoring Levels
        Determining Maintenance Schedule
        Integrating Event Routing With Resource Analyzer
        Reporting on Collected Resource Analyzer Data
        Keeping Archived Logs for Historical and Auditing Use
        Migrating Resource Analyzer Data
        Considerations for Clustered Architecture Models
      Conducting Performance Benchmarks, Analysis, and Tuning
        Introduction
        Conducting Performance Benchmarks
        Analyzing Performance Benchmark Results
        Tuning Components
      Deploying the WebFOCUS 8 Application to Production
        Production Checklist
        Training the Users
        Supporting the Application
        Maintaining the Application
      Implementing the WebFOCUS 8 Roadmap
        Introduction
        Processes and Procedures
        Prerequisites
      Launch PDF
  Security and Administration
    WebFOCUS Security and Administration
  Reporting Language
    Creating Reports With WebFOCUS Language
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
        Selecting a Report Output Destination
      Displaying Report Data
        Using Display Commands in a Request
        Displaying Individual Values
        Adding Values
        Counting Values
        Expanding Byte Precision for COUNT and LIST
        Maximum Number of Display Fields Supported in a Request
        Manipulating Display Fields With Prefix Operators
        Displaying Pop-up Field Descriptions for Column Titles
      Sorting Tabular Reports
        Sorting Tabular Reports Overview
        Sorting Rows
        Sorting Columns
        Controlling Display of Sort Field Values
        Reformatting Sort Fields
        Manipulating Display Field Values in a Sort Group
        Creating a Matrix Report
        Controlling Collation Sequence
        Specifying the Sort Order
        Ranking Sort Field Values
        Grouping Numeric Data Into Ranges
        Restricting Sort Field Values by Highest/Lowest Rank
        Sorting and Aggregating Report Columns
        Hiding Sort Values
        Sorting With Multiple Display Commands
        Improving Efficiency With External Sorts
        Hierarchical Reporting: BY HIERARCHY
      Selecting Records for Your Report
        Selecting Records Overview
        Choosing a Filtering Method
        Selections Based on Individual Values
        Selection Based on Aggregate Values
        Using Compound Expressions for Record Selection
        Using Operators in Record Selection Tests
        Types of Record Selection Tests
        Selections Based on Group Key Values
        Setting Limits on the Number of Records Read
        Selecting Records Using IF Phrases
        Reading Selection Values From a File
        Assigning Screening Conditions to a File
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Assigning Column Reference Numbers
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With FORECAST
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
        Using Text Fields in DEFINE and COMPUTE
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Including Totals and Subtotals
        Calculating Row and Column Totals
        Including Section Totals and a Grand Total
        Including Subtotals
        Recalculating Values for Subtotal Rows
        Summarizing Alphanumeric Columns
        Manipulating Summary Values With Prefix Operators
        Combinations of Summary Commands
        Producing Summary Columns for Horizontal Sort Fields
        Performing Calculations at Sort Field Breaks
        Suppressing Grand Totals
        Conditionally Displaying Summary Lines and Text
      Using Expressions
        Using Expressions in Commands and Phrases
        Types of Expressions
        Creating a Numeric Expression
        Creating a Date Expression
        Creating a Date-Time Expression
        Creating a Character Expression
        Creating a Variable Length Character Expression
        Creating a Logical Expression
        Creating a Conditional Expression
      Saving and Reusing Your Report Output
        Saving Your Report Output
        Creating a HOLD File
        Holding Report Output in FOCUS Format
        Controlling Attributes in HOLD Master Files
        Keyed Retrieval From HOLD Files
        Saving and Retrieving HOLD Files
        Using DBMS Temporary Tables as HOLD Files
        Creating SAVE and SAVB Files
        Creating a PCHOLD File
        Choosing Output File Formats
        Using Text Fields in Output Files
        Creating a Delimited Sequential File
        Saving Report Output in INTERNAL Format
        Creating A Subquery or Sequential File With HOLD FORMAT SQL_SCRIPT
        Creating a Structured HOLD File
        Specifying MIME Types for WebFOCUS Reports
      Choosing a Display Format
        Report Display Formats
        Preserving Leading and Internal Blanks in Report Output
        Using Web Display Format: HTML
        Using Print Display Formats: PDF, PS
        Using Word Processing Display Formats: DOC, WP
        Using Excel Display Formats: XLSX, EXL2K, EXL97, EXCEL
        Using PowerPoint PPT Display Format
        Using PowerPoint PPTX Display Format
      Linking a Report to Other Resources
        Linking Using StyleSheets
        Linking to Another Report
        Linking to a URL
        Linking to a JavaScript Function
        Linking to a WebFOCUS Maintain Procedure
        Creating Multiple Drill-Down Links
        Creating Parameters
        Linking With Conditions
        Linking From a Graphic Image
        Specifying a Base URL
        Specifying a Target Frame
        Creating a Compound Report
        Creating a PDF Compound Report With Drill Through Links
      Navigating Within an HTML Report
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Adding the HTML Table of Contents Tree Control to Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Navigating a Multi-Page Report With the WebFOCUS Viewer
        Linking Report Pages
      Bursting Reports Into Multiple HTML Files
        Bursting Reports Overview
      Handling Records With Missing Field Values
        Irrelevant Report Data
        Missing Field Values
        Handling a Missing Segment Instance
        Setting the NODATA Character String
      Joining Data Sources
        Types of Joins
        How the JOIN Command Works
        Creating an Equijoin
        Using a Conditional Join
        Full Outer Joins for Relational Data Sources
        Adding a New Fact To Multi-Fact Synonyms: JOIN AS_ROOT
        Joining From a Multi-Fact Synonym
        Invoking Context Analysis for a Star Schema With a Fan Trap
        Adding DBA Restrictions to the Join Condition: SET DBAJOIN
        Preserving Virtual Fields During Join Parsing
        Displaying Joined Structures
        Clearing Joined Structures
      Merging Data Sources
        Merging Data
        Types of MATCH Processing
        MATCH Processing With Common High-Order Sort Fields
        Fine-Tuning MATCH Processing
        Universal Concatenation
        Merging Concatenated Data Sources
        Cartesian Product
      Formatting Reports: An Overview
        What Kinds of Formatting Can I Do?
        How to Specify Formatting in a Report
        Standard and Legacy Formatting
        Techniques for Quick and Easy Formatting
        Navigating From a Report to Other Resources
      Creating and Managing a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Creating a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        General WebFOCUS StyleSheet Syntax
        Reusing WebFOCUS StyleSheet Declarations With Macros
        WebFOCUS StyleSheet Attribute Inheritance
      Controlling Report Formatting
        Generating an Internal Cascading Style Sheet for HTML Reports
        Selecting a Unit of Measurement
        Conditionally Formatting, Displaying, and Linking in a StyleSheet
        Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Conditionally Including Summary Lines, Underlines, Skipped Lines, and Page Breaks
        Controlling the Display of Empty Reports
        Formatting a Report Using Only StyleSheet Defaults
      Identifying a Report Component in a WebFOCUS StyleSheet
        Identifying an Entire Report, Column, or Row
        Identifying Tags for SUBTOTAL and GRANDTOTAL Lines
        Identifying Data
        Identifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or FML Free Text
        Identifying a Page Number, Underline, or Skipped Line
      Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        What Is a Cascading Style Sheet?
        Why Use an External Cascading Style Sheet?
        Formatting a Report With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Working With an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Applying External Cascading Style Sheet Formatting
        Combining an External CSS With Other Formatting Methods
        Linking to an External Cascading Style Sheet
        Inheritance and External Cascading Style Sheets
        Using External Cascading Style Sheets With Non-HTML Reports
        Requirements for Using an External Cascading Style Sheet
        FAQ About Using External Cascading Style Sheets
        Troubleshooting External Cascading Style Sheets
      Laying Out the Report Page
        Selecting Page Size, Orientation, and Color
        Setting Page Margins
        Positioning a Report Component
        Arranging Columns on a Page
        Suppressing Column Display
        Inserting a Page Break
        Inserting Page Numbers
        Adding Grids and Borders
        Defining Borders Around Boxes With PPTX and PDF Formats
        Displaying Superscripts On Data, Heading, and Footing Lines
        Adding Underlines and Skipped Lines
        Removing Blank Lines From a Report
        Adding an Image to a Report
        Associating Bar Graphs With Report Data
        Working With Mailing Labels and Multi-Pane Pages
      Using Headings, Footings, Titles, and Labels
        Creating Headings and Footings
        Including an Element in a Heading or Footing
        Repeating Headings and Footings on Panels in PDF Report Output
        Customizing a Column Title
        Controlling Column Title Underlining Using a SET Command
        Controlling Column Title Underlining Using a StyleSheet Attribute
        Creating Labels to Identify Data
        Formatting a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Applying Font Attributes to a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Adding Borders and Grid Lines
        Justifying a Heading, Footing, Title, or Label
        Choosing an Alignment Method for Heading and Footing Elements
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element in an HTML, XLSX, EXL2K, or PDF Report
        Aligning a Heading or Footing Element Across Columns in an HTML or PDF Report
        Aligning Content in a Multi-Line Heading or Footing
        Positioning Headings, Footings, or Items Within Them
        Controlling the Vertical Positioning of a Heading or Footing
        Placing a Report Heading or Footing on Its Own Page
      Formatting Report Data
        Specifying Font Format in a Report
        Specifying Background Color in a Report
        Specifying Data Format in a Report
        Positioning Data in a Report
      Creating a Graph
        Content Analysis: Determining Graphing Objectives
        The GRAPH Command
        Creating an HTML5 Graph
        Selecting a Graph Type
        Selecting Values for the X and Y Axes
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Plotting Dates in Graphs
        Refining the Data Set For Your Graph
        Displaying Missing Data Values in a Graph
        Applying Conditional Styling to a Graph
        Linking Graphs to Other Resources
        Adding Labels to a Graph
        Applying Custom Styling to a Graph
        Saving a Graph as an Image File
        Printing a Graph
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Creating a Free-Form Report
        Creating a Free-Form Report
        Designing a Free-Form Report
      Using SQL to Create Reports
        Supported and Unsupported SQL Statements
        Using SQL Translator Commands
        SQL Translator Support for Date, Time, and Timestamp Fields
        Index Optimized Retrieval
        TABLEF Optimization
        SQL INSERT, UPDATE, and DELETE Commands
      Improving Report Processing
        Rotating a Data Structure for Enhanced Retrieval
        Optimizing Retrieval Speed for FOCUS Data Sources
        Automatic Indexed Retrieval
        Data Retrieval Using TABLEF
        Preserving the Internal Matrix of Your Last Report
        Compiling Expressions
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Table Syntax Summary and Limits
        TABLE Syntax Summary
        TABLEF Syntax Summary
        MATCH Syntax Summary
        FOR Syntax Summary
        TABLE Limits
      Referring to Fields in a Report Request
        Referring to an Individual Field
        Referring to Fields Using Qualified Field Names
        Referring to All of the Fields in a Segment
        Displaying a List of Field Names
      Launch PDF
    Describing Data With WebFOCUS Language
      Understanding a Data Source Description
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        What Is a Data Source Description?
        How an Application Uses a Data Source Description
        What Does a Master File Describe?
        Creating a Data Source Description
        Naming a Master File
        What Is in a Master File?
      Identifying a Data Source
        ACCESSFILE
        FILENAME
        SUFFIX
        BYTEORDER
        IOTYPE
        REMARKS
        Specifying a Physical File Name: DATASET
        MFD_PROFILE
      Describing a Group of Fields
        Defining a Single Group of Fields
        Identifying a Logical View: Redefining a Segment
        Relating Multiple Groups of Fields
        Logical Dependence: The Parent-Child Relationship
        Logical Independence: Multiple Paths
        Cardinal Relationships Between Segments
        One-to-One Relationship
        One-to-Many Relationship
        Many-to-Many Relationship
        Recursive Relationships
        Relating Segments From Different Types of Data Sources
        Rotating a Data Source: An Alternate View
      Describing an Individual Field
        Field Characteristics
        FIELDNAME
        ALIAS
        The Displayed Data Type: USAGE
        The Stored Data Type: ACTUAL
        Adding a Geographic Role for a Field
        Null or MISSING Values: MISSING
        Describing an FML Hierarchy
        WITHIN Attribute
        ACCEPT
        Specifying Acceptable Values for a Dimension
        TITLE
        DESCRIPTION
        Multilingual Metadata
        DEFINE Attribute
        Describing a Calculated Value: COMPUTE
        Describing a Filter: FILTER
        SORTOBJ
        Calling a DEFINE FUNCTION in a Master File
        Date System Amper Variables
        Parameterizing Master and Access File Values Using Variables
        Converting Alphanumeric Dates to WebFOCUS Dates
      Describing a Sequential, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Sequential Data Source Formats
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Sequential Data Source
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM or ISAM Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Free-Format Data Source
        Describing a Multiply Occurring Field in a Fixed-Format, VSAM, or ISAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a Non-FOCUS Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        Describing a Token-Delimited Data Source
      Describing a FOCUS Data Source
        Types of FOCUS Data Sources
        Designing a FOCUS Data Source
        Describing a Single Segment
        GROUP Attribute
        ACCEPT Attribute
        INDEX
        Describing a Partitioned FOCUS Data Source
        Multi-Dimensional Index (MDI)
      Defining a Join in a Master File
        Join Types
        Static Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = KU and KM
        Using Cross-Referenced Descendant Segments: SEGTYPE = KL and KLU
        Dynamic Joins Defined in the Master File: SEGTYPE = DKU and DKM
        Conditional Joins in the Master File
        Comparing Static and Dynamic Joins
        Joining to One Cross-Referenced Segment From Several Host Segments
        Creating a Cluster Master File
      Creating a Business View of a Master File
        Grouping Business Logic In a Business View
      Checking and Changing a Master File: CHECK
        Checking a Data Source Description
        CHECK Command Display
        PICTURE Option
        HOLD Option
      Providing Data Source Security: DBA
        Introduction to Data Source Security
        Implementing Data Source Security
        ACCESS
        RESTRICT
        Controlling the Source of Access Restrictions in a Multi-file Structure
        Adding DBA Restrictions to the Join Condition
        DBAFILE
        Summary of Security Attributes
        ENCRYPT
        FOCEXEC Security
      Creating and Rebuilding a Data Source
        CREATE
        REBUILD
        Optimizing File Size: The REBUILD Subcommand
        REORG
        Indexing Fields: The INDEX Subcommand
        Creating an External Index: The EXTERNAL INDEX Subcommand
        Checking Data Source Integrity: The CHECK Subcommand
        Changing the Data Source Creation Date and Time: The TIMESTAMP Subcommand
        Converting Legacy Dates: The DATE NEW Subcommand
        Creating a Multi-Dimensional Index: The MDINDEX Subcommand
      Master Files and Diagrams
        EMPLOYEE Data Source
        JOBFILE Data Source
        EDUCFILE Data Source
        SALES Data Source
        CAR Data Source
        LEDGER Data Source
        FINANCE Data Source
        REGION Data Source
        EMPDATA Data Source
        TRAINING Data Source
        COURSE Data Source
        JOBHIST Data Source
        JOBLIST Data Source
        LOCATOR Data Source
        PERSINFO Data Source
        SALHIST Data Source
        VIDEOTRK, MOVIES, and ITEMS Data Sources
        VIDEOTR2 Data Source
        Gotham Grinds Data Sources
        Century Corp Data Sources
      Error Messages
        Displaying Messages
      Launch PDF
    Developing Reporting Applications
      WebFOCUS Application Logic
        Three-Tier Application Logic
        Deploying a Partitioned ProjectPublishing an Application
        WebFOCUS Components
        Storing and Searching for Application Files
        Section 508 Accessibility in WebFOCUS
      Managing Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Procedures and Metadata on the Application Tree
        Managing Applications and Paths
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Application Metadata Commands and Catalog Metadata
        APP HELP
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
        Accessing Metadata and Procedures
        Allocating Temporary Files
        Temporary Space Usage and Location
        Temporary Disk Space Usage for Non-PDS Deployment
        Application Tools
      Coding a User Interface
        Which Tools Can You Use?
        The WebFOCUS Client
        Using the Servlet
        Using a Dynamic Multiselect Drop-Down List
        Enabling Ad Hoc Reporting
        Validating a Form With JavaScript
         HTML Autoprompt
        Displaying a Report on the Default WebFOCUS Page
        Designing an HTML Page for Report Display
      Enhancing a User Interface
        Displaying a Report in a Helper Application
        Controlling Multiple Reports
        Adding JavaScript for Drill-Down Reporting
        Facilitating Report Manipulation
        Using a Cascading Style Sheet to Standardize Display
        Displaying a Previously Run Report
        Passing a User ID From HTML for a Custom Menu
      Managing Flow of Control in an Application
        Uses for Dialogue Manager
        Dialogue Manager Processing
        Creating a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Customizing a Procedure With Variables
        Creating a Standard Quote-Delimited String
        Creating and Working With Variables
        Using Numeric Amper Variables in Functions
        Controlling the Execution of a Procedure
        Navigating a Procedure
        Enhancing an HTML Webpage With a Procedure
        Issuing Operating System Commands
        Controlling Passwords With Dialogue Manager
        Sending a Message to the Application
        Testing and Debugging a Dialogue Manager Procedure
        Dialogue Manager Process Flow in the Procedure Viewer
        Dialogue Manager Syntax Reference
      Testing and Debugging a Procedure
        Debugging Your Application With Query Commands
        Displaying Combined Structures
        Displaying Virtual Fields
        Displaying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Displaying Available Fields
        Displaying the File Directory Table
        Displaying Field Information for a Master File
        Displaying Data Source Statistics
        Displaying Current ddnames Assigned With FILEDEF
        Displaying Defined Functions
        Displaying HOLD Fields
        Displaying JOIN Structures
        Displaying National Language Support
        Displaying Explanations of Error Messages
        Displaying the Current Search Path
        Displaying the Release Number
        Displaying the Values of a Remote Server
        Displaying Parameter Settings
        Displaying Parameters That Cannot Be Set in an Area
        Displaying Graph Parameters
        Displaying the Site Code of the Connected Server
        Displaying Command Statistics
        Displaying StyleSheet Parameter Settings
        Displaying Information About the SU Machine
        Displaying Data Sources Specified With USE
        Displaying Global Variable Values
        Identifying the Files Being Used
        Reporting Dynamically From System Tables
      Managing the WebFOCUS Environment
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment
         Refreshing or Removing an Environment
      Accessing a FOCUS Data Source
        The USE Command
        Identifying a FOCUS Data Source
        The Developer Studio Use Tool
        Using Alternative File Specifications
        Identifying a New Data Source
        Protecting a Data Source
        Concatenating Data Sources
        Displaying the Current USE Options
        Clearing the USE Options
      Customizing Your Environment
        When Do You Use the SET Command?
        Ways to Issue a SET Command
        Issuing a SET Command With the Set Tool
        Coding a SET Command
        Types of SET Parameters
        SET Parameter Syntax
      Defining and Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Allocating WebFOCUS Files
        Application Files Under Windows
        Extract Files Under Windows
        Work Files Under Windows
        Determining If A File Exists Under Windows
        WebFOCUS Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under MVS
        Extract Files Under MVS
        Work Files Under MVS
        Reviewing Attributes of Allocated Files Under MVS
        Application Files Under UNIX
        Extract Files Under UNIX
        Work Files Under UNIX
        Determining If A File Exists Under UNIX
      Using the Command Console
        Command Console Window
        Working in the Command Console
      Euro Currency Support
        Integrating the Euro Currency
        Converting Currencies
        Creating the Currency Data Source
        Identifying Fields That Contain Currency Data
        Activating the Currency Data Source
        Processing Currency Data
        Querying the Currency Data Source in Effect
        Punctuating Numbers
        Selecting an Extended Currency Symbol
      Launch PDF
    Using Functions
      How to Use This Manual
        Available Languages
        Operating Systems
      Introducing Functions
        Using Functions
        Types of Functions
        Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
      Accessing and Calling a Function
        Calling a Function
        Supplying an Argument in a Function
        Calling a Function From a DEFINE, COMPUTE, or VALIDATE Command
        Calling a Function From a Dialogue Manager Command
        Calling a Function From Another Function
        Calling a Function in WHERE or IF Criteria
        Calling a Function in WHEN Criteria
        Calling a Function From a RECAP Command
        Storing and Accessing an External Function
      Character Functions
        Character Function Notes
        ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a String
        ASIS: Distinguishing Between Space and Zero
        BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
        BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as an Integer
        BYTVAL: Translating a Character to Decimal
        CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a String
        CHKNUM: Checking a String for Numeric Format
        CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
        CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
        EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
        LCWORD: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD2: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LCWORD3: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a String
        LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
        PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
        PATTERN: Generating a Pattern From a String
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
        REVERSE: Reversing the Characters in a String
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String
        SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
        SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
        SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
        STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
        STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
        XMLDECOD: Decoding XML-Encoded Characters
        XMLENCOD: XML-Encoding Characters
      Variable Length Character Functions
        Overview
        LENV: Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field
        LOCASV: Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String
        POSITV: Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring
        SUBSTV: Extracting a Variable Length Substring
        TRIMV: Removing Characters From a String
        UPCASV: Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String
      Simplified Character Functions
        CHAR_LENGTH: Returning the Length in Characters of a String
        DIGITS: Converting a Number to a Character String
        LOWER: Returning a String With All Letters Lowercase
        LPAD: Left-Padding a Character String
        LTRIM: Removing Blanks From the Left End of a String
        POSITION: Returning the First Position of a Substring in a Source String
        RPAD: Right-Padding a Character String
        RTRIM: Removing Blanks From the Right End of a String
        SUBSTRING: Extracting a Substring From a Source String
        TOKEN: Extracting a Token From a String
        TRIM_: Removing a Leading Character, Trailing Character, or Both From a String
        UPPER: Returning a String With All Letters Uppercase
      Character Functions for DBCS Code Pages
        DCTRAN: Translating A Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character to Another
        DEDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
        DSTRIP: Removing a Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character From a String
        DSUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
        JPTRANS: Converting Japanese Specific Characters
        KKFCUT: Truncating a String
        SFTDEL: Deleting the Shift Code From DBCS Data
        SFTINS: Inserting the Shift Code Into DBCS Data
      Maintain-specific Character Functions
        CHAR2INT: Translating a Character Into an Integer Value
        INT2CHAR: Translating an Integer Value Into a Character
        LCWORD and LCWORD2: Converting a Character String to Mixed-Case
        LENGTH: Determining the Length of a Character String
        LJUST: Left-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        LOWER: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
        MASK: Extracting or Adding Characters
        MNTGETTOK: Extracting Tokens From a String Function
        NLSCHR: Converting Characters From the Native English Code Page
        OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String (Maintain)
        POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring (Maintain)
        RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String (Maintain)
        SELECTS: Decoding a Value From a Stack
        STRAN: Substituting One Substring for Another
        STRCMP: Comparing Character Strings
        STRICMP: Comparing Character Strings and Ignoring Case
        STRNCMP: Comparing Character Substrings
        STRTOKEN: Extracting a Substring Based on Delimiters
        SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring (Maintain)
        TRIM: Removing Trailing Occurrences (Maintain)
        TRIMLEN: Determining the Length of a String Excluding Trailing Spaces
        UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase (Maintain)
      Data Source and Decoding Functions
        DB_EXPR: Inserting an SQL Expression Into a Request
        DB_INFILE: Testing Values Against a File or an SQL Subquery
        DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving Data Source Values
        DECODE: Decoding Values
        FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in a Data Source
        LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
        LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
      Date Functions
        Overview of Date Functions
        Using Standard Date Functions
        DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
        DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
        DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
        DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
        DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
        DPART: Extracting a Component From a Date
        FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
        FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
        FIYYQ: Converting a Calendar Date to a Financial Date
        TODAY: Returning the Current Date
        Using Legacy Date Functions
        AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months
        AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days
        CHGDAT: Changing How a Date String Displays
        DA Functions: Converting a Legacy Date to an Integer
        DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
        DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
        DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
        GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
        JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
        YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
      Date-Time Functions
        Using Date-Time Functions
        CVTSTIME: Converting the System Date and Time (OpenVMS Only)
        GETSTIME: Extracting the System Date and Time (OpenVMS Only)
        HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
        HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
        HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Date Format
        HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
        HDTTM: Converting a Date Value to a Date-Time Value
        HEXTR: Extracting Components of a Date-Time Value and Setting Remaining Components to Zero
        HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time in a Date-Time Field
        HGETZ: Storing the Current Coordinated Universal Time in a Date-Time Field
        HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
        HHMS: Converting a Date-Time Value to a Time Value
        HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Date-Time Value
        HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to Midnight
        HMASK: Extracting Date-Time Components and Preserving Remaining Components
        HNAME: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Alphanumeric Format
        HPART: Retrieving a Date-Time Component as a Numeric Value
        HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
        HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
        HTMTOTS or TIMETOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
        HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-Time Value
        WRTSTIME: Converting Dates to 64-Bit DEC Date/Time Format (OpenVMS Only)
      Simplified Date and Date-Time Functions
        DTADD: Incrementing a Date or Date-Time Component
        DTDIFF: Returning the Number of Component Boundaries Between Date or Date-Time Values
        DTPART: Returning a Date or Date-Time Component in Integer Format
        DTRUNC: Returning the Start of a Date Period for a Given Date
      Maintain-specific Date and Time Functions
        Maintain-specific Standard Date and Time Functions
      Format Conversion Functions
        ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
        EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
        FPRINT: Converting Fields to Alphanumeric Format
        FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
        HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Integer to a Character
        ITONUM: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Double-Precision Format
        ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
        ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
        PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
        PTOA: Converting a Packed-Decimal Number to Alphanumeric Format
        TSTOPACK: Converting an MSSQL or Sybase Timestamp Column to Packed Decimal
        UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
        XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
      Maintain-specific Light Update Support Functions
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Importing a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      Numeric Functions
        ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
        ASIS: Distinguishing Blank From Zero
        BAR: Producing a Bar Chart
        CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
        DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
        EXP: Raising e to the Nth Power
        EXPN: Evaluating a Number in Scientific Notation
        FMLINFO: Returning FOR Values
        FMLLIST: Returning an FML Tag List
        FMLFOR: Retrieving FML Tag Values
        FMLCAP: Retrieving FML Hierarchy Captions
        INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
        LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
        MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
        MIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate
        NORMSDST and NORMSINV: Calculating Normal Distributions
        PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
        RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
        SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
        XIRR: Calculating the Modified Internal Return Rate (Periodic or Non-Periodic)
      Maintain-specific Script Functions
        IWCLink: Displaying a URL in a Browser or Frame
        IWCSwitchToSecure and IWCSwitchToUnsecure: Turning the Secure Sockets Layer On and Off
        IWCTrigger: Calling a Maintain Function From a Script Handler
        IWC.FindAppCGIValue: Finding a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable Value
        IWC.GetAppCGIValue: Retrieving a WebFOCUS Parameter or Variable
      System Functions
        CHECKPRIVS: Retrieving the Privilege State for the Connected User
        CLSDDREC: Closing All Files Opened by the PUTDDREC Function
        FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
        FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
        FINDMEM: Finding a Member of a Partitioned Data Set
        FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
        GETCOOKI: Retrieving a Browser Cookie Value
        GETHEADR: Retrieving an HTTP Header Variable
        GETPDS: Determining If a Member of a Partitioned Data Set Exists
        GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
        GRPLIST: Retrieving the Group List of the Connected User
        JOBNAME: Retrieving the Current Process Identification String
        MVSDYNAM: Passing a DYNAM Command to the Command Processor
        PUTCOOKI: Submitting a Value to a Browser Cookie
        PUTDDREC: Writing a Character String as a Record in a Sequential File
        SLEEP: Suspending Execution for a Given Number of Seconds
        SPAWN: Creating a Subprocess From a Procedure
        SYSTEM: Calling a System Program
        SYSVAR: Retrieving the Value of a z/OS System Variable
      Creating a Subroutine
        Writing a Subroutine
        Compiling and Storing a Subroutine
        Testing the Subroutine
        Using a Custom Subroutine: The MTHNAM Subroutine
        Subroutines Written in REXX
      Launch PDF
  Reporting Tools
    Creating Compound Reports With Document Composer
      Document Composer Overview
        Uses for Document Composer
        Getting Started With Document Composer
      Creating Compound Reports
        Creating a Compound Layout Report
        Output Formats for Compound Reports
        Adding a Reporting Object to a Compound Report
      Viewing Pages in Document Composer
        On Demand Viewing in Document Composer
        Viewing Simulated or Live Data in Document Composer
        Moving Pages With the Thumbnails Tab
        Positioning Objects and Keyboard Shortcuts
      Using Page Masters in Document Composer
        Creating, Saving, and Editing Page Masters in Document Composer
        Using an Existing Page Master in Another Document
      Controlling the Overflow and Relative Positioning of Objects
        Setting Overflow Options in Document Composer
        Using Fixed Overflow in Document Composer
        Using Flowing Overflow in Document Composer
        Setting a Relative Position Between Objects in Document Composer
        Adding Different Headers and Footers on an Overflow Page
      Applying a Table of Contents and Bookmarks
        Adding a Table of Contents Page
        Using Bookmarks in Document Composer
      Using Drill Through in Document Composer
        Using Drill Through
      Using Page Layouts in Document Composer
        Using Page Layouts
      Formatting Text in Document Composer
        Formatting Text Elements
      Adding Page Numbers to Your Document
        Adding Page Numbers to Your Document
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards in Document Composer
        Using Active Technologies Reports to Create Active Dashboards
        Positioning Report Objects in the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Working With Active Technologies Form Controls
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Designing a User Interface for a Web Application With the HTML Composer
      Using HTML Composer
        Uses for HTML Composer
        Getting Started With HTML Composer
        Creating a Report Page Layout
      Creating and Using Parameters in HTML Composer
        Creating Parameter Values
        Using Controls to Supply Incoming Parameter Values
        Using Input Controls to Supply Parameter Values
        Supplying Parameter Values to External Reports
        Styling Your Layout
        Specifying Browser Defaults With the Style Composer
        Laying Out Objects With HTML Composer
        Controlling the HTML Composer Environment
        Adding ReportCaster Schedule Capability to HTML Composer
        Running a Managed Reporting Report Deferred From HTML Composer
        Using JavaScript Code With HTML Composer Pages
        Specifying an HTML File as a Load Screen
      Using Templates in HTML Composer
        Understanding and Using Templates
        Manipulating the Objects of Templates
      Creating Guided Report Forms
        Getting Started With Guided Reports
      Chaining Controls for Dependencies in HTML Composer
        Automatically Chaining Parameters From the New Parameters Dialog Box
        Chaining Controls on the Parameters Tab
        Setting the Default Link
        Applying Conditions to a Chain
        Populating Controls One at a Time
        Using the Chain Separator and Line Separator
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards With HTML Composer
        Binding Objects to an Active Technologies Report
        Configuring Active Technologies Controls in HTML Composer
        Refreshing Active Technologies Reports
        Exporting the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Scheduling and Distributing Active Technologies Dashboards
        Usage Notes for Active Technologies Dashboards Created With HTML Composer
      Report Library Integration in HTML Composer
        Integrating the Report Library
      Creating a Rich Internet Application (RIA) With HTML Composer
        RIA Overview
        Creating an RIA With HTML Composer
        Usage Notes and RIA Example
      Using Maps in HTML Composer
        Configuring WebFOCUS for Maps
        Creating WebFOCUS Procedures for Maps
        Adding a Map
        Customizing the Map Properties
        Integrating WebFOCUS With Maps
        Using the Maps Functionality
        Chaining for Maps
        Using JavaScript Code With Maps
        ESRI Flex Viewer Integration
      Using Visual Discovery in HTML Composer
        Creating Visual Discovery Output Files
        Developing an Analytic Dashboard From Developer Studio
        Working With Visual Discovery Controls on the Web
        Accessing Visual Discovery Online Help
        Visual Discovery Tutorial
      Tutorial: Creating a Reporting Application Using HTML Composer
        HTML Composer Tutorial Overview
        Creating the Century Project
        Creating the Graph
        Creating the Layout and the Report
        Running the Reporting Application
      Accessing an HTML Composer Application on a Mobile Device
        Using an HTML Composer Application on an iPad or iPhone
        Using an HTML Application on an Android Device
      CSS Support Matrix for Browsers
        CSS Support Matrix for Internet Explorer
        CSS Support Matrix for Firefox, Chrome, Safari, and Opera
      CSS Class Mapping
        CSS Class Mapping List
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Creating Reports with Report Painter
      Report Painter Basics
        Report Painter Layout and Toolbars
        Using the Object Inspector
        Viewing Options
        Business Intelligence Features
        Report Painter Limitations
        Field Properties and Report Options Dialog Boxes
      Creating Reports With Report Painter
        Adding a Field as a Report Column
        Displaying Data
        Sorting Data
        Selecting Data
        Universal Concatenation in Report Painter
        Navigating Sort Groups From a Table of Contents
        Including a Total or Subtotal
        Adding a Page Heading or Footing
        Formatting a Column
        Choosing an Output Format
        Creating a Drill Down Procedure
        Creating a Multiple Drill Down Procedure
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Running and Saving a Report
        Creating Precision Reports
        Using User Defined Functions
      Creating Guided Reports
        Creating a Guided Report
      Styling Reports With Report Painter
        Styling With Fonts, Colors, and Grids
        Styling or Aligning an Individual Item in a Text String
        Aligning Fields and Text in Headings and Footings
        Defining a Conditional Report Style
        Visualizing Trends in Reports
        Adding an Image
        Using the StyleSheet File Selector
        Generating Format-Specific Style Blocks
        Using Excel Templates
        Using Excel Named Ranges in WebFOCUS Applications
        Generating Overflow Sheets for an Excel 2000 Report
        Using PowerPoint Output Format and PowerPoint Templates
        Setting Up the Report Page
        Creating Mailing Labels
        Styling Different Elements of a Tabular Active Technologies Report
      Creating Temporary Fields With Report Painter
        Creating a Calculated Value With Report Painter
        Creating User Defined Functions
        Creating Expressions for Temporary Fields
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Forecast
        Calculating Trends and Predicting Values With Multivariate REGRESS
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Active Technologies User's Guide
      Active Technologies
        Active Technologies Report Overview
        Available Output Formats for Using Active Technologies
        Product Requirements for Using Active Technologies
      Creating Active Technologies Components With InfoAssist
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Creating an Active Technologies Chart
        Creating an Active Technologies Dashboard
      Creating Active Technologies Reports With Report Painter
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Styling Different Elements of a Tabular Active Technologies Report
      Using an Active Technologies Report
        Navigating Between Pages
        Filtering and Highlighting Data
        Calculating Data
        Sorting Data
        Using Tab Window Navigation
        Controlling Report Display
        Using Data Visualization
        Viewing Data as a Chart
        Using the Grid Tool
        Using the Chart/Rollup Tool
        Using the Pivot Tool
        Saving, Exporting, and Sending Active Technologies Reports
      Active Technologies for Mobile Web Apps
        Requirements for Mobile Web Apps
        Mobile Web Apps Features
        Standard Gesture Support
        Running an Active Technologies Report on a Mobile Device
        Running an Active Technologies Dashboard on a Mobile Device
      Working With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Active Technologies Report Integration With Adobe Flash Player
        Using the Pivot Tool With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Using the Chart/Rollup Tool With Active Technologies Reports for Adobe Flash Player
        Formatting Legend Options for an Active Technologies Chart for Adobe Flash Player
        Using an Alternate Adobe Flex Compiler With the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Setting the Maximum Java Heap Size When Using an Alternate Adobe Flex Compiler
        Customizing Containers and the Dashboard Bar
        Using Active Technologies for PDF
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards in Document Composer
        Active Technologies Dashboard Overview
        Positioning Report Objects in the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Working With Active Technologies Form Controls
      Using Advanced Design Features for Active Technologies Dashboards
        Overview
        Changing the Background Color of an Individual Tab
        Controlling Active Technologies With Custom JavaScript Code
        Working With the Global Filter Feature
        Managing Active Technologies Form Controls
      Creating Active Technologies Dashboards With HTML Composer
        Binding Objects to an Active Technologies Report
        Configuring Active Technologies Controls in HTML Composer
        Refreshing Active Technologies Reports
        Exporting the Active Technologies Dashboard
        Scheduling and Distributing Active Technologies Dashboards
        Usage Notes for Active Technologies Dashboards Created With HTML Composer
      Creating Active Technologies Components With WebFOCUS Syntax
        Creating an Active Technologies Report
        Creating an Active Technologies Chart
        Creating an Active Technologies Dashboard
      Chart Type Syntax
        Chart Type Syntax Introduction
        FLEX Default Flash Chart Type
        AHTML Default JavaScript Chart Type and FLEX and APDF Flash Chart Type for Disconnected Mode
        FLEX Flash Chart Type and AHTML JavaScript Chart Type
        Chart Types Mapped to Default Chart Types
        Additional Active Technologies Chart Types Available With CHART-TYPE Syntax
      Creating a Custom Icon Set for an Active Technologies Report or Dashboard
        Overview
        Understanding the Icon Section in the Configuration File
        Customizing the Combination of Icons in a Set
        Using Your Own Icon Image Files
        Icon Set Details
      Defining Custom Styles for an Active Technologies Report or Dashboard
        Overview
        Customizing the Style Section in the Configuration File
        Active Technologies Classes
      SET Commands for Active Technologies
        SET Commands
      Launch PDF
  InfoAssist
    Introducing InfoAssist
      InfoAssist
      Personal InfoAssist
      InfoAssist Basic
      InfoMini
      Accessibility Compliance With InfoAssist
    Getting Started With InfoAssist
      Accessing InfoAssist
      Accessing InfoAssist From a WebFOCUS Desktop Product
      Accessing Personal InfoAssist
      Accessing InfoAssist Basic
      Accessing InfoMini
      Accessing InfoAssist Options
      Changing User Preferences
    Navigating the InfoAssist Interface
      InfoAssist Application Window
      Application Main Menu
      Quick Access Toolbar
      Ribbon
      Home Tab
      Insert Tab
      Format Tab
      Data Tab
      Slicers Tab
      Layout Tab
      View Tab
      Field Tab
      Series Tab
      Understanding the Resources Panel
      Understanding the Results Panel
      Using the Navigation Taskbar
      Using the Status Bar
    Creating and Customizing Reports
      Creating a Basic Report
      Styling Reports
      Changing a Field Format
      Using Custom Reporting Features
      Creating Customized Report Outputs
    Creating and Customizing Charts
      Visualizing Your Data With Charts
      Selecting a Chart
      Creating a Chart
      Accessing Chart Formatting Tools
      Formatting a Series
      Formatting Data Labels
      Formatting a Legend
      Formatting Gridlines
      Formatting Axis Labels
      Formatting a Frame and a Background
      Formatting a Gauge Chart
      Formatting Page Headings and Page Footings
      Using Additional Formatting Features
    Creating and Customizing Documents
      Accessing Document View
      Building a Document
    Creating HOLD Files
      Valuable Applications of HOLD Files
      Storing HOLD Files
      Output Formats for Reports and Charts
      Creating Hold Files
      Creating a Subquery Filter Using a HOLD File
      Document Mode
    Creating Multi-page Documents and Dashboards
      Creating Multi-page Documents
      Creating a Multi-page Active Technologies Dashboard
      Navigating the Page Menu
      Using the Active Cache Option
      Enabling Active Cache Through InfoAssist
    Creating Active Technologies Components With InfoAssist
      Creating an Active Technologies Report
      Creating an Active Technologies Chart
      Creating an Active Technologies Dashboard
    Using Slicers
      Creating Slicers
      Filtering With Slicers
      Edit Slicers Dialog Box
    Building InfoMini Applications
      Understanding InfoMini Applications
      Creating an InfoMini Application
    InfoAssist Warning Messages
      InfoAssist Warning Messages
      Unsupported Syntax and Objects
    Glossary
    Launch PDF
  Managed Reporting
    Managed Reporting
      Introducing WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
        Managed Reporting Overview
        Managed Reporting Concepts
        Managed Reporting Interfaces and Tools
      Launch PDF
    Deferred Report Administration
      Managing Deferred Tickets
        Managing Deferred Workload
        Managing the Deferred Ticket Cleanup Utility
      Customizing the Managed Reporting Deferred Status Interface
        Customizing the Deferred Report Status Screen
      Launch PDF
  Business Intelligence Portal
    Introducing the Business Intelligence Portal
      Introduction to WebFOCUS 8
      Business Intelligence Portal
      Ease of Use
      Accessibility Compliance With the Business Intelligence Portal
    Starting WebFOCUS
      Launching WebFOCUS
      Welcome Page
      Publishing Items
    Domain Content
      Selecting a Domain
      Types of Content in the Tree
      Filtering Content in the Tree
      Searching Content
    Business Intelligence Portal Architecture
      Portal Architecture
      Pages
      Containers
      Content
    Portal Designer Overview
      Launching the Portal Designer
      Portal Designer Interface
      Application Menu
      Quick Access Toolbar
      Ribbon
      Canvas
      Properties Panel
      Breadcrumb Trail
    Portal Components
      Portal
      Menu Bar
      Navigation
      Banners
      Pages
      Columns
      Logo
      Powered by Information Builders Logo
      Containers
      Panels
      Accordion Container
      Tabbed Container
      Responsive Container
      Content
      WebFOCUS Resources
    Customizing a Portal
      Running a Portal
      Adding Pages
      Managing Pages
      Removing Customization
      Using Easy Selector
      Building a Responsive Portal
    Using the Web-Based Tools
      What Are the Web-Based Tools?
      InfoDiscovery Workbench
      InfoAssist
      Working With Alerts
      Creating Reporting Objects
      URL Tool
      Visual Discovery AE
      Text Editor
      Scheduling Tools
      Using Deferred Reporting
    Advanced Coding Techniques and Coding Considerations
      Execution of a Report Procedure or Style Sheet File Using -INCLUDE
      Ignoring Code in a Procedure (FEX)
    Mobile Favorites
      Mobile Favorites Considerations
      The Mobile Favorites List
      Customizing a Mobile Favorites Page
      Adding a Corporate Branding
    Advanced Interactive Features
      Creating Global Filters
      Creating Page Drill-Down Links in BI Portal
    Creating a Custom Sign-in Page
      Creating and Customizing a Sign-in Page
    Glossary
    Launch PDF
  App Studio
    WebFOCUS App Studio Installation and Configuration Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS and WebFOCUS App Studio
        About WebFOCUS and App Studio
        WebFOCUS and App Studio Overview and Architecture
        App Studio Installation and Configuration Steps
      Installing App Studio
        App Studio Requirements
        Installing App Studio
        Verifying App Studio
        Silent App Studio Installation
      Configuring the Web Server or Application Server
        Configuration Options
        Configuring Apache Tomcat
        Configuring Microsoft IIS 6
        Configuring Microsoft IIS to Use the Tomcat Connector (Plug-in)
        Configuring Additional Web and/or Application Servers
      Configuring the Local Reporting Server Security
        WebFOCUS Reporting Server Security and User IDs
      Configuring a Network Installation
        Network Installation Steps
      Troubleshooting App Studio
        Troubleshooting Tips
        Troubleshooting Tools
      Launch PDF
    Getting Started With WebFOCUS App Studio
      Introducing WebFOCUS App Studio
        What Is WebFOCUS App Studio?
        Launching App Studio
        WebFOCUS App Studio Documentation Overview
      Navigating the App Studio Interface
        The App Studio Interface
        Welcome Screen
        Application Menu
        Quick Access Toolbar
        Ribbon
        Panels
        Environments Detail Panel
        Canvas
      Customizing App Studio
        Customizing the Interface
        Setting User Preferences
      WebFOCUS Environments in App Studio
        Environment Structure
        WebFOCUS Environment Properties
      App Studio Data Access and Descriptions
        Accessing Data
      Tutorial: Creating an HTML Page in App Studio
        App Studio Tutorial Overview
        Connecting to the WebFOCUS Retail Data Source
        Creating the Project
        Creating the Multi-Component Procedure
        Creating the HTML Page
        Adding jQuery Animations to the HTML Page
        Running the HTML Page
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS App Studio Reference Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS App Studio
        What Is WebFOCUS App Studio?
        Launching App Studio
        WebFOCUS App Studio Documentation Overview
      Using the WebFOCUS App Studio Interface Components
        Application Button
        Quick Access Toolbar
        Canvas
        Ribbon
        Environments Tree Panel
        Environments Detail Panel
        File/Folder Properties Panel
        View Tabs
      Customizing WebFOCUS App Studio Panels
        Using the Panel Customization Options
        Using Handles
      Creating Reports in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Launching the Report Wizard
        Report Tab
        Format Tab
        Data Tab
        Layout Tab
        View Tab
        Images Tab
        Field Tab
        Appearance Tab
        Active Technologies Report Options Tab
        Matrix Tab
        Modeling Tab
        Creating Precision Reports
      Creating HTML Pages in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Launching the HTML/Document Wizard
        Components Tab
        Controls Tab
        Positioning Tab
        Utilities Tab
        Using Parameters
        Properties Panel
        Settings Panel
        Tasks & Animations Panel
        Requests & Data Sources Panel
        Specifying Browser Defaults With the Style Composer
        Chaining in the HTML Canvas
        Using the Toggle Move Via Drag and Drop Shortcut Option
        Using JavaScript Code With HTML Canvas Pages
        CSS Support Matrix for Internet Explorer
        CSS Class Mapping List
        Designing Content for Smartphones
      Creating Documents in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Launching the HTML/Document Wizard
        Insert Tab
        Positioning Tab
        Utilities Tab
        Thumbnails Panel
        Using the Properties Panel With the Document Canvas
      Creating Charts in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Launching the Chart Wizard
      Creating Visualizations in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Creating Visualizations
      Creating and Editing Metadata in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Launching the Data Source Definition Wizard
        Creating and Editing Synonyms
        Metadata Tab
        Metadata Canvas View Tabs
        Business View Panel
        Dimension Builder Panel
        Analyzing Procedures Using Impact Analysis
        Using the Metadata Shortcut Menu
        Troubleshooting Metadata Errors
      Using the Text Editor Tab in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Text Editor Tab
      Creating Procedures in WebFOCUS App Studio
        Procedure View Panel
        Joins
        Join Tab
        Using Dialogue Manager
        Use Qualified Path Command
      Troubleshooting App Studio
        Troubleshooting Tips
        Troubleshooting Tools
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    App Studio for the Developer Studio User
      Introduction to WebFOCUS App Studio
        The App Studio Paradigm and Terminology
        Installing App Studio and Developer Studio on the Same Machine
        WebFOCUS App Studio Documentation Overview
        Recommendations for Editing Developer Studio Files in App Studio
      Developer Studio and App Studio Interface Differences
        Comparing the Default Developer Studio and App Studio Interfaces
        Main Interface Commands
        WebFOCUS Administration
        Development Areas
        Creating Procedures
        Configuring Environments
        Managing Your WebFOCUS Environment
      Creating Procedures
        Accessing and Using the Procedure View Panel
      Creating Reports
        Creating Reports
        Creating SQL Reports
        Report Options Dialog Box
        Field Properties Dialog Box
        Adding Fields Using Smart Context
        Field Length Limit
        The Object Inspector Setup Tab
        &WFFMT Report Variable
      Creating HTML Pages
        Creating HTML Pages
        Using the Properties Panel
        Using the Settings Panel
        Requests & Data Sources Panel
        Using the Tasks & Animations Panel
        Generating a Chart From a Report
        Adding Additional Visual Discovery Controls
        Making an HTML Composer Page Mobile
      Creating, Editing, and Managing Synonyms and Adapters
        Creating and Editing Synonyms
        Configuring Adapters
        Rebuilding a Data Source
        Automatically Adding Synonyms to Projects
      Developer Studio Functionality Deprecated in App Studio
        Deprecated Functionality List
      Launch PDF
    Getting Started With the Responsive Design Framework Add-on for WebFOCUS App Studio
      Getting Started With the Responsive Design Framework
        Overview
        Contents of the RDF Add-on
        Importing and Configuring the RDF Add-on
        Introducing RDF Panels
        Introducing RDF Templates
        Creating Responsive Pages
        Using the RDF Grid
        Working With Filters
        Integrating Responsive Pages into the BI Portal
      Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Quick Data
    Introduction to the WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-In
      WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-In Overview
      WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-In Configuration and Installation
    Using the WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-in
      Accessing the WebFOCUS Quick Data Add-in in Excel
      WebFOCUS Quick Data Options
      Manually Defining Web Server Connection Settings
    Creating Reports and Using Ad Hoc Forms
      Selecting a Master File
      Creating Report Queries With InfoAssist
      Editing Report Queries in InfoAssist
      Creating Report Queries From Structured Ad Hoc Forms
    Creating Structured Ad Hoc Forms in a WebFOCUS Desktop Product
      Creating Structured Ad Hoc Forms
      Setting Query Properties
      Defining Data Formatting and Layout
    Launch PDF
  ReportCaster
    ReportCaster
      Introducing ReportCaster
        About ReportCaster
        ReportCaster Overview
        Creating a Schedule in a Self-Service Installation
        Section 508 Compliance
        ReportCaster Processing
        Distribution Server Features
      ReportCaster Console
        Using the ReportCaster Console
        ReportCaster Configuration Toolbar Icons
        Server Status
        Viewing the Distribution Server Status
        Stopping and Restarting the Distribution Server
        Failover Distribution Server Status and Tasks
        Job Status
        Job Logs
        ReportCaster Configuration
        Blackout Dates
        Execution Ids
        Global Updates
      Creating and Maintaining Distribution Lists
        Creating a Distribution List
        Editing and Deleting a Distribution List
        Accessing Distribution Lists
        Bursting a Report
        Creating an External Distribution File
        Creating a Dynamic Distribution List
        Specifying Multiple Email Addresses
      Creating a ReportCaster Schedule in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        About the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Creating a Schedule in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        About Tasks in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Notification Options in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        About Properties in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        About Recurrence in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Advanced Settings
        Restricting Distribution of Reports to the Report Library
      Creating a ReportCaster Schedule in the Advanced Scheduling Tool
        Advanced Scheduling Tool
        Advanced Scheduling Tool Quick Access Toolbar
        Advanced Scheduling Ribbon
        Creating a Schedule in the Advanced Scheduling Tool
        About Tasks in the Advanced Scheduling Tool
        Distribution Options in the Advanced Scheduling Tool
        Notification Options
        About Properties in the Advanced Scheduling Tool
        About Recurrences in the Advanced Scheduling Tool
      Maintaining Schedules
        About Maintaining a Schedule in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Editing a Schedule in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Copying a Schedule in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Deleting a Schedule in the Basic Scheduling Tool
        Sharing Schedules
        Publishing Schedules
        Changing Schedule Ownership
      Tracking Schedules
        Log Reports
      Using the Report Library
        About the Report Library
        Viewing Library Content
        Searching in an On-Demand Paging Report
        Creating and Maintaining Library Access Lists
        Accessing Library Access Lists
      ReportCaster Explorer
        Using the ReportCaster Explorer
        Explorer Schedule Toolbar
        Explorer Tree
        Explorer Item List Panel
        Explorer Schedule List Column Information
        Explorer Distribution List Column Information
        Explorer Access List Column Information
        Explorer Library and Watch List Report Column Information
        Explorer Item Options
        Searching Subfolders
      ReportCaster Tracing
        Enabling Tracing
        Servlet Tracing
        Distribution Server Startup Trace Files
        Schedule and Report Tracing
        Distribution Server Initialization Tracing
        Reporting Server Tracing
      Tips and Techniques for Coding a ReportCaster Report
        Editing WebFOCUS Procedures
        Using an Ampersand or a Single Quotation Mark
        HTML and Drill-Down Reports
        Using -HTMLFORM
        Distributing a Table of Contents Report Using ReportCaster
        Data Visualization
        Using the GRAPH FILE Command
        Distributing a Graph Image in a PDF Report
        Financial Modeling Language
        Using the &&KILL_RPC Flag
        Manually Coded Excel Compound Reports
        Compound Reports and Coordinated Compound Reports
        Controlling the Display of Sorted Data With Accordion Reports
        Limitations for Using WebFOCUS Features
        Known Issues When Using WebFOCUS Commands
        Using WebFOCUS Commands With Burst Reports
        Specifying the Language for Scheduled Output
      ReportCaster Formats for Scheduled Output
        AHTML
        ALPHA
        APDF
        COM
        COMMA
        COMT
        DFIX
        DHTML
        DOC
        EXCEL
        EXL07
        EXL07 FORMULA
        EXL07 TEMPLATE
        EXL2K
        EXL2K FORMULA
        EXL2K PIVOT
        EXL2K TEMPLATE
        EXL97
        FLEX
        GIF
        HTML
        HTML5
        HTML ODP
        JPEG
        PDF
        PNG
        PPT
        PPT Template
        PPTX
        PPTX Template
        PS
        SVG
        TAB and TABT
        VISDIS
        VISDISAE
        WK1
        WP
        XML
      WebFOCUS Repository Tables for ReportCaster
        About Repository Reports
        WebFOCUS Repository Tables
      ReportCaster Variables
        ReportCaster Internal Variables
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    ReportCaster Legacy API Developer's Reference
      Introducing the ReportCaster Java API
        About the ReportCaster API
        How This Manual Works
        Installation Requirements
        ReportCaster Overview
        ReportCaster Components
        ReportCaster API Components
        ReportCaster API Functionality
        ReportCaster API Authentication and Ownership
        ReportCaster API Packages
        ReportCaster API Development at a Glance
        Customizing Error Messages
        Additional Information
      ReportCaster Java API Samples
        Introduction to API Samples
        Using Batch Files to Compile Samples
        Running the Samples
        Additional Files Packaged With the Samples Application
        Running the Legacy Java API on a Machine Without a WebFOCUS Installation
        Address Book Samples
        Library Access List Samples
        Schedule Samples
        Library Samples
        Console Samples
        Log Samples
        Credential Authentication Samples
        Password Samples
        Troubleshooting API Samples
      ReportCaster API Subroutines
        API Subroutines
        Subroutine Security
        Calling a Subroutine From a Procedure
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTBULK Subroutine
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTMEM Subroutine
        Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUN Subroutine
        Using Amper Variables Within a Subroutine
        ReportCaster API Subroutine Messages
      ReportCaster Servlet API
        Overview
        ReportCaster Servlet API Descriptions
        Servlet Security
        Calling a Servlet From an HTML Form
        Maintaining and Displaying a Distribution List With a Servlet
        Maintaining Distribution Lists Using the DSTDLBULK Servlet
        Maintaining Single Distribution List Members Using the DSTDLMEM Servlet
        Displaying a Distribution List Using the DSTDLLIST Servlet
        Scheduling a Job Using the DSTSCHED Servlet
        Setting the Status of a Job Using the DSTACTIVE Servlet
        Immediately Running a Scheduled Job Using the DSTRUNNOW Servlet
        Displaying Log Information Using the DSTLOG Servlet
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
  Business Intelligence Dashboard
    Introducing Dashboard
      Using Dashboard
      Opening Dashboard
      Signing on to a Server
      Required Browsers and Setting
      Recommended Browser Settings
      Personalizing Your Dashboard
      Dashboard Layout
      Using Banner Hyperlinks
      Stopping Requests in Dashboard
      Viewing Reports in the Report Library
      Viewing Recently Run Reports
    Domain Content
      Selecting a Domain
      Types of Content in the Tree
      Filtering Content in the Tree
      Searching Content
    Managing Dashboard
      Managing Public Views
      Managing Group Views
      Managing Library Only Views
      Managing Private Views
      Accessing Dashboard and View Inheritance
      Managing Users
      Dashboard Change Management
      Handling Messages
    Creating Public and Group Views
      What Is a Public View?
      What Is a Group View?
      What Is a Library Only Group View?
      Adding a Group or Public View
      Directing Users to a Group View
      Adding a Library Only View
      Removing a Public or Group View
      Editing a Public or Group View
      Customizing Dashboard Pages for a Public or Group View
      Copying a Public or Group View
      Refreshing the Views List
      Exiting the Public Views or Group Views Window
    Customizing the Appearance of Dashboard
      Before You Begin Customizing the Appearance of Dashboard
      Opening the View Builder
      Selecting a Template
      Selecting Custom Colors
      Positioning the Tree and Banner
      Inserting a Logo
      Customizing the Banner
      Creating a Custom Toolbar
      Configuring the Filter in the Dashboard Tree
      Adding a Message of the Day
      Customizing the Sign Out Window
      Resetting the View Builder
      Saving Selections and Exiting a Customization
      Exiting the View Builder
    Creating Dashboard Content
      Creating Dashboard Content Overview
      Content Window
      Creating Content Pages
      Adding a Content Block
      Editing a Content Block
      Creating Filters For Published Content
      Selecting Content Layout
    Creating and Managing Reports in Dashboard
      Creating Reports in Dashboard
      Uploading Data Files
      Working With Shared Content
      Advanced Coding Techniques and Coding Considerations
    Running and Viewing Content in Dashboard
      Running Reports Interactively
      Amper Auto-Prompting
      Customizing the Amper Auto-Prompting Facility
      Saving Parameter Selections
      Using Reporting Object Filters to Limit Output Data
      Using Deferred Reporting
      Viewing Content Blocks
      Creating a Favorites List
      Mobile Favorites
      PowerPoint Integration With Dashboard
    Working With Alerts
      Alert Reporting
      Components of an Alert
      How to Create an Alert Test
      How to Create an Alert Result
      How to Schedule an Alert
      Checking Scheduled Alerts
      Creating and Scheduling an Alert
    Creating Reporting Objects
      Reporting Object Tool
    Launch PDF
  Mobile
    Mobile Faves for iOS User's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Mobile
        WebFOCUS Mobile Favorites
        Introducing the Mobile Faves App
        Getting the Mobile Faves App
        Quick Tour of Mobile Faves
      The Basics
        Understanding the Content List
        Navigating to Content
        Navigating Within Content
        Using the Tools Menu
        Content Watchlists
        Content List Icons
      The Fancy Stuff
        Adding a Server Connection
        Reordering a Server Connection
        Removing a Server Connection
        Opening an Email Attachment
        Adding a Passcode
        Mobile Faves Settings
        Configuring VPN on Your Device
        Updating the App
        Supporting Single Sign On Applications
      Additional Resources
        Subscribing to WebFOCUS Reports Using the Mobile Faves App Watch Feature
        Mobile Faves Customer-Branded Versions: An Offering From Information Builders
        Mobile Favorites
      Launch PDF
    Mobile Faves for Android User's Manual
      Introducing WebFOCUS Mobile
        What is WebFOCUS Mobile Favorites?
        Introducing the Mobile Faves App
        Getting the Mobile Faves App
        Quick Tour of Mobile Faves
        Changing Layout
      The Basics
        Understanding the Content List
        Navigating to Content
        Navigating Within Content
        Using the Menu Option
      The Fancy Stuff
        Adding a Server Connection
        Removing a Server Connection
        Opening an Email Attachment
        Adding a Passcode
        Mobile Faves Settings
        Configuring VPN on Your Device
        Updating the App
        Supporting Single Sign on Applications
      Additional Resources
        Mobile Favorites
      Launch PDF
    Mobile Faves Branding Package Developer’s Guide
      Mobile Faves Customer-Branded Versions: An Offering From Information Builders
        Mobile Faves Customer-Branded Offering
        What the App Branding Service Package Includes
        How the Branding Service Works
        What Do You Need to Get Started?
        Build Components
        Graphical Components
        Textual Components
        Metadata
        Kicking Off a Build
        Notification of Builds
        Method of Support and Licensing
        Information Builders Licensing and Pricing Details
      Launch PDF
  Developer Studio
    Developer Studio Application Development Getting Started
      Introducing WebFOCUS and Developer Studio
        Additional WebFOCUS Products
        WebFOCUS Architecture
        Developer Studio Architecture
        Developer Studio Directory Structure
        Developer Studio Explorer Layout
        Development Modes with Developer Studio
        Setting Up a WebFOCUS Environment in Developer Studio
        Logging Off Areas in WebFOCUS Environments
        Developer Studio Data Access and Descriptions
      Exploring Your WebFOCUS Development Environment
        Development Environment
        Development Tools
        Running an Application
      Setting Preferences
        Developer Studio Options
        General Tab
        Reporting Tab
        HTML Page Tab
        Document Tab
        Explorer Tab
        Source Control Tab
        External Tools Tab
        Title Format Tab
        Output Viewer Settings Tab
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Creating Reporting Applications With Developer Studio
      Creating a Reporting Application
        What Is a Reporting Application?
        Project-based and Remote Development Environments
        Creating a Project
        Organizing a Project
        Using Workspace Files
        Adding a Master File to a Project
        Uploading Data Files
        Viewing and Modifying Project Properties
        Managing a Project With Source Control
        Securing a Project
        Removing a Project
      Partitioning and Deploying Project Files
        Deployment Basics
        Summary of Steps
        Step 1: Identify the Target Servers
        Step 2: Create a Deployment Scenario
        Step 3: Partition the Project Files
        Step 4: Deploy the Project Files
        Configuring the Target Servers (Optional)
      Creating Reports Overview
        Requirements for Creating a Report
        Report Types
        Reporting Tools
        Developing Your Report Request
        Customizing a Report
      Joining and Merging Data Sources
        What Is a Join?
        Types of Joins
        Joining Different Kinds of Data Sources
        Creating a Join With Graphical Tools
        Creating Multi-Field Joins
        Using Conditional Joins
        Creating Cluster Joins
        Customizing a Join
        Working With Joins
        Reporting With a Join
        Saving a Join
        Merging Data Sources Using the Match Wizard
      Hierarchical Reporting
        Reporting Against Hierarchies
        Creating a Report With a Multi-Dimensional Data Source
        Using Mandatory Variables (SAP BW)
        Sorting Hierarchical Data
        Selecting Records in a Hierarchy
        Manipulating Aggregated Data in an Essbase or SAP BW Hierarchy
        Summary of Reporting Rules For Multi-Dimensional Data Sources
        Showing Hierarchies in HTML Composer
        Using the Synonym Editor for Cube Data Sources
      Creating a Reporting Procedure
        Selecting a Creation Tool
        Incorporating a Procedure Into an Application
        Copying a Procedure
        Creating a Procedure Component
        Working With a Component
        Using the SQL Report Wizard
        Assigning a Logical Name With the Allocation Wizard
        Calling a Procedure From the Current One
        Using the Engine Tool
        Managing Flow of Control
        Working With a Full Procedure
        Running a Procedure
        Canceling a Running Procedure
      Creating Temporary Fields
        What Is a Temporary Field?
        Defining a Virtual Field
        Creating a Calculated Value
        Creating Temporary Fields Independent of a Master File
      Viewing and Printing Reports and Graphs
        Viewing Reports in the Developer Studio Viewer
        Drilling Down for Details
        Navigating Through Multi-Page Web Reports
        Visualizing Trends in Reports
      Saving and Reusing Report Output
        Types of Output Files
        Creating Output Files
        Output File Formats
        Save Report Output as a Native Temporary Table In Report Painter
        Saving Reports as HTML Output
        Saving Reports as Print Display Output: PDF, PS
        Saving Reports Using Excel Formats
      Creating an Update Application With Update Assist
        Starting Update Assist
        Update Assist (Step 1 of 4): Selecting a Segment and Fields to Update
        Update Assist (Step 2 of 4): Selecting Navigation and Style Options
        Update Assist (Step 3 of 4): Selecting Output File Options
        Update Assist (Step 4 of 4): Confirming Selections
        About Your Update Assist Application
        Editing Your Update Assist Application
        Calling an Update Assist Procedure From a WebFOCUS Report
        Usage Notes
      Editing Application Components as Text in Developer Studio
        Text Editor
        The Other Component
        The Comment Component
        Creating a Text File or a Procedure Component as Text
        Opening Application Components as Text
        Finding and Replacing Text
        Changing Text Color and Case Size
        Adding Headings and Footings
        Using Bookmarks to Move Within a File
        Running a Procedure From the Editor
        Opening a Graphical Tool From the Text Editor
      Alert Procedures
        Alert Reporting Overview
        Components of an Alert
        Creating an Alert
        Checking Scheduled Alerts
      Reporting Objects in Developer Studio
        Reporting Objects
        Components of a Reporting Object
        Running a Reporting Object From Developer Studio
        Creating a Reporting Object Which Uses a HOLD File
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Describing Data With Graphical Tools
      Describing and Accessing Data Overview
        A Note About Data Source Terminology
        How Applications Interpret Data
        Obtaining a Synonym
        What You Can Do With a Synonym
        Ways to Enhance a Synonym
        How an Application Uses a Synonym
        Alternative Tools on the Reporting Server Console
      Accessing Data and Creating Synonyms
        Configuring Adapters and Remote Servers in Developer Studio
        Creating Synonyms in Developer Studio
        Defining a Remote Server in the WebFOCUS Client Communication File
      Using the Synonym Editor
        Synonym Editor Layout
        Viewing and Editing Synonym Attributes
        Setting Up Multilingual Titles and Descriptions
        Enhancing Synonyms Using the Modeling View
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
        Creating Cluster Joins
        Defining Dimensions for OLAP Analysis
        Using the Synonym Editor for Cube Data Sources
        Creating Business Views
        Adding Virtual Columns (DEFINE) in a Synonym
        Creating Filters in a Synonym
        Adding Computed Fields (COMPUTE) in a Synonym
        Storing the Number of Repetitions of a Repeating Field in a Virtual Field
        Defining Attributes and Creating Expressions for Custom Fields
        Adding Group Fields in a Synonym
        Applying Database Administrator Security
      Analyzing Metadata and Procedures
        Analyzing Procedures With the Impact Analysis Tool
        Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
      Adding Data and Rebuilding FOCUS Data Sources
        Creating a FOCUS Data Source
        Rebuilding a Data Source
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Creating Financial Reports
      Financial Reporting and Analysis for the Enterprise
        WebFOCUS Financial Reporting Benefits
        Enterprise Financial Reporting: A Critical Cornerstone of Business
        Financial Reporting Within and Beyond an Organization
        Financial Reporting and Government Regulations
        The WebFOCUS Financial Reporting Platform
        WebFOCUS Financial Report Painter
        Learning More About the WebFOCUS Financial Report Painter
      Creating Reports With the Financial Report Painter
        Financial Report Painter Overview
        Starting a Financial Report
        Designing Your Financial Report
        Running a Financial Report
        Creating a Financial Report Using a Cube Data Source
        Retrieving FOR Field Values From a Data Source
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Supplying Data Directly
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Text
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Formatting Financial Reports
        Adding, Inserting, and Deleting Rows
        Editing Row Types and Properties
        Adding and Deleting Columns
      Tutorial: Creating a Financial Report Using the Financial Report Painter
        Create a Project
        Create a Procedure Within the Project
        Create the Base Report in Report Painter
        Create the Income Statement in the Financial Report Painter
      Tutorial: Creating an Income Statement Using Unconsolidated Data
        Tutorial Overview
        Create a Procedure Within the Project
        Join the Data Sources
        Create the Base Report in Report Painter
        Create the Income Statement in the Financial Report Painter
      Creating Financial Reports With Financial Modeling Language (FML)
        Reporting With FML
        Creating Rows From Data
        Supplying Data Directly in a Request
        Performing Inter-Row Calculations
        Referring to Rows in Calculations
        Referring to Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Rows and Columns in Calculations
        Referring to Cells in Calculations
        Using Functions in RECAP Calculations
        Inserting Rows of Free Text
        Adding a Column to an FML Report
        Creating a Recursive Model
        Reporting Dynamically From a Hierarchy
        Customizing a Row Title
        Formatting an FML Report
        Suppressing the Display of Rows
        Saving and Retrieving Intermediate Report Results
        Creating HOLD Files From FML Reports
      Describing Data for an FML Hierarchy
        Data Requirements for FML Hierarchies
        Coding an FML Hierarchy in a Text Editor
        Defining an FML Hierarchy in the Synonym Editor
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
  Maintain
    Maintain Getting Started
      Introducing WebFOCUS Maintain
        Road Map: Where Should You Go?
        What Is WebFOCUS Maintain?
        Overview of Developing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
      WebFOCUS Maintain Basic Tutorial
        Before You Begin
        Creating a Project
        Familiarizing Yourself With the Explorer
        Adding a Data Source to Your Project
        Familiarizing Yourself With the Project Explorer
        Designing a Form
        Saving Your Work
        Selecting a Starting Object
        Running Your Project Locally
        Using Radio Buttons
        Giving Your Form a New Title
        Writing Data to the Data Source
        Adding a Form to Display Data From a Data Source
        Using the HTML Overflow Property
        Adding Form Navigation Buttons
        Deploying Your Project to a Different WebFOCUS Server
        Adding Images to Your Project
        What Is Next?
      WebFOCUS Maintain Advanced Tutorial
        Before You Begin
        Creating an Update Form
        Updating a Record in a Data Source
        Using Scripts for User Feedback
        Updating a Data Source Using a Read/Write Grid
        Creating a Welcome Screen Using the Menu Control
        Adding a WebFOCUS Report to Your Application
        Using a JavaScript Function to Define an Email Link
        Adding a Pop-up Calendar
        Getting Help in the Maintain Development Environment
      WebFOCUS Maintain Concepts
        Set-based Processing
        Controlling a the Flow of a Procedure
        Executing Other Maintain Procedures
        Forms and Event-driven Processing
        Reading From a Data Source
        Writing to a Data Source
        Transaction Processing
        Classes and Objects
      WebFOCUS Maintain Sample Data Sources
        Fannames Data Source
        Users Data Source
        Contact Data Source
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Developing Maintain Applications
      Setting Up Your WebFOCUS Maintain Project
        Opening WebFOCUS Maintain
        Applications and Projects
        What Are the Building Blocks of a WebFOCUS Maintain Project?
        Editing Projects in the Maintain Development Environment
        Viewing System Messages in the Output Window
        Searching for Text in Your Project
        Editing Project Components as Text
        Incorporating Data Sources Into Your Project
        Using the Resource Wizard
        Team Development
      Developing Procedures
        Overview
        Specifying Data Sources for Your Procedure
        Using Functions in Procedures
        Using Variables in Procedures
        Using Data Source Stacks in Procedures
        Using the Type Wizard
        Using Import Modules
        Testing Procedures With the Run Procedure Option
      Using the Form Editor
        Form Editor Overview
        Layout of the Form Editor
        Using the Controls Palette
        Using the Property Sheet
        Using Drawing Aids
        Selecting Multiple Controls
        Cutting, Copying, Pasting, and Duplicating Controls
        Resizing Controls
        Aligning Controls
        Spacing Controls
        Grouping Controls
        Changing the Order of Controls
        Undoing and Redoing Actions
        Layering Controls
      Developing and Using Forms
        Before You Begin Designing Forms
        Creating and Managing Forms
        Copying a Form Within a Procedure
        Changing Form Properties
        Using Cascading Style Sheets
        Dynamically Manipulating Forms at Run Time
        How WebFOCUS Maintain Saves Your Forms
        Using a Driver Procedure
      Defining Events and Event Handlers
        Using the Event Handler Editor
        Events
        Using a Maintain Function as an Event Handler
        Using Script Functions as Event Handlers
        Using Web Links as Event Handlers
      Developing and Using Controls
        Which Control Should You Use?
        Using Buttons
        Using Check Boxes
        Using Combo Boxes and List Boxes
        Using Edit Boxes and Multi-Edit Boxes
        Using Frames
        Using Grids and HTML Tables
        Using Group Boxes
        Using HTML Objects
        Using Images
        Using Java Applets
        Using Lines
        Using Menus
        Using Radio Buttons
        Using Text
        Using ActiveX Controls
        Dynamically Manipulating Controls at Run Time
        Defining Colors for Your Form and Controls
        Assigning Help to Your Forms and Controls
        Assigning Tab Order to Controls
      Form and Control Properties Reference
        (GroupCode) Property
        (Name) Property
        Alignment Property
        Alt Property
        AlternateRowColor Property
        BackColor Property
        BackColorOver Property
        BackgroundImage Property
        BodyRowHeight Property
        Border Property
        BorderColor Property
        BorderText Property
        BorderWidth Property
        Bottom Property
        Calendar Property
        CaseStyle Property
        Checked Property
        Columns Property
        Content Property
        CSSName Property
        CSSClass Property
        CursorPointer Property
        DefaultButton Property
        Enabled Property
        FixedColumns Property
        Font Property
        ForeColor Property
        ForeColorOver Property
        GridLines Property
        HeaderBackColor Property
        HeaderFont Property
        HeaderForeColor Property
        Headers Property
        Help Property
        Hyperlink Property
        IBIValidation Property
        Image Property
        ImageDown Property
        ImageOver Property
        ItemBorder Property
        Layer Property
        Left Property
        ListItems Property
        Map Property
        MultiSelection Property
        OnLoad Property
        Orientation Property
        Overflow Property
        Password Property
        PenWidth Property
        ReadOnly Property
        Right Property
        Rows Property
        Scrolling Property
        SelectedItem/SelectedItems Property
        Source Property
        Stretched Property
        Tabstop Property
        Text Property
        TextOnLeft Property
        Title Property
        ToolTipText Property
        Top Property
        Visible Property
        ZIndex Property
      Executing Other Procedures
        The Advantages of Modularizing Source Code
        Using the CALL and EXEC Commands
        Executing a Procedure on Another Server: AT Server
        Keeping or Terminating the Server Session: KEEP/DROP
        Passing Parameters Between Maintain Procedures: FROM...INTO
        Passing Parameters Between Maintain and WebFOCUS Procedures: FROM…INTO
        Optimizing Performance: Data Continuity and Memory Management
      Using WebFOCUS Procedures in Your Application
        What Can WebFOCUS Procedures Do?
        Incorporating WebFOCUS Procedures Into Your Project
        Executing WebFOCUS Procedures From Maintain Procedures
        Using WebFOCUS Report Output in Maintain
        Executing Maintain Procedures From WebFOCUS Report Procedures
        Using Variable Binding From WebFOCUS Reports
      Developing Classes and Objects
        What Are Classes and Objects?
        Defining Classes
        Reusing Classes: Class Libraries
        Declaring Objects
      Running WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Compiling WebFOCUS Maintain Procedures
        Executing Maintain Procedures From Outside the Maintain Development Environment
        Security and Running WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Customizing Key Functions and JavaScript for WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        Closing WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
      Designing Applications for Scalability and Performance
        Application Partitioning
        Presentation Logic
        Database Logic
        Miscellaneous Business Logic
        EXEC Command, CALL Command, and System Resources
        Use When Appropriate
        Using the Best Parts
        Persistence Management
        Development Standards
        Tips for Designing Applications
      Ensuring Transaction Integrity
        Transaction Integrity Overview
        Why Is Transaction Integrity Important?
        Defining a Transaction
        Evaluating Whether a Transaction Was Successful
        Concurrent Transaction Processing
        Ensuring Transaction Integrity for FOCUS Data Sources
        Ensuring Transaction Integrity for DB2 Data Sources
      Debugging WebFOCUS Maintain Applications
        WebFOCUS Maintain Application Debugger
        Type on EDAPRINT
        Maintain Statement Trace
        MNTCON PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS
        Additional Trace Settings
      Deploying Legacy Applications to the Web
        What Are the Differences Between Windows-Deployed and Web-Deployed Applications?
        Legacy Form Properties and Behavior
        Upgrading Legacy Windows Applications
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Maintain Language Reference
      Language Rules Reference
        Case Sensitivity
        Specifying Names
        Reserved Words
        What Can You Include in a Procedure?
        Multi-Line Commands
        Terminating Command Syntax
        Adding Comments
      Expressions Reference
        Types of Expressions That You Can Write
        Writing Numeric Expressions
        Writing Date Expressions
        Writing Date-Time Expressions
        Writing Character Expressions
        Writing Logical Expressions
        Writing Conditional Expressions
        Handling Null Values in Expressions
      Command Reference
        Language Summary
        BEGIN
        CALL
        CASE
        COMMIT
        COMPUTE
        COPY
        DECLARE
        DECRYPT
        DELETE
        DESCRIBE
        ENCRYPT/DECRYPT
        END
        EXEC
        FocCount
        FocCurrent
        FocError
        FocErrorRow
        FocFetch
        FocIndex
        FocMsg
        GOTO
        IF
        INCLUDE
        INFER
        MAINTAIN
        MATCH
        MNTCON CDN_FEXINPUT
        MNTCON COMPILE
        MNTCON EX
        MNTCON EXIT_WARNING
        MNTCON MATCH_CASE
        MNTCON PERFORMANCE_ANALYSIS
        MNTCON RADIO_BUTTON_EMIT_TEXT
        MNTCON REMOTESTYLE
        MNTCON RUN
        MODULE
        NEXT
        ON MATCH
        ON NEXT
        ON NOMATCH
        ON NONEXT
        PERFORM
        REPEAT
        REPOSITION
        REVISE
        ROLLBACK
        SAY
        SET
        SetLayer
        STACK CLEAR
        STACK SORT
        SYS_MGR
        SYS_MGR.DBMS_ERRORCODE
        SYS_MGR.ENGINE
        SYS_MGR.FOCSET
        SYS_MGR.GET_INPUTPARAMS_COUNT
        SYS_MGR.GET_NAMEPARM
        SYS_MGR.GET_POSITIONPARM
        SYS_MGR.PRE_MATCH
        TYPE
        UPDATE
        Winform
      WebFOCUS Maintain Error Messages
        Error Messages
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
  Charting
    WebFOCUS Graphics
      Graphing Basics
        What Is Scalable Vector Graphics?
        Viewing Scalable Vector Graphics
        Portable Network Graphics
        Virtual Coordinate System
        Implementing API Calls
      Using WebFOCUS Graphics
        How Properties and Methods Work
        The GraphType Property
        How Graphs Are Imaged
        Chart Layout Manager
        Setting the Color of the Page Surrounding the Graph
        Graph-Wide Parameters
        Graph Frame Attributes
        Axis Attributes
        Grid Lines
        Curve Fit Lines
        Java 2D Line Objects
        Risers and Markers
        Legends
        Labels and Titles
        Data Text
        Customizing Data Text
        Formatting Numbers and Numeric Labels
        Formatting Text Objects
        Java 2D Text Objects
        Autofitting
        Graph-Specific Properties and Methods
        Colors and Shading
        Textures and Gradients
        Panning, Rotating, and Scaling
        Graph Editing Characteristics
        Annotations
        Drill-Down and URLs
        Multiple Drill-Down From Graph
        Alternate Formatting
        Beveled Borders
        Reference Lines
      Using Data in a Graph
        Graph Titles and Labels
        Data Scrolling and Zooming
        How Missing Data Is Handled
        Data Requirements for Different Graph Types
      Properties
        Properties for Graphs
        AdjustAutoScaleForRefLines
        AlignMultiYBars
        AltFmtFrameSeparator
        AltFmtFrameNumColors
        AltFmtMatchAxisLabelColor
        AutoHideDataTextOnSmallRisers
        Autoshading
        AutoshadingWalls
        BiDirectional
        BoxPlotType
        Cascade
        ColorMode
        ConnectLineMarkers
        ConnectParetoBars
        ConnectScatterMarkers
        CubeFocusFactor
        CubeIsometricProjection
        CubeLightSourceX
        CubeLightSourceY
        CubeLightSourceZ
        CubePanX
        CubePanY
        CubeProportional
        CubeRiserInterpolation
        CubeSizeX
        CubeSizeY
        CubeSizeZ
        CubeSquareRisers
        CubeTranslationX
        CubeTranslationY
        CubeTranslationZ
        CubeViewerX
        CubeViewerY
        CubeViewerZ
        CubeWallThickX
        CubeWallThickY
        CubeWallThickZ
        CubeZoomFactor
        CurveFitEquationDisplay
        CurveFitHighOrderFirst
        CurveFitNumSegments
        DataItemsAlongSeries
        DataLineThickness
        DataScrollerPresenceGroups
        DataScrollerPresenceSeries
        DataSortType
        DataTextAngleDefault
        DataTextDisplay
        DataTextFormat
        DataTextFormatPattern
        DataTextPosition
        DataTextRadiusDefault
        DataTextStackedTotalOnTop()
        DataTextTemplateBubble
        DataTextTemplateHiLo
        DataTextTemplateScatter
        DepthAngle
        DepthRadius
        Display3DFloor
        Display3DLeftWall
        Display3DRightWall
        DisplayBarAsPictograph
        DisplayFunnelGroup
        DisplayParetoSeries
        DocumentHeightInTwips
        DocumentWidthInTwips
        DrawAreaMarkers
        DrawCompleteAreaRiser
        DualAxisLineDisplay
        DualAxisSplitPosition
        ExactColorByHeight
        ExtendToFrameEdge
        FillMissingData
        FootnoteDisplay
        FootnoteString
        ForceSeriesAbsolute
        FrameAutoShade
        FrameDisplay
        FunnelLabelValueLocation
        GaugeBackgroundStyle
        GaugeColorCenterByQuality
        GaugeDescending
        GaugeIgnoreBackgroundStyle
        GaugeMajorAutoStep
        GaugeMajorTickRelativeTickLength
        GaugeMinorAutoStep
        GaugeMinorTickRelativeTickLength
        GaugeNeedleStyle
        GaugeRelativeInnerRadius
        GaugeRelativeThickness
        GaugeSizeMode
        GaugeStartAngle
        GaugeStopAngle
        GraphType
        Grid3DFloorDisplayX
        Grid3DFloorDisplayZ
        Grid3DLeftWallDisplayY
        Grid3DLeftWallDisplayZ
        Grid3DRightWallDisplayX
        Grid3DRightWallDisplayY
        Grid3DRiserDisplayX
        Grid3DRiserDisplayY
        Grid3DRiserDisplayZ
        HiliteBarResize
        IgnoreTickSkip
        InterpretAsHLOC
        LegendAutomatic
        LegendDisplay
        LegendMarkerPosition
        LegendMarkersPerRow
        LegendOrient
        LegendReverse
        LegendScroll
        LegendSeriesCount
        LegendSeriesStart
        MajorGridDrawEveryCount
        MajorGridTickInterval
        MinorGridTickInterval
        MarkerDisplay
        MarkerSizeDefault
        MoveAxisTitles
        NestedLabels
        NullLegendMarkerShapesAsSquares
        NumMissingDataSegments
        NumPieArcSegmentsPerPixel
        OtherPercentage
        OtherSeries
        OutputSVG
        OverDrawSkip
        O1AxisLineDisplay
        O1AxisSide
        O1ExcludeMaxLabel
        O1ExcludeMinLabel
        O1LabelAutoAngle
        O1LabelAutoSkip
        O1LabelDisplay
        O1LabelMargin
        O1LabelRotate
        O1LabelSkipBegin
        O1LabelSkipCount
        O1LabelStagger
        O1LabelWrap
        O1MajorGridDisplay
        O1MajorGridStyle
        O1MajorTickDisplay
        O1MajorTickStyle
        O1MinorGridCount
        O1MinorGridDisplay
        O1MinorGridStyle
        O1MinorTickCount
        O1MinorTickDisplay
        O1MinorTickStyle
        O1TitleDisplay
        O1TitleString
        O2ExcludeMaxLabel
        O2ExcludeMinLabel
        O2LabelAutoSkip
        O2LabelDisplay
        O2LabelRotate
        O2LabelSkipBegin
        O2LabelSkipCount
        O2LabelWrap
        O2TitleDisplay
        O2TitleString
        ParetoDisplayThreshold
        ParetoY2MajorGridStep
        ParetoY2MajorTickStep
        PieBarLabelDisplay
        PieBarLabelString
        PieBarSeries
        PieDepth
        PieFeelerTextDisplay
        PieFeelerTextFormat
        PieFeelerTextFormatPattern
        PieLabelDisplay
        PieRingSize
        PieRingTotalDisplay
        PieRingTotalFormat
        PieRingTotalFormatPattern
        PieRotate
        PieSorting
        PiesPerRow
        PieTilt
        Place
        PrimitiveAntialiasing
        QuadrantLineCountX
        QuadrantLineCountY
        ReferencePercentageMode
        ReferenceTextPosition
        RemoveDuplicateDataText
        RepositionDataTextCollision
        RepositionStackedDataTextCollision
        ReshapeEnable
        ResizeBarMode
        ReverseGroups
        ReverseSeries
        Riser3DThicknessY
        RiserBarGroupSpacing
        RiserBorderMode
        RiserWidth
        ScaleFromZero
        ScrollOffsetGroup
        ScrollOffsetSeries
        SelectionEnable
        SelectionEnableMove
        SeriesAreRows
        SeriesDefaultBorderColor
        SeriesDefaultTransparentBorderColor
        SeriesLineWidthDefault
        SeriesLooping
        ShadowXOffsetDefault
        ShadowYOffsetDefault
        SmoothLines
        SquareMarkers
        StackedDataValueSum
        Stock52WeekHighDisplay
        Stock52WeekHighValue
        Stock52WeekLowDisplay
        Stock52WeekLowValue
        StockCandleForVolumeColor
        StockCloseSplitDisplay
        StockCloseTicksDisplay
        StockMovingAverageDisplay
        StockOpenTicksDisplay
        StockTickLength
        SubtitleDisplay
        SubtitleString
        TextAntialiasing
        TitleDisplay
        TitleString
        ToolTipDelay
        ToolTipDisplay
        ToolTipMode
        ToolTipTimeoutEnabled
        TransparentMarkers
        TransparentMarkerSize
        UseDefaultBubbleMarker
        UseOffScreen
        UseSeriesBorderDefaults
        UseSeriesShapes
        UseTimeScaleAxis
        ViewableGroups
        ViewableGroupsStock
        ViewableSeries
        ViewableSeriesStock
        Viewing3DAnglePreset
        WaterfallLastGroupTotal
        WaterfallStackColorMode
        X1AxisDescending
        X1AxisLineDisplay
        X1AxisSide
        X1ExcludeMaxLabel
        X1ExcludeMinLabel
        X1LabelDisplay
        X1LabelFormat
        X1LabelFormatPattern
        X1LabelRotate
        X1LabelStagger
        X1LogScale
        X1MajorGridDisplay
        X1MajorGridStep
        X1MajorGridStepAuto
        X1MajorGridStyle
        X1MajorTickDisplay
        X1MajorTickStyle
        X1MinorGridDisplay
        X1MinorGridStep
        X1MinorGridStepAuto
        X1MinorGridStyle
        X1MinorTickDisplay
        X1MinorTickStyle
        X1MustIncludeZero
        X1OffScaleDisplay
        X1ScaleMax
        X1ScaleMaxAuto
        X1ScaleMin
        X1ScaleMinAuto
        X1TitleDisplay
        X1TitleString
        X1ZeroLineDisplay
        Y1AxisDescending
        Y1AxisLineDisplay
        Y1AxisSide
        Y1ExcludeMaxLabel
        Y1ExcludeMinLabel
        Y1LabelDisplay
        Y1LabelFormat
        Y1LabelFormatPattern
        Y1LabelRotate
        Y1LabelStagger
        Y1LogScale
        Y1MajorGridDisplay
        Y1MajorGridStep
        Y1MajorGridStepAuto
        Y1MajorGridStyle
        Y1MajorTickDisplay
        Y1MajorTickStyle
        Y1MinorGridDisplay
        Y1MinorGridStepAuto
        Y1MinorGridStyle
        Y1MinorTickDisplay
        Y1MinorTickStepAuto
        Y1MinorTickStyle
        Y1MustIncludeZero
        Y1OffScaleDisplay
        Y1ScaleMax
        Y1ScaleMaxAuto
        Y1ScaleMin
        Y1ScaleMinAuto
        Y1TitleDisplay
        Y1TitleString
        Y1ZeroLineDisplay
        Y2AxisDescending
        Y2AxisLineDisplay
        Y2AxisSide
        Y2ExcludeMaxLabel
        Y2ExcludeMinLabel
        Y2LabelDisplay
        Y2LabelFormat
        Y2LabelFormatPattern
        Y2LabelRotate
        Y2LabelStagger
        Y2LogScale
        Y2MajorGridDisplay
        Y2MajorGridStep
        Y2MajorGridStepAuto
        Y2MajorGridStyle
        Y2MinorGridDisplay
        Y2MinorGridStep
        Y2MinorGridStepAuto
        Y2MinorGridStyle
        Y2MustIncludeZero
        Y2OffScaleDisplay
        Y2ScaleMax
        Y2ScaleMaxAuto
        Y2ScaleMin
        Y2ScaleMinAuto
        Y2TitleDisplay
        Y2TitleString
        Y2ZeroLineDisplay
        Y3AxisDescending
        Y3LogScale
        Y3ZeroLineDisplay
        Y4AxisDescending
        Y4LogScale
        Y4ZeroLineDisplay
        Y5AxisDescending
        Y5LogScale
        Y5ZeroLineDisplay
        ZeroValueDataTextDisplay
        ZeroValueDataTextStackedTotalOnTopDisplay
        ZoomDirection
        ZoomPercentage
      Methods
        get Methods
        restore Methods
        save()
        send Methods
        set Methods
      Methods That Return an Object ID
        Object ID Methods
        getAllSeries()
        getAnnotation()
        getAnnotationBox()
        getAnnotationLabel()
        getAnnotationLine()
        getAreaRiser()
        getAreaRiserBottom()
        getAreaRiserTop()
        getBarRiser()
        getBarRiserBottom()
        getBarRiserSide()
        getChartBackground()
        getColorByHeight()
        getCubeFloor()
        getCubeFloorGridX()
        getCubeFloorGridZ()
        getCubeLeftWall()
        getCubeLeftWallGridY()
        getCubeLeftWallGridZ()
        getCubeRightWall()
        getCubeRightWallGridX()
        getCubeRightWallGridZ()
        getCubeRiserFace()
        getCubeRiserGridX()
        getCubeRiserGridY()
        getCubeRiserGridZ()
        getCurveFitCorrelationText()
        getCurveFitCorrelationTextbox()
        getCurveFitEquationText()
        getCurveFitEquationTextbox()
        getCurveFitLineRiser()
        getDataText()
        getExceptionalRiser()
        getFootnote()
        getFootnoteBox()
        getFrame()
        getFrameBottom()
        getFrameSeparator()
        getFrameSide()
        getFunnelCrust()
        getFunnelFeeler()
        getFunnelLabel()
        getFunnelValueLabel()
        getGaugeArea()
        getGaugeBackground()
        getGaugeBand1...5()
        getGaugeBand1...5Label()
        getGaugeLabel()
        getGaugeMajorTick()
        getGaugeMinorTick()
        getGaugeNeedle()
        getGaugeScaleArea()
        getGaugeTitle()
        getGlobal()
        getGroup()
        getGroupScroller()
        getGroupScrollerEditBox()
        getGroupScrollerEditLeft()
        getGroupScrollerEditRight()
        getGroupScrollerEditThumb()
        getGroupScrollerThumb()
        getHistogramRiser()
        getLegendArea()
        getLegendMarker()
        getLegendScroller()
        getLegendScrollerThumb()
        getLegendText()
        getLegendTextBox()
        getLineMarker()
        getLineRiser()
        getLineRiserSide()
        getLineRiserTop()
        getNestedO1Label0...8()
        getNestedO1Label0...8Box()
        getNestedO1LabelLine()
        getNonZeroBaseLineZeroLine()
        getO1Axis()
        getO1AxisLine()
        getO1Label()
        getO1MajorGrid()
        getO1MajorTick()
        getO1MinorGrid()
        getO1MinorTick()
        getO1Title()
        getO1TitleBox()
        getO2Axis()
        getO2Label()
        getO2MajorGrid()
        getO2MinorGrid()
        getO2Title()
        getO2TitleBox()
        getParetoLineMarker()
        getParetoLineRiser()
        getParetoLineRiserSide()
        getParetoLineRiserSide1()
        getParetoLineRiserSide2()
        getParetoLineRiserTop()
        getParetoLineRiserTop1()
        getParetoLineRiserTop2()
        getPieBarConnectLineBottom()
        getPieBarConnectLines()
        getPieBarLabel()
        getPieBarRiserTop()
        getPieBarSlice()
        getPieBarSliceCrust()
        getPieFeelerLine()
        getPieFrame()
        getPieLabel()
        getPieRingLabel()
        getPieSliceFeelerPercent()
        getPieSliceFeelerValue()
        getPieSliceLabel()
        getPlaceHorzO1LabelsTitle()
        getPlaceVertO1LabelsTitle()
        getQuadrantLine()
        getReferenceLine()
        getReferenceLineLegendText()
        getReferenceLineO1()
        getReferenceLineO2()
        getReferenceLineX1()
        getReferenceLineY1()
        getReferenceLineY2()
        getReferenceLineTextO1()
        getReferenceLineTextO2()
        getReferenceLineTextX1()
        getReferenceLineTextY1()
        getReferenceLineTextY2()
        getScatterQuadrantLine()
        getSeries()
        getSeriesGroup()
        getSeriesScroller()
        getSeriesScrollerEditBox()
        getSeriesScrollerEditLeft()
        getSeriesScrollerEditRight()
        getSeriesScrollerEditThumb()
        getSeriesScrollerThumb()
        getSlice()
        getSliceCrust()
        getSliceRing()
        getSpectralLegendMarker()
        getSpectralMarker()
        getStackConnectLine()
        getStock52WeekHighLine()
        getStock52WeekLowLine()
        getStockCloseTick()
        getStockFallingRiser()
        getStockHighLine()
        getStockLowerRiser()
        getStockLowLine()
        getStockMALine()
        getStockOpenTick()
        getStockRiser()
        getStockRisingRiser()
        getStockVolumeRiser()
        getSubTitle()
        getSubTitleBox()
        getThermGaugeArea()
        getThermGaugeBackground()
        getThermGaugeNeedle()
        getTimeScaleLevel()
        getTitle()
        getTitleBox()
        getWaterFallLine()
        getX1Axis()
        getX1AxisLine()
        getX1Label()
        getX1MajorGrid()
        getX1MajorTick()
        getX1MinorGrid()
        getX1MinorTick()
        getX1Title()
        getX1TitleBox()
        getX1ZeroLine()
        getY1Axis()
        getY1AxisLine()
        getY1FrontZeroLine()
        getY1Label()
        getY1MajorGrid()
        getY1MajorTick()
        getY1MinorGrid()
        getY1MinorTick()
        getY1Title()
        getY1TitleBox()
        getY1ZeroLine()
        getY2Axis()
        getY2AxisLine()
        getY2FrontZeroLine()
        getY2Label()
        getY2MajorGrid()
        getY2MajorTick()
        getY2MinorGrid()
        getY2MinorTick()
        getY2Title()
        getY2TitleBox()
        getY2ZeroLine()
        getY3Axis()
        getY3AxisLine()
        getY3FrontZeroLine()
        getY3Label()
        getY3MajorGrid()
        getY3MajorTick()
        getY3MinorGrid()
        getY3MinorTick()
        getY3Title()
        getY3TitleBox()
        getY3ZeroLine()
        getY4Axis()
        getY4AxisLine()
        getY4Label()
        getY4MajorGrid()
        getY4MajorTick()
        getY4MinorGrid()
        getY4MinorTick()
        getY4Title()
        getY4TitleBox()
        getY4ZeroLine()
        getY5Axis()
        getY5AxisLine()
        getY5Label()
        getY5MajorGrid()
        getY5MajorTick()
        getY5MinorGrid()
        getY5MinorTick()
        getY5Title()
        getY5TitleBox()
        getY5ZeroLine()
      Graph Types and 3D Preset Viewing Angles
        Graph Types
        3D Preset Viewing Angles
      Graph Properties Index
        Current Graph Properties
        Graph Properties Reserved For Future Use
        Graph Properties Reserved for Internal Use
      Graph Methods Index
        Current Graph Methods
        Reserved for Future Use
        Reserved for Internal Use
      IdentObj Methods Index
        Current IndentObj Methods
        IndentObj Methods Reserved for Future Use
      Static Variables
        Current Static Variables
      Launch PDF
    Creating HTML5 Charts With WebFOCUS Language
      Introduction to WebFOCUS HTML5 Charts
        WebFOCUS Charting Overview
        Chart Types
        Creating an HTML5 Chart
        Introduction to the WebFOCUS GRAPH FILE Command
        Generating Sample Files for Running Sample Requests
      Understanding Chart Types
        Chart Components
        Controlling the Chart Type
        Chart Type Notes and Sample Charts
      Introduction to JSON Properties for HTML5 Charts
        WebFOCUS HTML5 JSON Syntax Basics
        Colors and Gradients
        Font Definitions
        Formatting Numbers
        HTML Codes in Strings
        Data Definitions
        Setting Chart Property Values
        Defining a Callback Function to Display Values in Labels
      Chart-Wide Properties
        Chart-Wide Properties Overview
        Controlling Automatic Layout of Ordinal Axis Labels
        Formatting the Chart Border
        Defining How to Handle JavaScript Errors
        Formatting the Chart Frame
        Controlling the Number of Charts in a Horizontal Row
        Showing and Formatting Data Text Labels for All Series
        Defining the Range of Data to Draw in the Chart
        Applying Depth to Charts
        Applying a Color or Gradient to the Draw Area
        Defining Group Labels
        Applying a Bevel to Risers, Markers, and Slices
        Applying a Lightening or Darkening Effect to Successive Risers
        Controlling Space Between Risers in 3D Charts
        Applying a Shadow to Risers and Markers
        Swapping Series and Group Orientation
        Swapping Series, Group, and Label Orientation
      Chart Title Properties
        Chart Title Properties Overview
        Formatting the Chart Footnote
        Formatting the Chart Subtitle
        Formatting the Chart Title
      Legend Properties
        Legend Properties Overview
        Defining the Background Color of the Legend Area
        Formatting the Legend Labels
        Generating a Line Around the Legend Area
        Controlling the Location of the Legend Markers
        Controlling the Size of Legend Markers
        Controlling the Position of the Legend
        Applying a Shadow to the Legend Area
        Formatting the Legend Title
        Controlling the Visibility of the Legend Area
        Controlling the Location of a Free Legend
      Axis Properties
        Axis Properties Overview
        Filling Alternate Segments of Axis Grid Lines With a Specified Color
        Controlling the Appearance of a Numeric Axis Base Line
        Enabling a Logarithmic Scale
        Formatting an Axis Body Line
        Defining Color Bands
        Controlling the Number of Major Grid Lines, Ticks, and Labels
        Synchronizing Y2-Axis Major Grid Lines With Y-Axis Major Grid Lines
        Controlling the Direction of a Numeric Axis
        Formatting the Axis Labels
        Formatting Major Grid Lines and Tick Marks
        Defining the Minimum and Maximum Values on a Numeric Axis
        Formatting Minor Grid Lines and Tick Marks
        Setting the Axis Mode
        Controlling the Format of Numeric Axis Labels
        Reversing the Default Axis Locations
        Formatting an Axis Title
      Series-Specific Properties
        Series-Specific Properties Overview
        Selecting Specific Series
        Selecting Specific Groups
        Defining a Border for Series Risers
        Defining Colors for Series Risers
        Deleting a Slice From a Pie Chart
        Pushing a Slice Away From a Pie Chart
        Assigning Labels to Individual Series
        Defining the Size, Border, Color, Shape, and Rotation of Series Markers
        Defining the Shapes of Risers for a Series in Bar, Line, and Area Charts
        Showing Data Text Labels for Series and Groups
        Defining a Tooltip for Risers
        Drawing a Series Trendline in Bubble and Scatter Charts
        Controlling the Visibility of Individual Series
        Assigning a Series to an Axis
      Chart-Specific Properties
        Bar, Line, and Area Chart Properties (blaProperties)
        Box Plot Properties (boxPlotProperties)
        Bullet Chart Properties (bulletProperties)
        Funnel Chart Properties (funnelProperties)
        Gauge Chart Properties (gaugeProperties)
        Histogram Chart Properties (histogramProperties)
        Parabox Chart Properties (paraboxProperties)
        Pie Chart Properties (pieProperties)
        Polar Charts (polarProperties)
        Tagcloud Chart Properties (tagcloudProperties)
        3D Chart Properties (threedProperties)
        Treemap Chart Properties (treemapProperties)
        Waterfall Chart Properties (waterfallProperties)
      Special Topics
        Animation (introAnimation)
        Annotations
        Color Modes (colorMode)
        Defining a Color Scale (colorScale)
        Drawing Error Bars (errorBars)
        Generating HTML Tooltips (htmlToolTip)
        Defining User Interaction With the Chart (interaction)
        Formatting the Mouse Over Indicator (mouseOverIndicator)
        Drawing Reference Lines (referenceLines)
        Drawing Trendlines in Bubble and Scatter Charts (trendline)
      Lightweight Map Support
        Overview of Lightweight Map Support
        Introduction to Map Properties
        Incorporating Additional Chart Properties in a Map Chart
      WebFOCUS Chart Parameters
        Controlling Chart Type Using the JSON chartType Property
        Creating Multiple Graphs
        Customizing Graphs Using SET Parameters
      Launch PDF
  Open Portal Services (OPS)
    WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Administration Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
        WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
        Benefits of Using WebFOCUS Open Portal Services
      Using WebFOCUS Portal Components
        WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Components Overview
        Using WebFOCUS Open Portal Services Components
      Installing WebFOCUS Web Parts for Microsoft SharePoint 2010 and 2013
        Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2010
        Microsoft SharePoint Portal Server 2013
      Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Adapter for ESRI
    WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems Getting Started
      Introducing the WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems
        Understanding Key Features and Benefits
        Functional Overview
        Architecture of a Geographic Business Intelligence Solution
      Requirements and Prerequisites
        Compatibility Matrix
        Hardware Requirements
        Software Requirements
        Prerequisites for WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex
      Building a Sample Application
        Sample Application Overview
        Defining WebFOCUS Reporting Procedures
        Defining Synthetic Map Services
        Defining Map Services
        Defining Symbols
        Understanding Replaceable Parameters
        Defining Custom JavaScript
        Launching the WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex
        Flushing Tables
      Tips and Usage Considerations
        Creating Rollovers
      Additional Resources
        Reference Documentation
        ESRI Resources
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Adapter for Geographic Information Systems: ESRI ArcGIS Server and ArcGIS Flex API
      Introducing Geographic Information Systems
        Understanding Geographic Information Systems
        Defining the Geographic Business Intelligence Solution
        GBIS Components
        New Features
      WebFOCUS GIS Adapter Architecture
        XML-based Configuration Blocks
        Orientation Modes
        Current Limitations
      Prerequisites for WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex
        Overview
        Creating a Map Service
        Configuring the Crossdomain.xml File
      Using the ESRI Configuration Utility
        Introduction
        Understanding the Layout and User Interface
        Configuring FOCEXECs
        Configuring Synthetic Map Services
        Configuring Map Services
        Configuring Symbols
        Adding Bookmarks
        Customizing JavaScript Syntax
        Configuring Settings
        Flushing Tables
        Verifying the XML Definition File
        Current Limitations
      Using the WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex
        Overview
        WebFOCUS GIS Viewer for Flex Components
        WebFOCUS Map Component
        WebFOCUS Report Component
        Synthetic Layer Component
        WebFOCUS Data View Component
        JavaScript Functions Available From Flexmapviewer.jsp
      Creating WebFOCUS GIS Procedures
        Incorporating the GIS Filter
        Creating a Report Procedure
        Creating an Identify Procedure
        Creating a Map Procedure
      Useful Techniques and Examples
        Creating Drill-Downs From a Report to a Map
        Drawing Multiple Map Layers
        Including Custom Libraries
        Embedding Custom JavaScript Functions in the ESRIINFO.XML File
        Directing Alternate Report Output to Different Windows
        Specifying Custom Colors in Your FOCEXEC
        Automatically Zooming On Selected Portions of the Map
        Automatically Zooming On Drawn Map Features
        Controlling the Visible Map Viewing Area
        Increasing the Maximum Number of Selectable Map Features
        Improving Map and Report Response Time
        Defining a Tiled Map Service
        Loading the Flex Map Viewer
        Using Symbols Defined in Your Configuration File
        Controlling Layers That are Visible
        Enabling a Buffer Using Selected Features From the Layer
        Creating Rollovers
        Passing Parameters From an HTML Layout
        Navigating to a Geoprocessing REST Endpoint
        Creating a Report or Map Binding Using a Geoprocessing Service
        Controlling the Visibility of Dynamic Map Layers
      XML Schema Reference
        Root Element <mapfexs>
        Class Definitions
        Constants
      Symbol Class Settings and Parameters
        SimpleLineSymbol
        SimplePolygonSymbol
        SimpleMarkerSymbol
        RasterMarkerSymbol
        TrueTypeMarkerSymbol
        CallOutMarkerSymbol
        TextMarkerSymbol
      HTML Color Values
        Color Value Table
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
  Magnify
    Magnify End User Manual
      Introducing Magnify
        About Magnify
        Accessing Magnify
      Conducting a Search With Magnify
        Searching With Magnify
        Navigating Magnify Search Results
        Viewing Magnify Data
        Viewing Content With Drill-Down Links
        Accessing Magnify on Mobile Devices
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Magnify Developer's Guide
      Getting Started With Magnify
        About Magnify
        Magnify Architecture
      Overview of Implementing Magnify
        Planning for Enterprise Search
        About the Magnify Feed Process
      Magnify: Building Indexes With WebFOCUS Reports
        Introducing Magnify Indexing
        Indexing the Course File
        Prerequisites for Indexing With the Movie and Car Files
        Indexing the Movie File
        Indexing the Car File
        Post-Indexing Verification
        Force Closing an Index During a Feed Process
      Indexing Using the FORMAT MAGNIFY Command
        FORMAT MAGNIFY
      Magnify Meta Tags
        HTML Format for All Access Types
        HTML Format Required for an External URL
        File Indexing Specific Meta Tag Information
        Sentiment Analysis Indexing
        HTML Format for a Standalone Report Procedure
        HTML Format for a Managed Reporting Procedure
        HTML Format for a Business Intelligence Portal Item
      Magnify Protocols
        Magnify Protocols for Indexing Documents
      Configuring the Adapter for Flat File to Search File Repositories
        Overview
        Creating a New Application Mapping to the File Repository Directory
        Defining a New Application Directory
        Defining a File Monitor Synonym
        Configuring the File Monitor Master File
        Transforming Documents Into Searchable Content
        Configuring a FORMAT MAGNIFY Procedure
      Supporting Information for iWay
        Overview
        About the Magnify Feed Process
        Magnify Search Feed Example
        Configuring an iWay Channel
        Creating the Indexing Process Flow
        Reconfiguring and Deploying the iWay Channel
      Magnify Error Handling
        Magnify Error Handling
        License for Indexing
      Launch PDF
    Magnify Security and Administration
      Getting Started With Magnify
        About Magnify
        Magnify Architecture
      Configuring the Search Engine
        Configuring the Search Engine
        Integrating With Third-Party Search Engines
      Configuring Magnify Collections
        What is a Collection?
        Defining Collections
        Searching Across Partitioned Collections
        Searching Across Multiple Machines
        Using Dynamic Partitioning to Scale Magnify Index Libraries
      Using the Security Features
        About Magnify Security
        Authorization to Magnify Components
        Enabling Security in Magnify With Lucene
        Enabling Collection-Level Security
        Using the WebFOCUS Domain Security Model With Magnify
      Magnify Diagnostics
        Installation Considerations
        Archiving Magnify Data
        Magnify Console
        Setting the Number of Slices and Color in a Chart
        Indexing Large Files
        Magnify Request Parameters
        Verifying Documents in the Lucene Index
        Retrieving Index Library Properties
        Retrieving Field Values From the Lucene Index
        Online Lucene Resources
      Customizing the Magnify User Interface
        Customization Overview
        Adding Date Information to Magnify Search Results
      Magnify Demo Search Application
        Introducing Magnify Search: The Century Electronics Example
        Century Electronics Sample Search Application
        Developer Studio and WebFOCUS Installation
        Configuring a Port Number
        Feeding Content to Magnify
        Additional Features
        Collection Security
        Multiple Categorizations
        Process Flow
        Deleting Extraneous Files
        Previous Versions
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
    Magnify Quick Start Guide
      Getting Started With Magnify
        Overview of Magnify
        Configuring the Century Electronics Demo Before Use
        Introducing Magnify Search: Century Electronics Demo
      Indexing With Format Magnify
        Prerequisites for Indexing With the Movie and Car Files
        Record Level Indexing: The Movie File
        Aggregated Indexing: The Car File
        Writing Magnify Feed Documents to Disk
      Organizing Magnify Collections
        Mapping Index Libraries to Collection Indexes
        Adding Indexes to the Collections Drop-down Menu
        Viewing the Results in Real Time
      Verifying Magnify Indexes
        Post-Indexing Verification
      General Tips for Using Magnify
        Creating a Customized Magnify Configuration
        Basic Styling Options
        Configuring Word Lists
        Deleting Records From the Index
        File Indexing
        Other Considerations for Magnify Implementation
      Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Accessibility
    Introducing Accessibility Features
      Understanding Software Accessibility in WebFOCUS
      WebFOCUS Accessibility Prerequisites
      Additional Resources
    Getting Started With Accessibility
      Navigating the Logon Screen and Welcome Page
      Navigating the Tree
      Using Right-Click Options
      Using the Search Function
      Using the Upload Function
      Creating Content
      Using Different Types of Content
      Using the Text Editor
      Adding to Favorites
    Using Accessibility Features in Business Intelligence (BI) Portal
      Running a Portal
      Adding New Pages
      Deleting Pages
      Renaming Pages
      Renaming Files or Folders
      Navigating HTML Output
    Using Accessibility Features in InfoAssist
      Opening InfoAssist
      Navigating a Master File List
      Navigating Data, Filter, and Query Panes
      Navigating Menus and the Ribbon
      Creating a PDF Report
      Supported Outputs
      Using InfoMini in InfoAssist
      Using Slicers
    Using Accessibility Features in ReportCaster
      Scheduling Reports
      Distributing Reports
      Creating Notifications
      Viewing Logs
      Configuring Tasks
      Navigating ReportCaster Explorer
    Launch PDF
  Using WebFOCUS RStat for Predictive Analytics
    Introducing WebFOCUS RStat
      Highlights of WebFOCUS RStat
      Data Mining With WebFOCUS RStat
      RStat Architecture
    Installing RStat
      Installation Prerequisites
      RStat Installation
    Getting Started With RStat
      Starting RStat With Data Loaded
      Starting RStat Without Data Loaded in App Studio
      Starting RStat Without Data Loaded in Developer Studio
      Loading Data From Within RStat
      RScripts in RStat
    Data Exploration and Transformations in the WebFOCUS RStat Tool
      Variable Definitions and Sampling
      Data Exploration
      Hypothesis Testing
      Data Transformation
      Clustering
    Creating a Scoring Application
      Defining the Model Data
      Building a Model
      Evaluating the Model
      Exporting the Final Model to Build the Scoring Application
      Compiling and Deploying the Scoring Routine
      Displaying Model Information With the RStat Query Command
      Building a Scoring Application Using a Scoring Routine
      Missing Data in Scoring Routines
    Creating Statistically Valid Data Samples
      Sampling Functionality
      Basic Sampling Concepts and Terminology
      Sampling Steps
    Building a Linear Regression Model
      Explanation of the Regression Model
    Building a Logistic Model
      Explanation of Logistic Regression
    Building a Survival Model
      Explanation of Survival Analysis
    Building a Decision Tree Model
      Explanation of the Decision Tree Model
    Building a Market Basket Model
      Explanation of the Market Basket Model
    Deploying RStat Scoring Routines on WebFOCUS Reporting Servers
      Deploying RStat Scoring Routines Prior to Version 7.6.8
    Glossary
    Launch PDF
  Online Analytical Processing (OLAP)
    Analyzing Data in an OLAP Report
      We Do It Every Day: A Typical Web Query
      OLAP Reporting Requirements
      Characteristics of an OLAP Report
      Three Ways of Working With OLAP Data
      Drilling Down On Dimensions and Measures
      Sorting Data
      Performing a Calculation on a Measure
      Limiting Data
      Visualizing Trends
      Displaying Graphs and Reports
      Controlling the Display of Measures in a Report
      Adding and Removing Dimensions
      Saving OLAP Reports
      Saving and Displaying OLAP Reports and Graphs in Other Formats
      Troubleshooting OLAP Reports
    Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Migration
    Migration Guide
      Migrating Content
        Export and Import Encoding
        Migration Functionality and User Default Roles (UDR)
        Domain and Managed Reporting Item Properties
        Migrating WebFOCUS Content
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS RESTful Web Services
    Introducing WebFOCUS RESTful Web Services
      What Is REST?
      What are RESTful Web Services?
    WebFOCUS Managed Reporting RESTful Web Service Requests
      Authenticating WebFOCUS Sign-On Requests
      Cross-Site Request Forgery (CSRF)
      Configuring Single Sign On
      Signing Out of WebFOCUS
      WebFOCUS Managed Reporting
    WebFOCUS Reporting Server RESTful Web Service Requests
      Listing WebFOCUS Reporting Server Nodes
      Creating an Application
      Listing Applications
      Listing Files Within an Application
      Listing the Parameters for a Report Within an Application
      Running a Report Within an Application
      Deleting a File Within an Application
      Deleting an Application
      Change Management Export
      Change Management Import
    WebFOCUS Security Administration RESTful Web Service Requests
      Listing Users
      Listing Groups
      Listing Privileges
      Listing Roles
      Listing Users Within a Group
      Adding and Updating a User
      Deleting a User
      Adding and Updating a Group
      Deleting a Group
      Adding a User to a Group
      Removing a User From a Group
      Adding a Role
      Deleting a Role
      Adding a Rule
      Deleting a Rule
      Listing Rules for a Subject
      Listing Rules for a Resource
      Listing Rules for a Role
      Expanding a Policy String
      Creating a Policy String
      Running a Template
      Changing a Password for a User
    ReportCaster RESTful Web Service Requests
      Retrieving Reports From the ReportCaster Library
      Creating and Updating an Address Book
      Creating and Updating a Library Access List
      Deleting a Library Access List
      Creating and Updating a Schedule
      Running a Schedule
      Retrieving a Schedule
      Deleting a Schedule
      Deleting an Address Book
      Log Functionality
      Console Functionality
    Using the RESTful Web Services Test Page
      Accessing the Test Page
      Using the Test Page
    Alternative Method of Calling WebFOCUS RESTful Web Service Requests
      Calling WebFOCUS RESTful Web Service Requests
    Visual Basic .NET, Java, HTML and jQuery Code Examples
      Signing In to WebFOCUS
      Listing Folders From WebFOCUS
      Running a WebFOCUS Report
      Handling Drill-downs, Active Cache, and On-Demand Paging Reports
      Parsing the XML Response of a SignOn Request to Obtain the CSRF Name and Value
    Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Social Media Integration
    Introducing WebFOCUS Social Media Integration
      Integrating With Social Media
      WebFOCUS Social Media Integration at a Glance
      Understanding the Architecture of WebFOCUS Social Media Integration
    Facebook Adapter
      Overview
      Creating a Facebook Application
      Configuring the Facebook Adapter
      Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Facebook Adapter
      Examples
    Twitter Adapter
      Overview
      Creating a Twitter Application
      Configuring the Twitter Adapter
      Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Twitter Adapter
      Examples
    LinkedIn Adapter
      Overview
      Creating a LinkedIn Application
      Configuring the LinkedIn Adapter
      Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the LinkedIn Adapter
      Examples
    Using the Adapter for Google Analytics
      Overview
      Creating a Google Project
      Obtaining the Web Profile ID
      Configuring the Google Analytics Adapter
      Creating Metadata for the Google Analytics Adapter
    Words Analysis Adapter
      Overview
      Configuring the Words Analysis Adapter
      Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Words Analysis Adapter
      Examples
    WAND Sentiment Analysis Adapter
      Overview
      Installing, Configuring, and Updating the WAND Taxonomy Server
      Installing and Using the WAND Taxonomy Editor
      Configuring the WAND Sentiment Analysis Adapter
      Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the WAND Sentiment Analysis Adapter
      Examples
    Alchemy Sentiment Analysis Adapter
      Overview
      Configuring the Alchemy Sentiment Analysis Adapter
      Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Alchemy Adapter
      Examples
    Glossary of Related Terms
    Launch PDF
  Performance Management
    Performance Management Framework 8.2
      Performance Management Framework Overview
        Introduction to PMF
        Working With PMF
        WebFOCUS Components Used by PMF
        Finding It: Authors
        Finding It: Administrators
        Shared Roles for Authors and Administrators
        Finding It: Analysts
        Finding It: Consumers
        Finding It: Developers
        Finding It: Installers
        Milestones in the Performance Management Process
      Performance Management Framework User
        PMF Overview
        Working With PMF Views
        Today Page
        Working With Scorecards, Filters, and Content
        Strategy Map
        Previous vs. Current and Prior vs. Current
        Rolling 5 Periods
        Executive Booklet
        Correlation
        Scorecard Views
        Objective Views
        Understanding Compound Objectives and Consequences
        Understanding Risks
        Predictive Analysis Views
        Measure Views
        Project Views
        Process Views
        Performance Views
        Properties Views
        Using the Analysis Designer
        Feedback Blogging
        Scheduling Reports and Views
        Managing Project Tasks
        Managing Alerts
        Working With Measure Tasks
        Inputting User-Entered Sources
        Working with Dashboards
      Performance Management Framework Author
        Implementing PMF
        PMF Prerequisites
        Getting Started as a PMF Author
        Authoring in PMF
        Navigating PMF: Adding, Changing, and Deleting Items
        Scorecarding
        Navigating the Author Page
        Creating a New Scorecard
        Creating Strategy and Risk Objects
        Drawing a Strategy Map
        Adding Themes to a Strategy Map
        Linking Projects and Processes to Objectives in the Strategy Map
        Understanding Measures
        Indicator Concepts
        Weighting Measures Across Objectives
        Weighting Objectives Across a Strategy
        Automatic Equal Weighting
        Setting a Basis for Descending Measures
        Overriding Measures at the Measure Level
        Working with Projects
        Documenting Your Work
        Scorecard-Specific Data Access Security
        Author Scorecard Options
      Performance Management Framework Administrator
        Getting Started as a PMF Administrator
        Managing Metadata
        Thinking About Users and Security
        Adding, Changing, Deleting, and Importing Users (Owners)
        Understanding Functional and Access Roles
        Working With Scorecard Security
        Working With the New Data Model
        What Are Sources?
        What Are Datapoints?
        Scheduling Loads and Updates
        Setting Measure Access for Users (Owners)
        Specifying Dimensions and Measures
        Creating Units of Measure Conversion Profiles
        Planning Considerations for Loading Dimensions
        Working With a Dimension Load
        Setting Up a Distinct Count Dimension
        Inputting User-Entered Dimensions
        Editing Existing Loaded Dimension Values
        Planning Considerations For Loading Sources
        Working With Measures
        Specifying Alternate Targets
        Excluding a Measure Series From Access Security
        Previewing Loadable Sources and Load Measure Data
        Managing Content
        Working with Snapshots
        Administration Views
        Designing Gadgets
        Designing a Dashboard
        Manage Page - Quick Reference
        Viewing and Editing Default Settings
      Tips for Administrators and Authors
        Administrators: Hiding Content From Users
        Administrators: Automated Upgrades
        Administrators: Styling the Look and Feel of PMF
        Authors: Creating a Scorecard
        Troubleshooting Measure Data Issues
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
        Designing a PMF Quick Reporting Mart
      Catalog of Available Gadgets
        Gadget Catalog
      Launch PDF
    Performance Management Framework Installation and Configuration Guide 8.2
      Understanding PMF Installations
        Introducing PMF
        Locating Where PMF Components are Installed or Configured
        Understanding Security and PMF
        Understanding Single-Tier and Multi-Tier Installations
        Interoperation With WebFOCUS
        Understanding Multi-Tenancy
        PMF Language Display
      Planning Your PMF Installation
        Installation Requirements
        Considerations for Installing PMF
        Configuration Considerations for Multi-Tenancy
      Performing a New PMF Installation
        Installing PMF in WebFOCUS 8
        Setting Up Your Data Mart Connection
        Setting Up the PMF Data Mart in Your RDBMS
        Installing PMF for Multi-Tenancy
        Changing Language Display
        Using the Unattended Install
        MR External Security (Realm Security: Setting Up a Bootstrap User)
        Configuring PMF to Communicate With ReportCaster
      Upgrading a PMF Installation
        Upgrade the Application
        Upgrading PMF Data
      Confirming a PMF Installation or Upgrade
        Verifying an Installation or Upgrade
        Working with Snapshots
      Maintaining a PMF Installation
        Installing Hotfixes
        Upgrading WebFOCUS Server and Client on an Active PMF Environment
        Synchronizing IBFS Security Users With PMF
        Manually Creating Users
        PMF Font Format Issue
        Optimizing PMF Performance
        Accessibility Capabilities
      Reference
        Estimating PMF Database Size
        Pointing PMF to a Different Data Mart
      Troubleshooting Common Issues
        Common PMF Errors
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Getting SLP to Work With Your WebFOCUS Installation
        Using SLP With PMF
        Using SLP For Any IBFS Folder
      Launch PDF
    Performance Management Framework 8.1
      Performance Management Framework Overview
        Introduction to PMF
        Working With PMF
        WebFOCUS Components Used by PMF
        Finding It: Authors
        Finding It: Administrators
        Shared Roles for Authors and Administrators
        Finding It: Analysts
        Finding It: Consumers
        Finding It: Developers
        Finding It: Installers
        Milestones in the Performance Management Process
      Performance Management Framework User
        PMF Overview
        Working With PMF Views
        Today Page
        Working With Scorecards, Filters, and Content
        Strategy Map
        Previous vs. Current and Prior vs. Current
        Rolling 5 Periods
        Executive Booklet
        Correlation
        Scorecard Views
        Objective Views
        Understanding Compound Objectives and Consequences
        Understanding Risks
        Predictive Analysis Views
        Measure Views
        Project Views
        Process Views
        Performance Views
        Properties Views
        Using the Analysis Designer
        Feedback Blogging
        Scheduling Reports and Views
        Managing Project Tasks
        Managing Alerts
        Working With Measure Tasks
        Inputting User-Entered Measures
        Inputting User-Entered Sources
        Working with Dashboards
      Performance Management Framework Author
        Implementing PMF
        PMF Prerequisites
        Getting Started as a PMF Author
        Authoring in PMF
        Navigating PMF: Adding, Changing, and Deleting Items
        Scorecarding
        Navigating the Author Page
        Creating a New Scorecard
        Creating Strategy and Risk Objects
        Drawing a Strategy Map
        Adding Themes to a Strategy Map
        Linking Projects and Processes to Objectives in the Strategy Map
        Understanding Measures
        Indicator Concepts
        Weighting Measures Across Objectives
        Weighting Objectives Across a Strategy
        Automatic Equal Weighting
        Setting a Basis for Descending Measures
        Overriding Measures at the Measure Level
        Working with Projects
        Documenting Your Work
        Scorecard-Specific Data Access Security
        Author Scorecard Options
      Performance Management Framework Administrator
        Getting Started as a PMF Administrator
        Managing Metadata
        Thinking About Users and Security
        Adding, Changing, Deleting, and Importing Users (Owners)
        Understanding Functional and Access Roles
        Working With Scorecard Security
        Working With the New Data Model
        What Are Sources?
        What Are Datapoints?
        Scheduling Loads and Updates
        Setting Measure Access for Users (Owners)
        Specifying Dimensions and Measures
        Creating Units of Measure Conversion Profiles
        Planning Considerations for Loading Dimensions
        Working With a Dimension Load
        Setting Up a Distinct Count Dimension
        Inputting User-Entered Dimensions
        Editing Existing Loaded Dimension Values
        Planning Considerations For Loading Sources
        Working With Measures
        Where to Attach Your Measures
        Specifying Alternate Targets
        Excluding a Measure Series From Access Security
        Previewing Loadable Sources and Load Measure Data
        Managing Content
        Working with Snapshots
        Administration Views
        Designing Gadgets
        Designing a Dashboard
        Manage Page - Quick Reference
        Viewing and Editing Default Settings
      Tips for Administrators and Authors
        Administrators: Dashboard Design Tips
        Administrators: Hiding Content From Users
        Administrators: Automated Upgrades
        Administrators: Styling the Look and Feel of PMF
        Styling the Simple Lightweight Page (SLP) Manager
        Authors: Creating a Scorecard
        Troubleshooting Measure Data Issues
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
        Designing a PMF Quick Reporting Mart
      Catalog of Available Gadgets
        Gadget Catalog
      Working With Legacy Measures
      Launch PDF
    Performance Management Framework 8
      Performance Management Framework Overview
        Introduction to PMF
        Working With PMF
        WebFOCUS Components Used by PMF
        Finding It: Authors
        Finding It: Administrators
        Shared Roles for Authors and Administrators
        Finding It: Analysts
        Finding It: Consumers
        Finding It: Developers
        Finding It: Installers
        Milestones in the Performance Management Process
      Performance Management Framework User
        PMF Overview
        Accessing Views
        Working With PMF Views
        Working With the Analytics Tab
        Strategy Map
        Previous vs. Current and Prior vs. Current
        Rolling 5 Periods
        Executive Booklet
        Correlation
        Scorecard Views
        Objective Views
        Understanding Compound Objectives and Consequences
        Understanding Risks
        Predictive Analysis Views
        Measure Views
        Project Views
        Process Views
        Performance Views
        Properties Views
        Using the Analysis Designer
        Today Tab
        Feedback Blogging
        Scheduling Reports and Views
        Managing Project Tasks
        Managing Alerts
        Working With Measure Tasks
        Inputting User-Entered Measures
        Inputting User-Entered Sources
        Working with Dashboards
        Using PMF Content on your Mobile Device
      Performance Management Framework Author
        Implementing PMF
        PMF Prerequisites
        Getting Started as a PMF Author
        Authoring in PMF
        Navigating PMF: Adding, Changing, and Deleting Items
        Scorecarding
        Navigating the Author Tab
        Creating a New Scorecard
        Creating Strategy and Risk Objects
        Drawing a Strategy Map
        Adding Themes to a Strategy Map
        Linking Projects and Processes to Objectives in the Strategy Map
        Understanding Measures
        Indicator Concepts
        Weighting Measures Across Objectives
        Weighting Objectives Across a Strategy
        Automatic Equal Weighting
        Setting a Basis for Descending Measures
        Overriding Measures at the Measure Level
        Documenting Your Work
        Scorecard-Specific Data Access Security
        Author Scorecard Options
        PMF Tabs - Quick Reference for Authors
      Performance Management Framework Administrator
        Getting Started as a PMF Administrator
        Managing Metadata
        Thinking About Users and Security
        Adding, Changing, Deleting, and Importing Users (Owners)
        Understanding Functional and Access Roles
        Working With Scorecard Security
        Working With the New Data Model
        What Are Sources?
        What Are Datapoints?
        Scheduling Loads and Updates
        Setting Measure Access for Users (Owners)
        Specifying Dimensions and Measures
        Creating Units of Measure Conversion Profiles
        Planning Considerations for Loading Dimensions
        Working With a Dimension Load
        Setting Up a Distinct Count Dimension
        Inputting User-Entered Dimensions
        Editing Existing Loaded Dimension Values
        Planning Considerations For Loading Sources
        Working With Measures
        Where to Attach Your Measures
        Loading Legacy Measures
        Excluding a Measure Series From Access Security
        Interpreting the Measure Loader Report
        Scheduling Measure Loads
        Previewing Loadable Sources and Load Measure Data
        Managing Content
        Working with Snapshots
        Administration Views
        Designing Gadgets
        Designing a Dashboard
        Manage Tab - Quick Reference
        Viewing and Editing Default Settings
      Tips for Administrators and Authors
        Displaying Static Tabs With Dynamic Dashboards
        Administrators: Dashboard Design Tips
        Administrators: Hiding Content From Users
        Administrators: Automated Upgrades
        Administrators: Styling the Look and Feel of PMF
        Authors: Creating a Scorecard
        Troubleshooting Measure Data Issues
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Catalog of Available Gadgets
        Gadget Catalog
      Launch PDF
    Performance Management Framework Installation and Configuration 8.1
      Understanding PMF Installations
        Introducing PMF
        Locating Where PMF Components are Installed or Configured
        Understanding Security and PMF
        Understanding Single-Tier and Multi-Tier Installations
        Interoperation With WebFOCUS
        Understanding Multi-Tenancy
        PMF Language Display
      Planning Your PMF Installation
        Installation Requirements
        Considerations for Installing PMF
        Configuration Considerations for Multi-Tenancy
      Performing a New PMF Installation
        Installing PMF in WebFOCUS 8
        Setting Up Your Data Mart Connection
        Setting Up the PMF Data Mart in Your RDBMS
        Installing PMF for Multi-Tenancy
        Changing Language Display
        MR External Security (Realm Security: Setting Up a Bootstrap User)
        Configuring PMF to Communicate With ReportCaster
      Upgrading a PMF Installation
        Upgrade the Application
        Upgrading PMF Data
      Confirming a PMF Installation or Upgrade
        Verifying an Installation or Upgrade
        Working with Snapshots
      Maintaining a PMF Installation
        Installing Hotfixes
        Upgrading WebFOCUS Server and Client on an Active PMF Environment
        Synchronizing IBFS Security Users With PMF
        Manually Creating Users
        PMF Font Format Issue
        Optimizing PMF Performance
        Accessibility Capabilities
      Reference
        Estimating PMF Database Size
        Pointing PMF to a Different Data Mart
      Troubleshooting Common Issues
        Common PMF Errors
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Getting SLP to Work With Your WebFOCUS Installation
      Launch PDF
    Performance Management Framework Installation and Configuration 8
      Understanding PMF Installations
        Introducing PMF
        Locating Where PMF Components are Installed or Configured
        Understanding Security and PMF
        Understanding Single-Tier and Multi-Tier Installations
        Interoperation With WebFOCUS
        Understanding Multi-Tenancy
        PMF Language Display
      Planning Your PMF Installation
        Installation Requirements
        Considerations for Installing PMF
        Configuration Considerations for Multi-Tenancy
      Performing a New PMF Installation
        Installing PMF in WebFOCUS 7
        Installing PMF in WebFOCUS 8
        Setting Up Your Data Mart Connection
        Setting Up the PMF Data Mart in Your RDBMS
        Installing PMF for Multi-Tenancy
        Changing Language Display
        MR External Security (Realm Security: Setting Up a Bootstrap User)
        Configuring PMF to Communicate With ReportCaster
      Upgrading a PMF Installation
        Upgrade the Application
        Upgrading PMF Data
      Confirming a PMF Installation or Upgrade
        Verifying an Installation or Upgrade
        Working with Snapshots
        Manually Creating a BID Portal View for PMF
      Maintaining a PMF Installation
        Installing Hotfixes
        Upgrading WebFOCUS Server and Client on an Active PMF Environment
        Synchronizing Manage Reporting Users With PMF
        Manually Creating Users
        PMF Font Format Issue
        Optimizing PMF Performance
        Accessibility Capabilities
      Reference
        Estimating PMF Database Size
        Pointing PMF to a Different Data Mart
      Troubleshooting Common Issues
        Common PMF Errors
        Troubleshooting and Debugging Aids
      Launch PDF
  Visual Discovery
    Using WebFOCUS Visual Discovery to Develop Analytic Dashboards
      Introducing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Key Features
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components
      Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Components
        Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Development Components
        VZ Web Server (Thick Client) Deployment
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery VZ Web Server (Thick Client)
      Developing an Analytic Dashboard
        Creating Visual Discovery Output Files
        Developing an Analytic Dashboard From Developer Studio
        Working With Visual Discovery Controls on the Web
        Accessing Visual Discovery Online Help
      Tutorial: Building a Visual Discovery Analytic Dashboard with Advanced Chart Controls
        Before You Begin
        Building an Analytic Dashboard With Visual Discovery Components
        Building an Application With Advanced Chart Controls
      Deploying Visual Discovery Applications
        Deploying WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Applications for VZ Web Server (Thick Client)
      Visualization Components: Descriptions and Usage
        What Is a Glyph?
        Bar Charts
        Line Charts
        Pie Charts
        Histograms
        Counts
        Data Constellations
        Data Constellation Maps
        Data Sheets
        Multiscapes
        Paraboxes
        Scatter Plots
        Summary Sheets
        Time Tables
        Perspectives
      Using the Visual Discovery JavaScript API
        About JavaScript API
        Customizing Visual Discovery Applications With JavaScript
        Using the VzScript Library
      Glossary
      Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition (AE)
    WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition Dashboard User's Guide
      Using Visual Discovery Analyst Edition Dashboards
        Overview
        Selecting Data
        Excluding Data
        Filtering Data
        Using Color
        Returning to a Previous Data State
        Sharing Results
        Using Navigation Panes
        Using Chart Tools
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition Getting Started Guide
      Introducing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition
        Overview
        Prerequisites
      Creating and Distributing Data
        Creating Data for Visual Discovery AE
        Distributing Data for Visual Discovery AE
      Designing Projects
        Overview
        Designing a Project Using WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE
        Available Menus and Toolbars
        Available Charts
      Publishing Projects
        Publishing Visual Discovery AE Projects to a Larger (Web-Based) Audience
        Presenting Published Visual Discovery AE Projects in WebFOCUS
        Using Parameterized Data Paths to Load Different Data Sets in a Published Project
      Quick Start Guide Using WebFOCUS Procedure Data
        Step 1. Creating Data Using WebFOCUS InfoAssist
        Step 2. Designing a Project in WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE
        Step 3. Publishing a Project to the WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server AE
        Step 4. Presenting a Project as a WebFOCUS Business Intelligence Portal Item
      Lab using the MutualFunds example
        Building Visual Analytics Projects
        Visually Analyzing Data Using the Web
      Configuring ReportCaster to Distribute and Schedule WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition Reports
        Configuring ReportCaster Settings
      Maintenance and Troubleshooting
        Managing Project Definition Changes
        Excluding Data Sources
        Flight Recorder Bookmarks
        Troubleshooting
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition Implementation Guide
      Understanding Key Concepts
        Introducing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition
        Defining the Architecture Model
        Defining the Deployment Model
        Visual Discovery Server AE Access
        Localized Data Configuration
        Upgrading WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition
      Installing WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition Components
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench Analyst Edition
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server Analyst Edition
        Configuring Microsoft Internet Information Services (IIS) on a Windows 2012 R2 Server
        Visual Discovery Server AE Token Requirement
        Setting the Token Key
        Assigning Privileges
        Validating Your Installations
        Scalability Considerations
        Supported Databases
      Configuring WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Analyst Edition
        Scheduling Data Updates
        Configuring Secure Access for WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server AE
        Controlling Access to Projects
        Publishing Projects
        Registering Libraries for the Adv2Advm Utility
        Visual Discovery AE URL Redirection Validation
        Configuring Credential-Based Filters
        Restricting Publishing Permissions
        Preparing Localized Data
      Maintenance and Troubleshooting
        Managing Project Definition Changes
        Excluding Data Sources
        Flight Recorder Bookmarks
        Troubleshooting
      Launch PDF
    WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench Analyst Edition (AE) User's Guide
      Introduction to WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE
        Welcome to WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE
        What Should I Do Next?
      Overview of WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE
        Overview of WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE
        What Is Next?
      What Is New
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE 6.1 Release Notes
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE 5.9 Release Notes
      Getting Started
        Getting Started
      Charts and Visual Discovery AE
        Getting Started with Charts
      Charts, Pages, Dashboards
        Charts, Pages, Dashboards
      Deployment and the WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server AE
        Deployment and the WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Server AE
      Toolbars
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE Toolbars
      Main Menu
        WebFOCUS Visual Discovery Workbench AE Main Menu
      Using Views
        Using Views
      How Do I...
        Step 4: Analyze Data
        Change Chart Fonts
        Configure WebFOCUS Visual Discovery
        Configure Data Hierarchies
        Configure Mouse Gestures
        Copy Charts
        Create Navigation Pane Content
        Data Pool Visualization
        Delete a Link
        Design Pages
        Explore Data Usage
        Export Data
        Export Tables
        Export Pages
        Fix Graphics Problems
        Link Unmatched Rows
        Load Data
        Load Data Using the Data Wizard
        Manage Data Sources
        Open an Existing Project
        Publish a Dashboard
        Rearrange Charts
        Restore a Backup Project Version
        Save a Project
        Select or Exit Full Screen Mode
        Select and Exclude Data
        Set Coloring
        Share Results
        Use the Link Wizard and Modify Links Dialogs
        Use Color By
        Use Color Scale
        Use Color Models
        Use the Date Parser
        Use the Expression Builder
      Tips and Tricks
        Tips and Tricks
      Salesforce
        Salesforce Login Help
      If You Need Additional Help
        If You Need Additional Help
      Launch PDF
  WebFOCUS Reporting Server
    Server Release Notes
      Disabling the CSRF Token When Connecting From a Release 8.0.x Client
      General Information
      Adapter for ESSBASE
      Adapter for Netezza
      Adapter for MQSeries
      Adapter for Red Brick
      Adapter for JBoss
      Adapter for Oracle
      Adapter for Informix
      Adapter for DB2 on IBM i
      Adapter for JDBC
      Adapter for PeopleSoft
      Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS)
      Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server 2000 Analysis Services (MSOLAP)
      JVM Requirements for Java Services
      Connector for OLE DB
      Resource Analyzer
      Run With Options Changed to Submit With E-Mail
      Running or Sharing 7.7.x and 7.6.x on the Same Machine
      New CMRUN Executable
      Platform Support
      Active Technologies
      Reporting Language
      Server Security
      Launch PDF
    Adapter Administration
      Introduction to Adapters
        Processing Requests
        Functions of an Adapter
        Data Management
        Metadata Services With SQLENGINE SET
        Additional Master File Attributes
      Using the Adapter for 1010data
        Configuring the Adapter for 1010data
        Managing 1010data Metadata
        Customizing the 1010data Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Adabas
        Preparing the Adabas Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Adabas
        Adabas Overview
        Managing Adabas Metadata
        Overview of Master and Access Files
        Master Files for Adabas
        Access Files for Adabas
        Mapping Adabas Descriptors
        Mapping Adabas Files With Variable-Length Records and Repeating Fields
        Using the GROUP Attribute to Cross-Reference Files
        Platform-Specific Functionality
        Customizing the Adabas Environment
        Adabas Reporting Considerations
        Adabas Writing Considerations
        Adapter Navigation
        Entry Segment Retrieval of Adabas Records
        Descendant Periodic Groups and Multi-Value Fields
        Descendant Adabas Records
      Using the Adapter for Adabas Stored Procedures
        Preparing the Adabas Stored Procedures Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Adabas Stored Procedures
        Managing Adabas Stored Procedure Metadata
        Invoking an Adabas Stored Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Alchemy Sentiment Analysis
        Overview
        Configuring the Alchemy Sentiment Analysis Adapter
        Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Alchemy Adapter
        Examples
      Using the Adapter for Axiom EPM
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Axiom EPM
        Managing Axiom EPM Metadata
        Managing Connections to Axiom EPM
        Using Administrative Utilities
      Using the Adapter for C9 INC
        Preparing the C9 INC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for C9 INC
        Managing C9 INC Metadata
        Customizing the C9 INC Environment
      Using the Adapter for Caché
        Preparing the Caché Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Caché
        Managing Caché Metadata
        Customizing the Caché Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for CICS Transactions
        Preparing the CICS Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        CICS and VTAM Configuration
        Configuring the Adapter for CICS Transactions
        Managing CICS Transaction Metadata
        Invoking a CICS Transaction
        Running a TPG/SPG/AAS Transaction
      Using the Adapters for C-ISAM and ISAM
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter
        Managing C-ISAM Metadata
        Maintaining C-ISAM Data Sources Using SQL Commands
        Using a Secondary Index in C-ISAM and ISAM Files
      Using the Adapter for DATACOM
        Preparing the DATACOM Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DATACOM
        DATACOM Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing DATACOM Metadata
        Master Files for DATACOM
        Access Files for DATACOM
        Describing Multi-File Structures for DATACOM
        Data Retrieval Logic for DATACOM
      Using the Adapter for DB2
        Preparing the DB2 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DB2
        Managing DB2 Metadata
        Reporting Against a DB2 Stored Procedure
        Customizing the DB2 Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Using DB2 Cube Views
        Calling a DB2 Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for DB Heritage Files
        Preparing the DB Heritage Files Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for DB Heritage Files
        Managing DB Heritage Files Metadata
        Standard Master File Attributes for a DB Heritage Files Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a DB Heritage Files Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply-Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Multi-Format Logical Files
        DB Heritage Files Record Selection Efficiencies
      Using the Adapter for Essbase
        Preparing the Essbase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Essbase
        Managing Essbase Metadata
        Customizing the Essbase Environment
        Essbase Reporting With WebFOCUS
      Using the Adapter for Excel
        Configuring the Adapter for Excel
        Managing Excel Metadata
        Customizing the Excel Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Excel (via Direct Retrieval)
        Configuring the Adapter for Excel (via Direct Retrieval)
        Managing Metadata for Excel (via Direct Retrieval)
        Changing Adapter Settings
      Using the Adapter for Facebook
        Overview
        Creating a Facebook Application
        Configuring the Facebook Adapter
        Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Facebook Adapter
        Examples
      Using the Adapters for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapters for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
        Managing Metadata for Flat and Delimited Flat Files
      Using the Adapter for Google Analytics
        Overview
        Creating a Google Project
        Obtaining the Web Profile ID
        Configuring the Google Analytics Adapter
        Creating Metadata for the Google Analytics Adapter
      Using the Adapter for Greenplum
        Configuring the Adapter for Greenplum
        Managing Greenplum Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Hadoop with Apache Hive and Cloudera Impala
        Introducing the Adapter for Apache Hive and Cloudera Impala
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Hadoop/Hive/Impala
        Creating Synonyms
        Using Direct Pass-through
        Loading Data Using DataMigrator
      Using the Adapter for HP Vertica
        Preparing the HP Vertica Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for HP Vertica
        Managing HP Vertica Metadata
        Customizing the HP Vertica Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Hyperstage
        Preparing the Hyperstage Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Hyperstage
        Managing Hyperstage Metadata
        Customizing the Adapter for the Hyperstage Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for i Access
        Preparing the i Access Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for i Access
        Managing i Access Metadata
        Customizing the i Access Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for CA-IDMS/DB
        Preparing the IDMS/DB Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IDMS/DB
        IDMS/DB Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing IDMS/DB Metadata
        Master Files for IDMS/DB
        Access Files for IDMS/DB
        IDMS/DB Sample File Descriptions
        File Retrieval
        Record Retrieval
        Customizing the IDMS/DB Environment
        Tracing the Adapter for IDMS/DB
      Using the Adapter for CA-IDMS/SQL
        Preparing the IDMS/SQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IDMS/SQL
        Managing IDMS/SQL Metadata
        Customizing the IDMS/SQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for IMS
        IMS Environments: Overview
        Preparing the IMS Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IMS
        Managing IMS Metadata
        Master File Attributes
        Access File Attributes (DBCTL)
        Migrating From an Existing MVS Server (DBCTL)
        WebFOCUS Reporting With IMS
        Maintaining IMS Data Sources (DBCTL)
      Using the Adapter for IMS Transactions
        Preparing the IMS Transactions Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        Configuring the Adapter for IMS Transactions
        Managing IMS Transactions Metadata
        Invoking an IMS Transaction
        Invoking an IMS Stored Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Informix
        Preparing the Informix Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Informix
        Managing Informix Metadata
        Customizing the Informix Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling an Informix Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Ingres
        Preparing the Ingres Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Ingres
        Managing Ingres Metadata
        Customizing the Ingres Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Interplex
        Preparing the Interplex Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Interplex
        Managing Interplex Metadata
        Customizing the Interplex Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for iWay Adapter Framework (IWAF)
        Preparing the IWAF Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for IWAF
        Creating Synonyms
      Using the Adapter for JBoss Application Server
        Preparing the JBoss Application Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for JBoss Application Server
        Managing JBoss Application Server Metadata
        Customizing the JBoss Application Server Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for JDBC
        Preparing the JDBC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for JDBC
        Managing JDBC Metadata
        Customizing the JDBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Preparing the JD Edwards EnterpriseOne Environment
        Overview of the Setup Process
        Configuring the Adapter for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Creating Synonyms for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne
        Refreshing the Metadata Repository
        Refresh Security Extracts
        Converting Synonyms for JD Edwards EnterpriseOne (Non IBM i Platforms Only)
        Setting the UDCDIC Environment Variable (Windows only)
      Using the Adapter for JD Edwards World
        Installation Prerequisites
        Configuring the Adapter for JD Edwards World
        Managing JD Edwards World Metadata
        Enabling JD Edwards World Security
        Enabling Tracing
        Frequently Asked Questions
      Using the Adapter for JSON
        Preparing the JSON Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for JSON
        Managing JSON Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Lawson
        Adapter for Lawson: Overview
        Configuring the Adapter for Lawson
        Preparing the Lawson Environment
        Managing Lawson Metadata
        Updating Lawson Security Information
      Using the Adapter for LinkedIn
        Overview
        Creating a LinkedIn Application
        Configuring the LinkedIn Adapter
        Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the LinkedIn Adapter
        Examples
      Using the Adapter for Lotus Notes
        Preparing the Lotus Notes Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Lotus Notes
        Managing Lotus Notes Metadata
      Using the Adapter for LDAP
        Preparing the LDAP Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for LDAP
        Managing LDAP Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft Access
        Preparing the Microsoft Access Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft Access
        Managing Microsoft Access Metadata
        Customizing the Microsoft Access Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server
        Preparing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server
        Managing Microsoft SQL Server Metadata
        Reporting Against a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
        Microsoft SQL Server Compatibility With ODBC
      Using the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server ODBC
        Preparing the Microsoft SQL Server Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Microsoft SQL Server ODBC
        Managing Microsoft SQL Server ODBC Metadata
        Reporting Against a Microsoft SQL Server ODBC Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Microsoft SQL Server ODBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Microsoft SQL Server Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Millennium
        Preparing the Server Environment for Millennium
        Configuring the Adapter for Millennium
        Preparing the Millennium Environment
        Managing Millennium Metadata
        Standard Master File Attributes for a Millennium Data Source
      Using the Adapter for Model 204
        Preparing the Model 204 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Model 204
        Model 204 Overview and Mapping Considerations
        Managing Model 204 Metadata
        Master Files for Model 204
        Access Files for Model 204
        Customizing the Model 204 Environment
        Using Customized Security Exits
        Adapter Tracing for Model 204
      Using the Adapter for MongoDB
        Introducing the Adapter for MongoDB
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MongoDB
        Creating Synonyms
        Limitations
      Using the Adapter for MySQL
        Preparing the MySQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for MySQL
        Managing MySQL Metadata
        Customizing the Adapter for the MySQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for NATURAL
        Preparing the NATURAL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for NATURAL
        Managing Metadata for NATURAL
        Invoking a NATURAL Program
      Using the Adapter for NATURAL CICS Transactions
        Preparing the CICS Environment
        Supported Platforms and Release Information
        CICS and VTAM Configuration
        Installing NATURAL Support Programs
        Configuring the Adapter for NATURAL CICS Transactions
        Managing NATURAL CICS Transactions Metadata
        NATURAL Data Buffer Processing API
        Invoking a NATURAL CICS Transaction
      Using the Adapter for Netezza
        Preparing the Netezza Environment
        Unicode Support
        Configuring the Adapter for Netezza
        Managing Netezza Metadata
        Customizing the Netezza Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Nucleus
        Preparing the Nucleus Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Nucleus
        Managing Nucleus Metadata
        Customizing the Nucleus Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for ODBC
        Preparing the ODBC Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for ODBC
        Managing ODBC Metadata
        Customizing the ODBC Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Oracle
        Preparing the Oracle Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle
        Managing Oracle Metadata
        Reporting Against an Oracle Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Oracle Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling an Oracle Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Oracle E-Business Suite
        Preparing the Oracle E-Business Suite Environment
        Data Access and Security
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle E-Business Suite
        Maintaining Security Rules
      Using the Adapter for Oracle TimesTen
        Preparing the Oracle TimesTen Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Oracle TimesTen
        Managing Oracle TimesTen Metadata
        Customizing the Oracle TimesTen Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for parAccel
        Configuring the Adapter for parAccel
        Managing parAccel Metadata
      Using the Adapter for PeopleSoft
        Preparing the Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PeopleSoft
        Managing PeopleSoft Metadata
        Managing PeopleSoft Secured Data Access
        Managing Connections to PeopleSoft
        Using Administrative Utilities
        Migrating from 7.1x and 7.6.x to 7.7
        Advanced Administrative Topics
      Using the Adapter for PostgreSQL
        Preparing the PostgreSQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PostgreSQL
        Managing PostgreSQL Metadata
        Customizing the PostgreSQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Progress
        Preparing the Progress Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Progress
        Managing Progress Metadata
        Customizing the Progress Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for PSQL
        Preparing the PSQL Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for PSQL
        Managing PSQL Metadata
        Customizing the PSQL Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Query/400
        Preparing the Adapter for Query/400 Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Query/400
        Managing Query/400 Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Rdb
        Preparing the Rdb Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Rdb
        Managing Rdb Metadata
        Using Multiple Rdb DBMS Files
        Using Multischema Rdb DBMS Files
        Rdb Database Driver Performance
      Using the Adapter for Red Brick
        Preparing the Red Brick Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Red Brick
        Managing Red Brick Metadata
        Customizing the Red Brick Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for REST
        Configuring the Adapter for REST
        Managing RESTful Web Services Metadata
      Using the Adapter for Remote Servers
        Configuring Remote Servers
        Managing Metadata for Remote Servers
        Executing Stored Procedures
      Using the Adapter for RMS
        Preparing the RMS Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for RMS
        Managing RMS Metadata
        Manually Describing RMS Files
        Describing Complex RMS Keyed
        Associating an RMS Data Source to a Master File
        Retrieving Data From RMS Files
        Syntax for RMS Master File Attributes
        RMS Attribute Summary
        Read/Write Usage Limitations of the Adapter for RMS
      Using the Adapter for Salesforce.com
        Configuring the Adapter for Salesforce.com
        Creating Synonyms
      Using the Adapter for SAP Business Intelligence Warehouse (BW)
        Preparing the SAP BW Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP BW
        Supporting Mixed Code Page Environments
        Creating BEx Queries
        SAP BW Reporting With WebFOCUS
        Managing SAP BW Metadata
        Customization Settings
        Support for BEx Structures
        Producing SAP BW Requests Using SQL
      Using the Adapter for SAP
        Preparing the SAP Environment
        Accessing Multiple SAP Systems
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP
        Post-Configuration Tasks in an SAP Environment
        Managing SAP Metadata
        SAP Table Class Support for an Individual Table
        SAP Support for a Function Module
        SAP Data Type Support
        SAP Open/SQL Support
        Advanced SAP Features
        Setting Up the Report Processing Mode
        Supporting Mixed Code Page Environments
        Producing SAP Requests
      Using the Adapter for SAP Hana
        Preparing the SAP Hana Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SAP Hana
        Managing SAP Hana Metadata
        Customizing the SAP Hana Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Siebel
        Software Requirements for the Adapter for Siebel
        Preparing the Siebel Environment
        Preparing the Server Environment for Adapter Configuration
        Configuring the Adapter for Siebel
        Managing Siebel Metadata
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for SQLBase
        Preparing the SQLBase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SQLBase
        Managing SQLBase Metadata
        Customizing the SQLBase Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS)
        Preparing the SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS) Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for SQL Server Analysis Services
        Managing SQL Server Analysis Services Metadata
        Customizing the SQL Server Analysis Services Environment
        SQL Server Analysis Services (SSAS) Reporting With WebFOCUS
      Using the Adapter for Sybase
        Preparing the Sybase Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Sybase
        Managing Sybase Metadata
        Reporting Against a Sybase Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Sybase Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Sybase Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Teradata
        Preparing the Teradata Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Teradata
        Managing Teradata Metadata
        Reporting Against a Teradata Stored Procedure
        Customizing the Teradata Environment
        Optimization Settings
        Calling a Teradata Macro or Stored Procedure Using SQL Passthru
      Using the Adapter for Transoft
        Preparing the Transoft Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for Transoft
        Managing Transoft Metadata
        Customizing the Transoft Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for Twitter
        Overview
        Creating a Twitter Application
        Configuring the Twitter Adapter
        Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Twitter Adapter
        Examples
      Using the Adapter for UniData
        Preparing the UniData Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for UniData
        Managing UniData Metadata
        Customizing the UniData Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for UniVerse
        Preparing the UniVerse Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for UniVerse
        Managing UniVerse Metadata
        Customizing the UniVerse Environment
        Optimization Settings
      Using the Adapter for VSAM
        Preparing the Environment for VSAM
        Configuring the Adapter for VSAM
        Managing VSAM Metadata
        Associating a VSAM Data Source With a Master File
        Standard Master File Attributes for a VSAM Data Source
        Redefining a Field in a VSAM Data Source
        Extra-Large Record Length Support
        Describing Multiple Record Types
        Combining Multiply-Occurring Fields and Multiple Record Types
        Establishing VSAM Data and Index Buffers
        Using a VSAM Alternate Index
        VSAM Record Selection Efficiencies
        Maintaining VSAM KSDS Data Sources
        Using VSAM Relative Record Data Set (RRDS) Files
        Reviewing SQL Updates to VSAM Data Sources
      Using the Adapter for WAND Sentiment Analysis
        Overview
        Installing, Configuring, and Updating the WAND Taxonomy Server
        Installing and Using the WAND Taxonomy Editor
        Configuring the WAND Sentiment Analysis Adapter
        Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the WAND Sentiment Analysis Adapter
        Examples
      Using the Adapter for Web Services
        Configuring the Adapter for Web Services
        Managing Web Services Metadata
        Capturing a SOAP Request Using FILEDEF SOAPTSCQ in a Procedure
      Using the Adapter for Words Analysis
        Overview
        Configuring the Words Analysis Adapter
        Creating Metadata and Sample Reports for the Words Analysis Adapter
        Examples
      Using the Adapter for XML
        Preparing the XML Environment
        Configuring the Adapter for XML
        Managing XML Metadata
      XA Support
        XA Transaction Management
        Supported Interfaces
        Implementation
        Vendor Specifics
      Aggregate Awareness Support
        Relational Adapters and Aggregated SQL Queries
        Aggregate Awareness in an RDBMS
      Cluster Join
        Embedded Joins
        Embedded Join Master Files
      Translating COBOL File Descriptions
        Creating Synonyms From COBOL File Descriptions
        Controlling the Translation of a COBOL File Description
      Data Set Compression Exit: ZCOMP
        Invoking the ZCOMP Exit
        What Happens When ZCOMP is LOADED?
      Dynamic Private User Exit
        FOCSAM and the GETPRV User Exit
        Physical Implementation of the GETPRV Exit
        Master File for Data Access With GETPRV
        Access File for Data Access With GETPRV
        Calling Parameters and Work Areas
      Validation for Special Characters and Reserved Words
        Validation for Special Characters
        Validation for Reserved Words
      Launch PDF
    Server Administration
      Server Introduction
        Using the Web Console
        Console Options
        Other Icon Options
        Configuration Overview
        Running and Configuring the FOCUS Database and FOCUS Database Server
        Server Profiles
        Profile Commands
      Server Security
        Server Security Overview
        Configuring Authentication
        Configuring Privileges and Other Authorizations
        Configuring Server Encryption
        Access to Connection Information in WebFOCUS Procedures
        Configuring the Server for Multi-Tenant Deployment
      Managing Applications
        What Is an Application?
        Procedures and Metadata on the Application Tree
        Managing Applications and Paths
        Application Commands Overview
        Search Path Management Commands
        Application and File Management Commands
        Output Redirection Commands
        Application Metadata Commands and Catalog Metadata
        Help Information: APP HELP
        Restricting the Use of APP Commands
        Accessing Metadata and Procedures
        Allocating Temporary Files
        Temporary Space Usage and Location
        Temporary Disk Space Usage for Non-PDS Deployment
        Application Tools
      Data Adapters
        Changing Common Adapter Settings
        Configuring an Adapter
        Changing the Adapter Configuration
        Configuring a Remote Server
        SQL Automatic Passthru Status
        Determining SQL Optimization
        Determining Function Parameters
        Data Type Support Report
        Social Media Adapters
      Metadata
        Creating Synonyms
        Testing Synonyms
        Managing Synonyms
        Using the Wizards
      Stored Procedures
        Working With Stored Procedures
        Creating a Stored Procedure
        Sending Stored Procedure Report Output to Server-Side Printers
        Editing a Stored Procedure
        Running a Stored Procedure
        Scheduling a Procedure
        Sending an E-mail Notification for a Procedure
        Procedure Run-Time Processing Essentials
        Platform-Specific Commands and Features
        Stress Testing a Procedure
        Running Impact Analysis Reports
      Server Workspace Manager
        Configuring Workspace Manager
        Workspace Configuration Settings
        Editing Configuration Files
        Configuring Java Services
        Cluster Manager
        Monitoring Server Activity
      Listeners and Special Services
        Using the Listeners and Special Services Configuration Panes
        Special Services
        Listeners
      Troubleshooting
        Viewing Version Information
        Analyzing Server Activity
        Analyzing FOCUS Database Server Activity
        Tracing Server Activity
        z/OS-Specific Troubleshooting for the Unified Server
        z/OS-Specific Troubleshooting for z/OS HFS Deployment
        Recording and Reproducing User Actions
        Troubleshooting the Console
        Server Processes
        Gathering Diagnostic Information for Customer Support Services
      Unicode Support
        Unicode and the WebFOCUS Reporting Server
        Accessing Unicode Data
        Selecting, Reformatting, and Manipulating Characters
        Sort Order Under Unicode
        Added Unicode Support for Master Files, Data Files, and Application Directory Names
        Unicode PDF Output
      Platform-Specific Methods for Specifying EDAEXTSEC
        Platform-Specific Methods for Setting EDAEXTSEC
      Launch PDF
    Server Installation
      Introduction to Installation
        Versions
        What to Read After You Install
      Installation for Windows
        Installation Requirements
        Accessing the Software
        Installing
        Installation and Configuration Directories
        Verifying Installation
        Starting and Using a Server or Data Management Console
        Security Providers
        Additional Installation Options
        Generating a Trace
        Third-Party Software and Licenses
        General Information for a Windows Installation
        Troubleshooting for Windows
      Installation for UNIX
        Installation Requirements
        Installation and Configuration Directories
        Installing
        Verifying Installation
        Security Providers
        Starting and Using a Server
        Generating a Trace
        Third-Party Software and Licenses
        General Information for a UNIX Installation
        Troubleshooting for UNIX
      Installation for z/OS
        Installation for HFS and PDS
        HFS Deployment
        PDS Deployment
      Installation for IBM i
        Step 1. Reviewing System Requirements
        Step 2. Creating User IDs
        Step 3. Accessing the Installation Software
        Step 4. Running the Installation Program
        Step 5. Verifying the Server Installation
        Step 6. Security Providers
        Starting and Using the Server
        CL and CMD Programs
        General Information for an IBM i Installation
        Generating a Trace
        Third-Party Software and Licenses
        Troubleshooting for IBM i
      Installation for OpenVMS
        Step 1. Reviewing System Requirements
        Step 2. Creating User IDs
        Step 3. Accessing the Installation Software
        Step 4. Running the Setup Procedure
        Step 5. Verifying the Installation
        Step 6. Security Providers
        Starting and Using the Server
        Generating a Trace
        Third-Party Software and Licenses
        General Information for an OpenVMS Installation
        Troubleshooting for OpenVMS
      Information Builders and Third-Party Licenses
        Information Builders License
        OpenFlex SDK License
        Zip Archiver License
      Launch PDF
    Stored Procedure Reference for 3GL Procedures
      Introducing Stored Procedures
        Using a Stored Procedure
        Calling a Stored Procedure
        Stored Procedure Libraries
        Setting the Execution Order
      Calling a Program as a Stored Procedure
        Calling a Compiled Program
        Calling a Program With CALLPGM or EXEC
        Calling a Program With SQL EX
        Passing Parameters
        Program Communication
      Calling a JAVA Class as a Stored Procedure
        Execute Using CALLJAVA
        Execute Using EX
        Execute Using SQL EX and SQL CPJAVA EX
        Passing Parameters
        Writing a JAVA Class
        JAVA Class Communication
        Compiling and Running a JAVA Program
      Writing a 3GL Compiled Stored Procedure Program
        Program Requirements
        Setting Up the Control Block
        Storing Program Values
        Error Handling
        Issuing the CREATE TABLE Command
      User Written Routines
        Calling a User Written Routine
      Using the GENCPGM Build Tool
        Using GENCPGM
      Additional 3GL Reference Examples
        Subroutine Source Examples and Runtime Testing
        MTHNAME C Implementation
        MTHNAME C++ Implementation
        MTHNAME Fortran Implementation
        MTHNAME COBOL Implementation
        MTHNAME z/OS BAL Assembler Implementation
        MTHNAME Basic Implementation (Based on HP OpenVMS Basic 1.4)
        MTHNAME RPG IBM i ILE Implementation
        MTHNAME PL/1 Implementation
        MTHNAME Pascal Implementation (Based on HP OpenVMS Pascal 5.8)
        UREVERSE C Implementation
      Launch PDF
  DataMigrator Functions
    Functions Overview
      Function Arguments
      Function Categories
      Character Chart for ASCII and EBCDIC
    Character Functions
      ARGLEN: Measuring the Length of a String
      ASIS: Distinguishing Between Space and Zero
      BITSON: Determining If a Bit Is On or Off
      BITVAL: Evaluating a Bit String as an Integer
      BYTVAL: Translating a Character to Decimal
      CHKFMT: Checking the Format of a String
      CHKNUM: Checking a String for Numeric Format
      CTRAN: Translating One Character to Another
      CTRFLD: Centering a Character String
      EDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
      GETTOK: Extracting a Substring (Token)
      LCWORD: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
      LCWORD2: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
      LCWORD3: Converting a String to Mixed-Case
      LJUST: Left-Justifying a String
      LOCASE: Converting Text to Lowercase
      OVRLAY: Overlaying a Character String
      PARAG: Dividing Text Into Smaller Lines
      PATTERN: Generating a Pattern From a String
      POSIT: Finding the Beginning of a Substring
      REVERSE: Reversing the Characters in a String
      RJUST: Right-Justifying a Character String
      SOUNDEX: Comparing Character Strings Phonetically
      SPELLNM: Spelling Out a Dollar Amount
      SQUEEZ: Reducing Multiple Spaces to a Single Space
      STRIP: Removing a Character From a String
      STRREP: Replacing Character Strings
      SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
      TRIM: Removing Leading and Trailing Occurrences
      UPCASE: Converting Text to Uppercase
      XMLDECOD: Decoding XML-Encoded Characters
      XMLENCOD: XML-Encoding Characters
    Variable Length Character Functions
      Overview
      LENV: Returning the Length of an Alphanumeric Field
      LOCASV: Creating a Variable Length Lowercase String
      POSITV: Finding the Beginning of a Variable Length Substring
      SUBSTV: Extracting a Variable Length Substring
      TRIMV: Removing Characters From a String
      UPCASV: Creating a Variable Length Uppercase String
    Simplified Character Functions
      CHAR_LENGTH: Returning the Length in Characters of a String
      DIGITS: Converting a Number to a Character String
      LOWER: Returning a String With All Letters Lowercase
      LPAD: Left-Padding a Character String
      LTRIM: Removing Blanks From the Left End of a String
      POSITION: Returning the First Position of a Substring in a Source String
      RPAD: Right-Padding a Character String
      RTRIM: Removing Blanks From the Right End of a String
      SUBSTRING: Extracting a Substring From a Source String
      TOKEN: Extracting a Token From a String
      TRIM_: Removing a Leading Character, Trailing Character, or Both From a String
      UPPER: Returning a String With All Letters Uppercase
    Character Functions for DBCS Code Pages
      DCTRAN: Translating A Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character to Another
      DEDIT: Extracting or Adding Characters
      DSTRIP: Removing a Single-Byte or Double-Byte Character From a String
      DSUBSTR: Extracting a Substring
      JPTRANS: Converting Japanese Specific Characters
      KKFCUT: Truncating a String
      SFTDEL: Deleting the Shift Code From DBCS Data
      SFTINS: Inserting the Shift Code Into DBCS Data
    Data Source and Decoding Functions
      DB_EXPR: Inserting an SQL Expression Into a Request
      DB_INFILE: Testing Values Against a File or an SQL Subquery
      DB_LOOKUP: Retrieving Data Source Values
      DECODE: Decoding Values
      FIND: Verifying the Existence of a Value in a Data Source
      LAST: Retrieving the Preceding Value
      LOOKUP: Retrieving a Value From a Cross-referenced Data Source
    Date Functions
      Overview of Date Functions
      Using Standard Date Functions
      DATEADD: Adding or Subtracting a Date Unit to or From a Date
      DATECVT: Converting the Format of a Date
      DATEDIF: Finding the Difference Between Two Dates
      DATEMOV: Moving a Date to a Significant Point
      DATETRAN: Formatting Dates in International Formats
      FIYR: Obtaining the Financial Year
      FIQTR: Obtaining the Financial Quarter
      FIYYQ: Converting a Calendar Date to a Financial Date
      TODAY: Returning the Current Date
      Using Legacy Date Functions
      AYM: Adding or Subtracting Months
      AYMD: Adding or Subtracting Days
      CHGDAT: Changing How a Date String Displays
      DA Functions: Converting a Legacy Date to an Integer
      DMY, MDY, YMD: Calculating the Difference Between Two Dates
      DOWK and DOWKL: Finding the Day of the Week
      DT Functions: Converting an Integer to a Date
      GREGDT: Converting From Julian to Gregorian Format
      JULDAT: Converting From Gregorian to Julian Format
      YM: Calculating Elapsed Months
    Date-Time Functions
      Using Date-Time Functions
      HADD: Incrementing a Date-Time Value
      HCNVRT: Converting a Date-Time Value to Alphanumeric Format
      HDATE: Converting the Date Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Date Format
      HDIFF: Finding the Number of Units Between Two Date-Time Values
      HDTTM: Converting a Date Value to a Date-Time Value
      HGETC: Storing the Current Date and Time in a Date-Time Field
      HGETZ: Storing the Current Coordinated Universal Time in a Date-Time Field
      HHMMSS: Retrieving the Current Time
      HHMS: Converting a Date-Time Value to a Time Value
      HINPUT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to a Date-Time Value
      HMIDNT: Setting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to Midnight
      HNAME: Retrieving a Date-Time Component in Alphanumeric Format
      HPART: Retrieving a Date-Time Component as a Numeric Value
      HSETPT: Inserting a Component Into a Date-Time Value
      HTIME: Converting the Time Portion of a Date-Time Value to a Number
      HTMTOTS: Converting a Time to a Timestamp
      HYYWD: Returning the Year and Week Number From a Date-Time Value
    Simplified Date and Date-Time Functions
      DTADD: Incrementing a Date or Date-Time Component
      DTDIFF: Returning the Number of Component Boundaries Between Date or Date-Time Values
      DTPART: Returning a Date or Date-Time Component in Integer Format
      DTRUNC: Returning the Start of a Date Period for a Given Date
    Format Conversion Functions
      ATODBL: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Double-Precision Format
      EDIT: Converting the Format of a Field
      FPRINT: Converting Fields to Alphanumeric Format
      FTOA: Converting a Number to Alphanumeric Format
      HEXBYT: Converting a Decimal Integer to a Character
      ITONUM: Converting a Large Number to Double-Precision Format
      ITOPACK: Converting a Large Binary Integer to Packed-Decimal Format
      ITOZ: Converting a Number to Zoned Format
      PCKOUT: Writing a Packed Number of Variable Length
      PTOA: Converting a Packed-Decimal Number to Alphanumeric Format
      TSTOPACK: Converting an MSSQL or Sybase Timestamp Column to Packed Decimal
      UFMT: Converting an Alphanumeric String to Hexadecimal
      XTPACK: Writing a Packed Number With Up to 31 Significant Digits to an Output File
    Numeric Functions
      ABS: Calculating Absolute Value
      CHKPCK: Validating a Packed Field
      DMOD, FMOD, and IMOD: Calculating the Remainder From a Division
      EXP: Raising e to the Nth Power
      EXPN: Evaluating a Number in Scientific Notation
      INT: Finding the Greatest Integer
      LOG: Calculating the Natural Logarithm
      MAX and MIN: Finding the Maximum or Minimum Value
      NORMSDST and NORMSINV: Calculating Normal Distributions
      PRDNOR and PRDUNI: Generating Reproducible Random Numbers
      RDNORM and RDUNIF: Generating Random Numbers
      SQRT: Calculating the Square Root
    System Functions
      CLSDDREC: Closing All Files Opened by the PUTDDREC Function
      FEXERR: Retrieving an Error Message
      FGETENV: Retrieving the Value of an Environment Variable
      FPUTENV: Assigning a Value to an Environment Variable
      GETUSER: Retrieving a User ID
      JOBNAME: Retrieving the Current Process Identification String
      PUTDDREC: Writing a Character String as a Record in a Sequential File
      SLEEP: Suspending Execution for a Given Number of Seconds
      SYSVAR: Retrieving the Value of a z/OS System Variable
    SQL Character Functions
      CHAR_LENGTH: Finding the Length of a Character String
      CONCAT: Concatenating Two Character Strings
      DIGITS: Converting a Numeric Value to a Character String
      EDIT: Editing a Value According to a Format (SQL)
      LCASE: Converting a Character String to Lowercase
      LTRIM: Removing Leading Spaces
      POSITION: Finding the Position of a Substring
      RTRIM: Removing Trailing Spaces
      SUBSTR: Extracting a Substring From a String Value (SQL)
      TRIM: Removing Leading or Trailing Characters (SQL)
      UCASE: Converting a Character String to Uppercase
      VARGRAPHIC: Converting to Double-byte Character Data
    SQL Date and Time Functions
      CURRENT_DATE: Obtaining the Date
      CURRENT_TIME: Obtaining the Time
      CURRENT_TIMESTAMP: Obtaining the Timestamp (Date/Time)
      DAY: Obtaining the Day of the Month From a Date/Timestamp
      DAYS: Obtaining the Number of Days Since January 1, 0001
      EXTRACT: Obtaining a Datetime Field From Date/Time/Timestamp
      HOUR: Obtaining the Hour From Time/Timestamp
      MICROSECOND: Obtaining Microseconds From Time/Timestamp
      MILLISECOND: Obtaining Milliseconds From Time/Timestamp
      MINUTE: Obtaining the Minute From Time/Timestamp
      MONTH: Obtaining the Month From Date/Timestamp
      SECOND: Obtaining the Second Field From Time/Timestamp
      QUARTER: Returning the Quarter of the Year
      WEEKDAY: Returning the Day of the Week
      YEAR: Obtaining the Year From a Date or Timestamp
    SQL Data Type Conversion Functions
      CAST: Converting to a Specific Data Type
      CHAR: Converting to a Character String
      CHAR: Converting to a Standard Date-Time Format
      DATE: Converting to a Date
      DECIMAL: Converting to Decimal Format
      FLOAT: Converting to Floating Point Format
      INT: Converting to an Integer
      SMALLINT: Converting to a Small Integer
      TIME: Converting to a Time
      TIMESTAMP: Converting to a Timestamp
    SQL Numeric Functions
      ABS: Returning an Absolute Value (SQL)
      LOG: Returning a Logarithm (SQL)
      EXP: Returning e Raised to a Power
      POWER: Raising a Value to a Power
      SQRT: Returning a Square Root (SQL)
    SQL Miscellaneous Functions
      COUNTBY: Incrementing Column Values Row by Row
      HEX: Converting to Hexadecimal
      IF: Testing a Condition
      LENGTH: Obtaining the Physical Length of a Data Item
      VALUE: Coalescing Data Values
    SQL Operators
      CASE: SQL Case Operator
      COALESCE: Coalescing Data Values
      NULLIF: NULLIF Operator
    Launch PDF
  DataMigrator User's Guide
    Introduction to DataMigrator
      Data Management and Migration Overview
      What Is DataMigrator?
      DataMigrator Architecture
      DataMigrator Server
      DataMigrator Data Management Console
      Server Web Console
      Designing Data Flows and Process Flows
      Revised Functionality
      Getting Help
      Information Builders and iWay Software on the Web
    Setting Up DataMigrator
      DataMigrator Setup At a Glance
      Remote Server Setup At a Glance
      DataMigrator Setup
      Initiating Server Administration Tasks
      Authorizing DataMigrator Server Usage and Administration
      Managing Application Directories and Configuring the Application Path
      Configuring Data Adapters
      Creating Metadata
      Testing Sample Data and a Process Flow
      Performing Server Administration Tasks
      Using Secure Shell FTP (SFTP)
      Upgrading DataMigrator From Release 4.3 or 5.1
      Upgrading DataMigrator from Release 5.2, 5.3, 7.1, or 7.6
    Planning a DataMigrator Application
      Designing Your Application
      Using Synonyms for Data Sources and Data Targets
      Reviewing Your Data Sources
      Reviewing Your Data Targets
      Establishing Security for DataMigrator
    Working in the Data Management Console
      Data Management Console Interface
      Navigation Pane
      DataMigrator Workspace
      Text Editor
      Aerial View
      Ribbon Tabs
      Metadata Tab
      Text Editor Tab
      Console Log
      Setting Flow Properties
      Viewing Properties
      Setting User Preferences
      User Privileges
      License Code
      Configuring National Language Support
      Ending a Data Management Console Session
    Designing a Data Flow
      The Data Flow Interface
      Simple Data Flow at a Glance
      Complex Data Flow at a Glance
      Creating a Data Flow
      Specifying Data Sources
      Creating a Source Transformation in a Data Source Object
      Joining Data Sources
      Adding a SELECT to a Data Flow
      Adding a UNION to a Data Flow
      Selecting Columns
      Testing the SQL Statement
      Specifying Filters in a Data Flow
      Specifying Sorts
      Selecting a Data Target
      Specifying Data Target Options
      Mapping Transformations
      Using Variables in a Flow
      Using Functions
      Column Formats and Mapping
      Setting Properties of a Flow
      Running a Data Flow
      Creating a Direct Load Flow
      Creating a DBMS SQL Flow
      Creating a Quick ETL Copy
    Designing a Process Flow
      Process Flow Methodology
      Process Flow Interface
      Simple Process Flow At a Glance
      Complex Process Flow at a Glance
      Creating a Process Flow
      Adding a Saved Procedure to a Process Flow
      Assigning and Using Variables in a Process Flow
      Maintaining Continuous Processing in a Single Agent
      Executing a Process Flow That Contains Only Procedures
      Adding Email Messages to a Process Flow
      Setting Connection Logic
      Grouping and Controlling Simultaneous Execution of Flows
      Running a Process Flow
      Scheduling a Process Flow
    Tutorial: Creating Data and Process Flows With DataMigrator
      What You Are Going To Do
      Startup and Setup Tasks
      Exercise 1: Creating the Data Flow
      Selecting and Joining Data Sources
      Selecting and Managing Columns
      Adding Data Targets
      Submitting the Data Flow
      Data Flow Review
      Exercise 2: Creating the Process Flow
      Starting the Process Flow
      Adding a Data Flow Object to the Process Flow
      Branching in the Process Flow
      Submitting the Process Flow
    Generating Reports, Viewing the Log File, and Printing Flows
      DataMigrator Log, Statistics, and Summary Flow Reports
      Scheduler Reports
      Impact Analysis Reports on Synonyms, Procedures and Columns
      Working With a Report
      Viewing a Detailed Flow Report and Log File
      Printing a Graphical Representation of a Data or Process Flow
    Optimizing Performance
      Improving Data Extraction Performance
      Using Automatic Passthru
      Improving Data Loading Performance
      Improving Lookup Performance
    Working With Synonyms
      Synonym Editor Layout
      Viewing and Editing Synonym Attributes
      Using Variables in a Synonym
      Variables Attribute Summary
      How to Use a Variable in a Synonym
      Creating, Enhancing, and Editing Synonyms Using Modeling View
      Adding Indexes to a Synonym
      Adding Virtual Columns (DEFINE) in a Synonym
      Viewing Data Profiling Characteristics
      Viewing Data Lineage for a Column
    Advanced DataMigrator Tips and Techniques
      Overview of Examples
      Creating Sample Data and Metadata
      Horizontal Partitioning with Multi-Table Load
      Using the Decode Function
      Generating a Surrogate Key
      Generating a Surrogate Key Using Slowly Changing Dimensions
      Mapping to a Sequential File of a Specific Format
      Creating and Using Reusable Transformations
      Using Multiple Targets to Create a Single File With Multiple Records Types
      Creating a Target File With Multiple RECTYPEs
      Combining Multiple Sources Rows in a Single Target Row
      Using Lookups to Create Multi-Table Flows Without Joins
      Record Logging
      Using Variables in Data Flows
      Creating a Data Flow Using a Target Based on a Predefined XML Schema
      Loading a Target Table Using the File Listener
      Sending a Target File to an FTP or SFTP Server
      Loading a Star Schema
      Iterating Through Multiple Tables
      Using Subqueries
      Loading Images Into a Database Table
    Change Data Capture
      Enabling the Database for Logging in Relational Databases
      Enabling the Database for Logging in VSAM
      Properties of a Table Log Record Synonym
      Tutorial: Using Change Data Capture with Relational Databases
      Tutorial: Using Change Data Capture With VSAM
    DataMigrator Log Statistics and Tables
      Log and Statistics Tables
    Event-Based Scheduling
      Starting Flows With CMRUN
      Starting Flows With CMASAP
      Starting Flows From FOCUS
      Determining the Status of an Event-Based Flow
    Problems, Errors, and Troubleshooting
      DataMigrator Status Codes and Server Messages
      Server Run-Time Error Codes
      DataMigrator Management Problem Resolution
      Including Run-Time Messages in the ETL Log
      Performing a Trace to Diagnose Server Problems
    Customizing Your Environment
      DataMigrator Parameters
    Source Management
      Overview of Source Management
      Source Control Security Server and Client Setup
      Configuring Source Management and Setting Up Source Control
      Using a Source Control System to Manage Procedures and Synonyms
    Launch PDF
  Resource Analyzer Administrator's and User's Manual
    What Is Resource Analyzer?
      Resource Analyzer Overview
      Resource Analyzer for Decision Support Analysis
      Uses for Resource Analyzer: Performance Analysis
      Introduction to Data Access and Performance Analysis With Resource Analyzer
      Sample Data Access Questions
      How Resource Analyzer Works
      Software Prerequisites
      Overview of the Web Console
      Overview of Reporting With Resource Analyzer
      Integrating Resource Analyzer With WebFOCUS, Managed Reporting, and ReportCaster
    Configuring and Administering Resource Management
      Resource Management Interface
      Configuring Resource Management
      Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
      Migrating the Resource Management Repository
      Event Routing
    Resource Analyzer Report Options
      Reports Overview
      Resource Analyzer Reporting
      Resource Analyzer Report Options
      General Reports
      Resource Analyzer Reports
    Getting Help
      Resource Management Administration Help
      Reporting Application Context-Sensitive Help From Reports
    Administrative Usage Monitoring Tables Column Descriptions
      Administrative Tables (RMLSYS.MAS)
      Usage Monitoring Table (RMLDB.MAS)
      Usage Monitoring RDBMS Table Sizing
      Renamed or Moved Columns
    Using DDL Statements to Create the Internal Tables
      Overview of Creating the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Internal Tables
    Launch PDF
  Resource Governor Administrator's and User's Manual
     What Is Resource Governor?
      Resource Governor Overview
      Resource Governor Features
      Resource Governor Operations
      How Resource Governor Works
      Resource Governor Usage Monitoring
    Configuring and Administering Resource Management
      Resource Management Interface
      Configuring Resource Management
      Administering Resource Management From the Web Console
      Migrating the Resource Management Repository
      Event Routing
    Rules Files and Knowledge Bases
      Overview
      Working With Business Rules
      Working with Resource Thresholds
      Working with Knowledge Bases
      Maintaining Knowledge Bases
    Resource Governor Report Options
      Reports Overview
      Resource Governor Reporting
      Resource Governor Report Options
      General Reports
      Resource Governor Reports
    Getting Help
      Resource Management Administration Help
      Reporting Application Context-Sensitive Help From Reports
    Administrative Usage Monitoring Tables Column Descriptions
      Administrative Tables (RMLSYS.MAS)
      Usage Monitoring Table (RMLDB.MAS)
      Usage Monitoring RDBMS Table Sizing
      Renamed or Moved Columns
    Using DDL Statements to Create the Internal Tables
      Overview of Creating the Resource Analyzer and Resource Governor Internal Tables
    Business Rule Language (BRL)
      Using Business Rule Language (BRL)
      BRL Factual Information
      BRL Keywords
      Pre-defined Variables
      Internal Functions
      Customized Rule Examples
    Launch PDF
  IWAF Adapter for Salesforce
    Introducing the IWAF Adapter for Salesforce
      Features of the IWAF Adapter for Salesforce
      Component Information for the IWAF Adapter for Salesforce
    Getting Started With Salesforce
      Prerequisites
    Creating Metadata for Salesforce
      Configuring the Salesforce Service Adapter
      Adding an Adapter and Connection to a Salesforce Service
      Adding an Adapter and Connection to a Salesforce Event
      Creating a Synonym for a Salesforce Service
      Sample Data From a Salesforce Service
      Creating a Synonym for a Salesforce Event
    Joining Salesforce Business Objects
      Joining Salesforce Business Objects
    Using DataMigrator to Copy Data from Salesforce
      Retrieving Data From Salesforce
      Capturing a Salesforce Event
    Using WebFOCUS to Report on Data From Salesforce
      Using InfoAssist to Report From Salesforce
      Reporting from Salesforce
    Using DataMigrator to Load Data to Salesforce
      Creating Procedures to Set All On
      Load Data Using a Filter
      Load Data Using a JOIN
      Viewing What was Loaded
      Using Upsert
    Using the Salesforce Bulk API
      Using the Salesforce Bulk API
      Creating a Source Data File
      Creating a Job and Adding a Batch
      Creating a Flow to Close a Job
      Creating a Flow to Check Job Status
      Running a Flow to Load Data
      Running a Flow to Check Results
      Getting Results for a Batch
      Creating a Process Flow
      Using Upsert
      Adding Additional Batches to a Job
      Parameters for Creating a Job
    Certificate Management
      Prerequisites
      Key Store Management
      Generating the Certificate Signing Request
      Purchasing the Commercial Certificate From Symantec or a Similar Certificate Authority
      Importing the Root Certificate and Intermediate Certificate
      Importing the Signed Certificate
      Trust Store Management
    Creating Workflow Rules and Outbound Messages in Salesforce
      Real Time Event Capture
      Creating a Workflow Rule
      Creating Outbound Messages
      Activate the Rule for the Outbound Message
    Launch PDF
  Hyperstage
    Hyperstage for PostgreSQL Reference Guide
      About WebFOCUS Hyperstage
        Hyperstage Overview
        Hyperstage and PostgreSQL
      Installing and Configuring the Hyperstage Database
        Technical Requirements
        Installing Hyperstage
        Configuring the Hyperstage (PG) Adapter
        Configuring Hyperstage
        Configuration Tips and Examples
      Using the Hyperstage Database Beyond WebFOCUS
        Starting and Stopping the Hyperstage Server Under Windows
        Working With the Hyperstage Server
        Checking the Hyperstage Version
        Quick ETL Copy For Hyperstage Using Extended Bulk Load Utility
        About Log Files
        About Errors
        About SQL Command Syntax
        About SQL ISO Standards
      Managing Hyperstage Tables
        About the Hyperstage Database Files
        About Supported Data Types
        Creating and Dropping Tables
        Modifying Table Structures
        About Column Options
        Converting Oracle DDL to Hyperstage
        Converting SQL Server to Hyperstage
        Converting PostgreSQL to Hyperstage
        Viewing Compression Ratio Statistics
      Data Manipulation Statements
        Design of DML in Hyperstage
        INSERT
        UPDATE
        DELETE
      Character Set Support
        Supported Character Sets
        Collations and Comparisons
        Padding
      Importing and Exporting Data in Hyperstage
        About Importing and Exporting Data
        Hyperstage COPY FROM Syntax
        Hyperstage Loader Reject File
        Importing Files With Invalid Values
        Hyperstage COPY TO Syntax
        Single-character Delimiter
        About Transactions
        About Export Differences in Hyperstage
        Hyperstage Binary Format
        Exporting and Importing Query Results
      Running Queries in Hyperstage
        About the Knowledge Grid
        Running Queries
        Creating VIEWs in Hyperstage
        SELECT Syntax Supported in Hyperstage
        Query Performance
      Hyperstage Backup and Recovery
        Backup Procedure
        Restore Procedure
      Functions and Operators
        Hyperstage Optimizer Supported Functions and Operators
      Hyperstage Data Tools
        Hyperstage Consistency Manager
        Hyperstage MySQL to PostgreSQL Migrator (“External Migrator”)
        MySQL to PostgreSQL Data Type Mappings
        Limitations and Notes
        Using the External Migrator
      Launch PDF
    Hyperstage MySQL-based to PostgreSQL-based Migration
      Introduction
        Hyperstage Technical Requirements
      Installing and Configuring Hyperstage
        Installing Hyperstage
        Configuring the Hyperstage (PG) Adapter
        Configuring Hyperstage
      Hyperstage MySQL to PostgreSQL Migration Using the External Migrator
        Hyperstage MySQL to PostgreSQL Migrator (“External Migrator”)
        Limitations and Notes
        Using the External Migrator
        MySQL to PostgreSQL Data Type Mappings
      Hyperstage MySQL to PostgreSQL Migration Using Quick ETL Copy
        Migration Using Quick ETL Copy With the MySQL ODBC Driver
        Migration Using Quick ETL Copy With the MySQL JDBC Driver
      Launch PDF